Krone BiG M 420 Operating Instructions


Add to my manuals
606 Pages

advertisement

Krone BiG M 420 Operating Instructions | Manualzz

Self-propelled High-Performance

Mower-Conditioner

BiG M 420

(from serial no.: 976 393)

Order no.: 150 000 301 04 Caterpillar US

29.08.2017

Table of Contents

Pos: 1 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

2

Pos: 2 /Layout Module /Inhaltsverzeichnis @ 0\mod_1196861555655_78.docx @ 15165 @ 1 @ 1

Table of Contents

1 Table of Contents

1   Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................... 3  

2   To this Document ................................................................................................................................. 14  

2.1

  Validity .............................................................................................................................................. 14  

2.2

  Re-Ordering ...................................................................................................................................... 14  

2.3

  Target group of this document ......................................................................................................... 14  

2.4

  How to use this document ................................................................................................................ 15  

2.4.1

  Directories and References ...................................................................................................... 15  

2.4.2

  Direction Information ................................................................................................................. 15  

2.4.3

  Term “Machine” ......................................................................................................................... 15  

2.4.4

  Figures ...................................................................................................................................... 15  

2.4.5

  Scope of Document................................................................................................................... 16  

2.4.6

  Means of representation ........................................................................................................... 16  

3   Safety ..................................................................................................................................................... 19  

3.1

  Intended use ..................................................................................................................................... 19  

3.2

  Reasonably foreseeable misuse ...................................................................................................... 19  

3.3

  Service life of the machine ............................................................................................................... 20  

3.3.1

  Personnel Qualification and Training ........................................................................................ 21  

3.3.2

  Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety Instructions ............................................ 21  

3.3.3

  Safety-conscious work practices ............................................................................................... 21  

3.4

  Safety and Accident Prevention Regulations ................................................................................... 22  

3.4.1

  Danger zones ............................................................................................................................ 23  

3.5

  Conveying persons, guides, operating personnel ............................................................................ 26  

3.6

  Self-propelled working machine ....................................................................................................... 26  

3.7

  Autopilot ........................................................................................................................................... 27  

3.8

  SectionControl .................................................................................................................................. 28  

3.9

  Implements ....................................................................................................................................... 29  

3.10

  Hydraulic system .............................................................................................................................. 29  

3.11

  Battery .............................................................................................................................................. 30  

3.12

  Cooling system ................................................................................................................................. 30  

3.13

  Tyres ................................................................................................................................................ 30  

3.14

  Emergency exit ................................................................................................................................. 30  

3.15

  Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines .......................................................................... 31  

3.16

  Fire preventions ................................................................................................................................ 31  

3.17

  Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 32  

3.18

  Telephone and radio sets ................................................................................................................. 32  

3.19

  Safety Equipment ............................................................................................................................. 33  

3.19.1

  Main battery switch ................................................................................................................... 33  

3.19.2

  Wheel chocks ............................................................................................................................ 34  

3.19.3

  SMV Emblem ............................................................................................................................ 34  

3.20

  Safety routines ................................................................................................................................. 35  

3.20.1

  Stopping and securing the machine .......................................................................................... 35  

3.20.2

  Supporting lifted machine and machine parts securely ............................................................ 35  

3.21

  Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine ................................................................ 36  

3.21.1

  Basic machine „front -/ rear view“ ............................................................................................. 36  

3.21.2

  Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine” ................................................................ 38  

3.21.3

  Lateral mowing unit left / right ................................................................................................... 40  

3.21.4

  Front mowing unit ...................................................................................................................... 44  

3

Table of Contents

4   Data memory ......................................................................................................................................... 48  

5   Machine Description ............................................................................................................................ 49  

5.1

  Variants for Machine Equipment ...................................................................................................... 49  

5.2

  Machine overview ............................................................................................................................. 49  

5.3

  Identification Plate ............................................................................................................................ 50  

5.4

  Information Required for Questions and Orders .............................................................................. 50  

5.4.1

  Contact ...................................................................................................................................... 51  

6   Technical Data of the Machine ............................................................................................................ 52  

6.1

  Technical data .................................................................................................................................. 52  

6.1.1

  Technical Data Air Conditioning System................................................................................... 54  

6.1.2

  Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt)................................................................................... 54  

6.2

  Technical Data of Electrical System ................................................................................................. 54  

6.3

  Consumables ................................................................................................................................... 55  

6.4

  Lubricants ......................................................................................................................................... 55  

6.4.1

  Central Lubrication System, NLGI Class 2 ............................................................................... 56  

7   Cabin ...................................................................................................................................................... 57  

7.1

  Opening the cabin door .................................................................................................................... 58  

7.2

  Operators controls ............................................................................................................................ 59  

7.2.1

  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 59  

7.3

  Air comfort seat ................................................................................................................................ 60  

7.3.1

  Setting the left armrest .............................................................................................................. 62  

7.3.2

  Right armrest ............................................................................................................................. 63  

7.3.3

  Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions ............................................................................ 64  

7.4

  Guide's seat...................................................................................................................................... 65  

7.4.1

  Cooler ........................................................................................................................................ 65  

7.4.2

  Emergency Exit ......................................................................................................................... 66  

7.4.3

  Engine diagnostics plug (Service Tool Connector) ................................................................... 67  

7.5

  Steering Column and Foot Pedals ................................................................................................... 68  

7.5.1

  Steering Column Adjustment .................................................................................................... 69  

7.5.2

  Horn .......................................................................................................................................... 70  

7.5.3

  Flashing Light Switch ................................................................................................................ 70  

7.5.4

  Full Beam .................................................................................................................................. 71  

7.5.5

  Headlamp Flasher ..................................................................................................................... 71  

7.5.6

  Using the operating brake ......................................................................................................... 72  

7.6

  Switch Group Roof Panel ................................................................................................................. 73  

7.7

  Lighting ............................................................................................................................................. 74  

7.7.1

  Overview ................................................................................................................................... 74  

7.7.2

  Direction indicator, hazard lights and brake light ...................................................................... 75  

7.7.2.1

  Switching on the indicator .................................................................................................. 75  

7.7.2.2

 

7.7.2.3

 

Brake light .......................................................................................................................... 75

Switching on the hazard warning flasher ........................................................................... 75

7.7.3

  Side light/dipped beam ............................................................................................................. 76  

7.7.3.1

  Switching on the parking light ............................................................................................ 76  

 

 

7.7.3.2

  Switching on the dipped beam ........................................................................................... 76  

7.7.4

  Working floodlights .................................................................................................................... 77  

7.7.4.1

 

7.7.4.2

 

7.7.4.3

 

Working floodlights Cab ..................................................................................................... 78

Working floodlight Bottom front .......................................................................................... 78

Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units" ............................. 79  

 

 

4

Table of Contents

7.7.4.4

  Working floodlight rear ....................................................................................................... 79  

7.7.5

  Allround lights (optional) ........................................................................................................... 80  

7.7.6

  Interior lighting/reading lamp ..................................................................................................... 81  

7.7.7

  Additional Spotlight ................................................................................................................... 82  

7.8

  Outside mirrors ................................................................................................................................. 83  

7.8.1

  Left Outside Mirror .................................................................................................................... 83  

7.8.2

  Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ............................................................................ 84  

7.8.2.1

 

7.8.2.2

 

Setting the right outside mirror ........................................................................................... 84  

Setting the anti-collision mirror .......................................................................................... 84  

7.9

  Inside mirror ..................................................................................................................................... 85  

7.10

  Sun blind .......................................................................................................................................... 85  

7.11

  Windshield wipers ............................................................................................................................ 86  

7.12

  Washer system – windshield ............................................................................................................ 86  

7.13

  Switch Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 87  

7.14

  Panel Switch ..................................................................................................................................... 87  

7.14.1

  Actuating release switches ....................................................................................................... 88  

7.14.2

  Release switch – road/field ....................................................................................................... 89  

7.14.3

  Autopilot release switch / - optional .......................................................................................... 90  

7.14.4

  Release switch - holding brake ................................................................................................. 91  

7.14.5

  Release switch travelling gear .................................................................................................. 92  

7.14.6

  Axle separation key ................................................................................................................... 93  

7.15

  Indicator Lamps ................................................................................................................................ 94  

7.15.1

  Charge Indicator Lamp ............................................................................................................. 94  

7.15.2

  Ignition lock ............................................................................................................................... 96  

7.15.3

  Cigarette lighter / 12-V socket ................................................................................................... 97  

7.16

  Diagnostics Socket (ISO-Bus) .......................................................................................................... 97  

7.16.1

  Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection ...................................................................................... 98  

7.17

  Multi-Function Lever ....................................................................................................................... 100  

7.17.1

  Multi-Function Lever (Continued) ............................................................................................ 102  

7.17.1.1

  Driving .............................................................................................................................. 102  

7.18

  Klimatronik / heating ....................................................................................................................... 103  

7.18.1

  Control and display elements .................................................................................................. 103  

7.18.2

  Operation ................................................................................................................................ 105  

7.18.3

  Switching on the System ......................................................................................................... 105  

7.18.4

  Setting the Desired Cab Temperature .................................................................................... 105  

7.18.5

  Switch air conditioning On / Off ............................................................................................... 106  

7.18.6

  Switching REHEAT Mode On/Off ........................................................................................... 107  

7.18.7

  Manual setting of evaporator fan speed ................................................................................. 108  

7.18.8

  Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit ............................................................... 109  

7.18.9

  Showing Faults in the Display ................................................................................................. 109  

7.19

  Adjustable Fan Nozzles ................................................................................................................. 111  

7.20

  Radio .............................................................................................................................................. 111  

8   Info centre "EasyTouch" ................................................................................................................... 112  

8.1.1

  Overview ................................................................................................................................. 112  

8.2

  Information Section ........................................................................................................................ 114  

8.2.1

  Motor Data (II) Information Section ......................................................................................... 116  

8.2.2

  Information section of the travelling gear data (III) ................................................................. 117  

8.2.3

  Information section of settings (IV and V) ............................................................................... 119  

8.2.4

  Information Section Drive Information (VI) .............................................................................. 119  

5

Table of Contents

8.3

  Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen ........................................................................................ 120  

8.3.1

  Quick Access “Hydraulically Adjustable Cutting Height” (optional) ........................................ 120  

8.3.2

  Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure)

(optional) 122  

8.3.3

  Quick Access “Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter” ........................................................... 124  

8.3.4

  Quick Access „Customer Data Counter“ ................................................................................. 125  

8.3.5

  Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ......................................................... 126  

8.3.5.1

 

8.3.5.2

 

Switching the counter on or off ........................................................................................ 127

Selecting / Deleting the Area(s) of a Customer Counter ................................................. 128

8.3.5.3

  Switching to General Counters (Machine Data Counters)............................................... 129  

8.3.6

  Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension" ............................................................................. 130  

 

 

8.3.6.1

 

8.3.6.2

 

From the "Road travel" basic screen ............................................................................... 130

From the "Field mode" basic screen ................................................................................ 131

8.3.7

  Quick access "Machine settings" ............................................................................................ 132  

8.4

  Menu level ...................................................................................................................................... 133  

 

 

8.4.1

  Bringing up a Menu Level ....................................................................................................... 137  

8.5

  Main menu 1 "Settings" .................................................................................................................. 138  

8.6

  Menu 1-1 "Parameters" .................................................................................................................. 139  

8.6.1

  Entering parameters................................................................................................................ 140  

8.7

  Menu 1-2 „Machine Setting“ ........................................................................................................... 141  

8.7.1

  Menu 1-3 "Units" ..................................................................................................................... 146  

8.7.2

  Menu 1-4 “Language” ............................................................................................................. 147  

8.7.3

  Menu 1-5 "Display" .................................................................................................................. 148  

8.7.4

  Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" ............................................................................................................. 149  

8.7.5

  Menu 1-5-2 Beeper ................................................................................................................. 150  

8.7.6

  Beeper limited by time ............................................................................................................ 151  

8.7.7

  Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ............................................................................................ 152  

8.7.8

  Menu 1-5-5 Configure status line ............................................................................................ 153  

8.7.9

  Menu 1-6 Date/time................................................................................................................. 154  

8.7.10

  Menu 1-9 Owner's address ..................................................................................................... 155  

8.8

  Main Menu 2 Counters ................................................................................................................... 156  

8.8.1

  Machine Data Counter ............................................................................................................ 156  

8.8.1.1

  Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3) .......................................................... 157  

8.8.2

  Switching to Customer DataCounters ..................................................................................... 157  

8.9

  Main Menu 3 Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 158  

8.9.1

  Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" .................................................................................. 159  

8.10

  Calibrating Menu 3-3 ISOBUS Steering System ............................................................................ 161  

8.10.1

  Calibrating Steering Angle Sensor .......................................................................................... 162  

8.11

  Calibrating Steering (Valves) Automatically ................................................................................... 163  

8.11.1

  Calibrating Steering (Valves) Manually ................................................................................... 167  

8.12

  Setting the Steering Radius ........................................................................................................... 168  

8.12.1

  Menu 3-5 „Manual Mode“ ........................................................................................................ 169  

8.12.2

  Status display of general sensors (2) ...................................................................................... 171  

8.12.3

  Menu 3-6 Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter .................................................................... 173  

8.13

  Main menu 4 "Service" ................................................................................................................... 175  

8.13.1

  Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 176  

8.13.2

  Display of Possible Faults for the Diagnostics ........................................................................ 179  

8.13.3

  Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension ........................................................................... 180  

8.13.4

  Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation .................................................................... 183  

6

Table of Contents

8.13.5

  Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height ............................................................................... 188  

8.13.6

  Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood (optional) ................................................... 194  

8.13.7

  Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics (optional) ............................................................................ 199  

8.13.8

  Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps (optional) ............................................................... 203  

8.13.9

  Menu 4-1-9 ISOBUS Steering System.................................................................................... 207  

8.13.10

  Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ............................................................................................... 210  

8.13.11

  Menu 4-1-11 CAN-Bus ............................................................................................................ 218  

8.13.12

  Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear ................................................................................................... 219  

8.13.13

  Menu 4-1-13 Electronics ......................................................................................................... 228  

8.13.14

  Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine .................................................................................................... 229  

8.13.15

  Menu 4-1-15 Joystick .............................................................................................................. 232  

8.13.16

  Menu 4-1-16 Control Unit Console ......................................................................................... 234  

8.13.17

  Menu 4-1-17 Display ............................................................................................................... 237  

8.14

  Menu 4-2 Error list .......................................................................................................................... 238  

8.15

  Menu 4-3 "Service level" ................................................................................................................ 243  

8.16

  Menu 4-4 Information ..................................................................................................................... 244  

8.16.1

  Menu 4-4-1 Joystick ................................................................................................................ 245  

8.16.2

  Menu 4-4-2 Software .............................................................................................................. 246  

8.16.3

  Menu 4-4-3 Machine ............................................................................................................... 248  

8.16.4

  Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages ................................................................................. 249  

8.17

  Menu 5 Basic Screen ..................................................................................................................... 250  

8.17.1

  Error Messages ....................................................................................................................... 251  

8.17.2

  Information message............................................................................................................... 252  

9   Commissioning................................................................................................................................... 253  

9.1

  Fitting the guard cloths ................................................................................................................... 253  

9.1.1

  Description of Installation ........................................................................................................ 255  

9.1.2

  Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive)............................................................................... 256  

9.2

  Installing Rear Reflectors ............................................................................................................... 257  

9.2.1

  Mounting the SMV Sign (slow moving vehicle) ....................................................................... 258  

9.3

  Installation of Cutter Blades ........................................................................................................... 259  

9.4

  Checking/setting the tyre pressure ................................................................................................. 260  

10   Start-up ................................................................................................................................................ 261  

10.1

  Check before Start-up .................................................................................................................... 261  

10.2

  Daily checks ................................................................................................................................... 261  

10.2.1

  On the Basic Machine ............................................................................................................. 262  

10.2.2

  On the Mowing Units ............................................................................................................... 262  

11   Driving and Transport ........................................................................................................................ 263  

11.1

  Transport / Road Travel ................................................................................................................. 263  

11.2

  Preparation for transport/road travel .............................................................................................. 264  

11.2.1

  Folding Up the Guards ............................................................................................................ 264  

11.2.2

  Moving the Front Mowing Unit To Central Position (with Sideshift Option) ............................ 265  

11.2.3

  Error Message 1414 or 1415 .................................................................................................. 266  

11.2.4

  Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger ..................................................................... 267  

11.2.5

  Release switch – road/field ..................................................................................................... 267  

11.2.6

  Release switch travelling gear ................................................................................................ 268  

11.3

  Starting the engine ......................................................................................................................... 269  

11.3.1

  Killing the Engine .................................................................................................................... 271  

11.3.2

  Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ............................................................................................ 271  

7

Table of Contents

11.4

  Starting to Drive .............................................................................................................................. 272  

11.4.1

  Setting the Acceleration Behaviour ......................................................................................... 273  

11.4.2

  General on Driving .................................................................................................................. 273  

11.4.3

  Overheating of Hydrostatic System ........................................................................................ 274  

11.4.4

  Driving Forwards ..................................................................................................................... 275  

11.4.5

  Reversing ................................................................................................................................ 276  

11.5

  Cruise Control ................................................................................................................................ 277  

11.5.1

  Saving the Speed for Cruise Control Mode ............................................................................ 277  

11.5.2

  Activating Cruise Control ........................................................................................................ 278  

11.5.3

  Deactivating Cruise Control .................................................................................................... 278  

11.6

  Stopping ......................................................................................................................................... 279  

11.6.1

  Stopping with the Multi-Function Lever ................................................................................... 279  

11.6.2

  Stopping with Foot Brakes ...................................................................................................... 280  

11.7

  Parking Brake ................................................................................................................................. 281  

11.8

  Switching Off the Engine ................................................................................................................ 282  

11.9

  Switch off the machine ................................................................................................................... 282  

11.10

  Towing ............................................................................................................................................ 283  

11.10.1

  Releasing the holding brake manually .................................................................................... 283  

12   Operation – Mowing Units ................................................................................................................. 284  

12.1

  Intended use ................................................................................................................................... 284  

12.2

  Reasonably foreseeable misuse .................................................................................................... 284  

12.3

  Operation of Mowing Units ............................................................................................................. 285  

12.4

  Folding Down the Mowing Units ..................................................................................................... 286  

12.4.1

  Folding down Each Lateral Mowing Unit from Transport Position to Headland Position ....... 287  

12.4.2

  Folding down Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Transport Position to Headland

Position 287  

12.5

  Lowering Mowing Units .................................................................................................................. 288  

12.5.1

  Lowering Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Working Position ............................ 288  

12.5.2

  Lowering Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Working Position288  

12.5.3

  Lowering All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position ............................... 289  

12.6

  Mowing Unit Drive .......................................................................................................................... 290  

12.6.1

  Switching On Or Switching Off Mowing Unit Drives ............................................................... 291  

12.6.2

  Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive .................................................................... 291  

12.6.3

  Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive .................................................................... 292  

12.6.4

  Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive Front ........................................................... 293  

12.6.5

  Switching On / Switching Off All Mowing Unit Drives ............................................................. 294  

12.7

  Lifting the Mowing Units ................................................................................................................. 295  

12.7.1

  Lifting Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position ................................. 295  

12.7.2

  Lifting Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Working Position to Headland Position ... 296  

12.7.3

  Lifting All Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position .................................... 297  

12.8

  Folding up the Mowing Units .......................................................................................................... 298  

12.8.1

  Folding up Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Transport

Position 299  

12.8.2

  Folding up the Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Headland Position to Transport

Position 299  

12.9

  Mowing ........................................................................................................................................... 300  

12.10

  Game animal protection ................................................................................................................. 301  

12.10.1

  Moving the guards into the working position ........................................................................... 302  

12.10.2

  Mowing with Individual Mowing Units ..................................................................................... 302  

8

Table of Contents

12.10.3

  Quick Stop ............................................................................................................................... 303  

12.10.4

  Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing)................................................................................. 303  

12.10.5

  Switching On/Off Axle Separation ........................................................................................... 304  

13   Adjusting the mowing units .............................................................................................................. 305  

13.1

  Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 305  

13.2

  Adjusting the cutting height ............................................................................................................ 306  

13.2.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 306  

13.2.2

  Adjusting the Lifting Height ..................................................................................................... 307  

13.2.2.1

  Front mowing unit ............................................................................................................ 307  

13.2.3

  Adjusting the cutting height ..................................................................................................... 308  

13.2.3.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ......................................................................................................... 308  

13.3

  Adjusting Skids ............................................................................................................................... 310  

13.4

  Setting the Relief Springs ............................................................................................................... 310  

13.4.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 311  

13.4.2

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 312  

13.5

  Adjusting the Tedder Speed ........................................................................................................... 313  

13.5.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 313  

13.5.2

  Front mowing unit (CV) ........................................................................................................... 314  

13.6

  Adjusting the conditioner plate ....................................................................................................... 315  

13.7

  Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/BiG M CRI) ........................................................... 316  

13.7.1

  Adjusting the roller distance .................................................................................................... 316  

13.7.2

  Adjusting the roller pressure ................................................................................................... 317  

13.8

  Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional) .............................................................. 318  

13.9

  Adjusting the swath width ............................................................................................................... 319  

13.9.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 319  

13.9.2

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 320  

13.10

  Mounting/Dismounting BSS Swath Width for BiG M CV ................................................................ 321  

13.10.1

  Removing Extension on Cross Conveyor Left/Right ............................................................... 321  

13.10.2

  Dismounting Additional Scraper on Left/Right ........................................................................ 322  

13.10.3

  Mounting Extension on Cross Conveyor Left/Right ................................................................ 323  

13.10.4

  Mounting Additional Scraper on Left/Right ............................................................................. 324  

13.11

  Setting the Transverse Links on the Side Mounted Mowers ......................................................... 325  

13.12

  Deflector Plates .............................................................................................................................. 325  

13.12.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 325  

14   Special Equipment – Mowing Units .................................................................................................. 326  

14.1

  Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor ................................... 326  

14.1.1

  Hooking Conditioner Baffle Sheet into Hoist ........................................................................... 327  

14.1.2

  Releasing the tension jacks .................................................................................................... 327  

14.1.3

  Removing the tedder deflector plate ....................................................................................... 328  

14.1.4

  Checking the Tines ................................................................................................................. 328  

14.1.5

  Removing the guard ................................................................................................................ 329  

14.1.6

  Mounting Auger-type Cross Conveyor .................................................................................... 330  

14.1.7

  Locking the tension jacks ........................................................................................................ 331  

14.1.8

  Tensioning the V-belt .............................................................................................................. 331  

14.1.9

  Installing the guard .................................................................................................................. 332  

14.1.10

  Connecting Speed Sensor and Hydraulics ............................................................................. 332  

14.1.11

  Relaying the Lubrication Lines ................................................................................................ 333  

14.1.12

  Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for BiG M 400 / BiG M 420 with BSS .......................... 333  

14.1.13

  Switching on the auger monitoring mode ............................................................................... 334  

9

Table of Contents

14.1.14

  Converting Auger Conveyor to “Conditioning Sheet Unit” ...................................................... 335  

14.2

  Additional Equipment – Mulching Device ....................................................................................... 335  

14.3

  Removing Mowing Units ................................................................................................................ 336  

14.3.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 336  

14.3.2

  Removing of the compensation springs .................................................................................. 337  

14.3.3

  To remove the PTO shaft: ....................................................................................................... 338  

14.3.4

  Remove the Weiste Triangle ................................................................................................... 339  

14.3.5

  Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ............................................................................................. 340  

14.3.6

  Removing the Side Mowing Unit ............................................................................................. 341  

14.3.7

  Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit .......................................................................................... 346  

14.3.8

  The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure. .................... 347  

15   Maintenance – Engine ........................................................................................................................ 348  

15.1.1

  Engine Overview ..................................................................................................................... 348  

15.2

  Maintenance Intervals .................................................................................................................... 348  

15.3

  Maintenance Table – Engine ......................................................................................................... 350  

15.4

  Contamination in the engine compartment .................................................................................... 352  

15.5

  Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air.............................................................. 352  

15.6

  Engine oil level ............................................................................................................................... 353  

15.6.1

  Checking Engine Oil Level ...................................................................................................... 353  

15.6.2

  Topping up Engine Oil ............................................................................................................ 353  

15.6.3

  Engine oil and filter replacement ............................................................................................. 354  

15.7

  Fuel filter/water separator .............................................................................................................. 354  

15.7.1

  Replacing the Fuel Pre-Filter .................................................................................................. 354  

15.7.2

  Emptying the Water Separator ................................................................................................ 354  

15.8

  Replacing the fuel filter insert ......................................................................................................... 355  

15.9

  Fuel ................................................................................................................................................ 356  

15.10

  Tanks .............................................................................................................................................. 357  

15.11

  Venting the fuel system .................................................................................................................. 358  

15.12

  Engine Coolant ............................................................................................................................... 358  

15.13

  Engine coolant – checks and controls............................................................................................ 359  

15.14

  Air filter ........................................................................................................................................... 360  

15.14.1

  Safety cartridge ....................................................................................................................... 361  

16   Maintenance – Mowing Units ............................................................................................................ 362  

16.1

  Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 362  

16.1.1

  Test run ................................................................................................................................... 363  

16.2

  Spare Parts .................................................................................................................................... 363  

16.3

  Tool box .......................................................................................................................................... 363  

16.4

  Maintenance Table – Mowing Units ............................................................................................... 364  

16.5

  Tightening torques .......................................................................................................................... 365  

16.5.1

  Metric Thread Screws with Control Thread ............................................................................ 365  

16.5.2

  Metric Thread Screws with Fine Thread ................................................................................. 366  

16.5.3

  Metric Thread Screws with Countersunk Head and Hexagonal Socket ................................. 366  

16.5.4

  Tightening Torques for Locking Screws and Bleed Valves on the Gearboxes ...................... 367  

16.5.5

  Deviating Tightening Torques ................................................................................................. 368  

16.6

  Opening the Front Guard ............................................................................................................... 368  

16.6.1

  Lateral mowing unit left / right ................................................................................................. 368  

16.6.2

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 369  

16.7

  Cleaning the Tedder Housing ........................................................................................................ 370  

16.8

  Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor .............................................................................. 371  

10

Table of Contents

16.9

  Shear pins on the conditioner ........................................................................................................ 372  

16.10

  Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for Gearboxes ..................................................... 373  

16.10.1

  Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes) ......................................................... 373  

16.11

  Main gearbox .................................................................................................................................. 374  

16.11.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 374  

16.12

  Angular gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 376  

16.13

  Input gearbox ................................................................................................................................. 377  

16.13.1

  Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI) .................................................................................................. 377  

16.14

  Speed gearbox ............................................................................................................................... 378  

16.14.1

  Front mowing unit (CV) ........................................................................................................... 378  

16.15

  Angular gearbox ............................................................................................................................. 379  

16.15.1

  Bottom part .............................................................................................................................. 379  

16.16

  Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ......................................................................................................... 380  

16.17

  Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ............................................................................ 381  

16.17.1

  Front mowing unit .................................................................................................................... 381  

16.17.2

  Aligning the Cutter Bar ............................................................................................................ 381  

16.17.3

  Checking the oil level .............................................................................................................. 382  

16.17.4

  Oil change ............................................................................................................................... 383  

16.18

  Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar ............................................................................ 384  

16.18.1

  Lateral Mowing Unit ................................................................................................................ 384  

16.18.2

  Checking the oil level .............................................................................................................. 384  

16.18.3

  Oil change ............................................................................................................................... 385  

16.19

  Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder .............................................................................. 386  

16.19.1

  Cutter Blades .......................................................................................................................... 386  

16.19.2

  Blade screw connection .......................................................................................................... 387  

16.19.3

  Blade Quick-Fit Device ........................................................................................................... 388  

16.19.4

  Checking the Material Thickness of the Retaining Bolts ......................................................... 388  

16.19.4.1

  Checking the material thickness of the retaining bolts .................................................... 389  

16.19.5

  Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs ............................................................................... 390  

16.19.6

  Checking the Material Thickness of the Leaf Springs ............................................................. 390  

16.19.6.1

  Checking the material thickness of the leaf springs ........................................................ 391  

16.19.7

  Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade Drums ....................................................... 392  

16.19.8

  Abrasion Limit ......................................................................................................................... 393  

16.20

  Blade Changing on Cutting Discs .................................................................................................. 394  

16.20.1

  Blade Screw Connection ......................................................................................................... 395  

16.20.2

  Blade Quick-Fit Device ........................................................................................................... 396  

16.21

  Replacing the linings ...................................................................................................................... 397  

16.22

  Rotary hub with shear protection ................................................................................................... 398  

16.22.1

  After Shearing Off ................................................................................................................... 399  

16.22.2

  Repairing the Sheared off Bearing Unit .................................................................................. 400  

17   Maintenance – Basic Machine ........................................................................................................... 401  

17.1

  Brakes ............................................................................................................................................ 401  

17.2

  Hydraulic system ............................................................................................................................ 402  

17.3

  Maintenance - hydraulic system ................................................. Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.

 

17.3.1

  System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics ......... Fehler! Textmarke nicht definiert.

 

17.3.2

  Pumps ..................................................................................................................................... 405  

17.3.3

  Main block ............................................................................................................................... 406  

17.3.4

  Over-Pressure Valves ............................................................................................................. 407  

17.3.5

  Adjustable Throttles ................................................................................................................ 407  

11

Table of Contents

17.4

  Hydraulic oil .................................................................................................................................... 408  

17.5

  Hydraulic oil level ........................................................................................................................... 409  

17.6

  Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ..................................................................................................... 410  

17.7

  High-pressure filter ......................................................................................................................... 411  

17.8

  Transfer gearbox ............................................................................................................................ 412  

17.9

  Air intake and distribution ............................................................................................................... 413  

17.9.1

  Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter .................................................................................... 414  

17.9.2

  Circulation filter ....................................................................................................................... 415  

17.10

  Windscreen washer system ........................................................................................................... 416  

17.11

  Cleaning the adjustment plate on the pre-separator ...................................................................... 417  

17.12

  Position of the Sensors (Left Machine Side) .................................................................................. 419  

17.13

  Position of the Sensors (Right Machine Side) ............................................................................... 421  

17.13.1

  Adjusting the Sensors ............................................................................................................. 423  

17.13.1.1

  Namur sensor d = 12 mm ................................................................................................ 423  

17.13.1.2

  Namur Sensor d = 30 mm ................................................................................................ 423  

17.14

  Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating ....................................................................... 424  

17.15

  Special Safety Instructions ............................................................................................................. 424  

17.15.1

  Air conditioning components ................................................................................................... 424  

17.15.2

  Refrigerant .............................................................................................................................. 425  

17.15.3

  Manometric Switch .................................................................................................................. 425  

17.15.4

  Collector/drier .......................................................................................................................... 426  

17.15.5

  Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling Quantity .............................................................. 427  

17.16

  Cleaning the Radiator and the Radiator Compartment .................................................................. 428  

17.17

  Belt drives ....................................................................................................................................... 429  

17.17.1

  Fan wheel drive ....................................................................................................................... 430  

17.17.2

  Outrigger arms ........................................................................................................................ 431  

17.17.3

  Drive of mowing unit ................................................................................................................ 433  

17.17.4

  Cross Conveyor Drive ............................................................................................................. 434  

17.17.5

  Checking/ tensioning/ replacing belt on the conditioner drive shaft ........................................ 435  

17.18

  Tyres .............................................................................................................................................. 436  

17.19

  Changing the Tyre Size .................................................................................................................. 436  

17.19.1

  Checking and maintaining tyres .............................................................................................. 437  

17.19.2

  Wheel mounting ...................................................................................................................... 438  

17.19.3

  Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger .............................................................. 438  

18   Maintenance – lubrication chart ....................................................................................................... 439  

18.1

  Lubricating the cardan shaft ........................................................................................................... 439  

18.2

  Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox ........................................................................ 439  

18.3

  Lubrication Chart ............................................................................................................................ 440  

19   Maintenance – electrical system ....................................................................................................... 441  

19.1.1

  Main battery switch ................................................................................................................. 441  

19.2

  Battery ............................................................................................................................................ 442  

19.2.1

  Servicing the battery ............................................................................................................... 442  

19.2.2

  Charging Batteries .................................................................................................................. 443  

19.2.3

  Removing and Installing Battery ............................................................................................. 445  

19.3

  Three-phase generator .................................................................................................................. 447  

19.4

  Starter ............................................................................................................................................. 448  

19.5

  Control Units and Fuses ................................................................................................................. 449  

19.5.1

  Electronic-Control-Module (ECM) ........................................................................................... 450  

19.5.2

  Cabin relay circuit board ......................................................................................................... 450  

12

Table of Contents

19.5.3

  Circuit Board Console ............................................................................................................. 452  

19.5.4

  Cab Circuit Board .................................................................................................................... 458  

19.5.5

  Circuit Board KRONE Machine Controller (KMC1) ................................................................. 462  

20   Maintenance – Central Lubrication................................................................................................... 465  

20.1

  Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 466  

20.2

  Lubricant filling ............................................................................................................................... 470  

20.3

  Fill coupling .................................................................................................................................... 470  

20.4

  Lubricant ......................................................................................................................................... 471  

20.5

  Checking the fill level...................................................................................................................... 472  

20.6

  Change the Times of the Lubrication Interval ................................................................................ 473  

20.7

  Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 473  

20.7.1

  Signal displays ........................................................................................................................ 474  

21   Placing in Storage .............................................................................................................................. 475  

21.1

  At the End of the Harvest Season .................................................................................................. 475  

21.2

  Engine area .................................................................................................................................... 475  

21.3

  Decommissioning Friction Clutch (ByPy) on Universal Shaft ........................................................ 475  

21.4

  Before the Start of the New Season ............................................................................................... 476  

21.5

  Restarting Friction Clutch (ByPy) on Universal Shaft .................................................................... 477  

22   Disposal of the machine .................................................................................................................... 478  

22.1

  Disposal of the machine ................................................................................................................. 478  

23   Appendix ............................................................................................................................................. 479  

23.1

  Error Messages .............................................................................................................................. 479  

Pos: 3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

13

To this Document

Pos: 4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Zu diesem Dokument @ 107\mod_1334231929021_78.docx @ 965257 @ 1 @ 1

2

Pos: 5 /BA/Einleitung/Gültigkeit/Selbsfahrer/BiG M 420 @ 49\mod_1286949685156_78.docx @ 463695 @ 2 @ 1

To this Document

2.1 Validity

The Operating Instructions apply to all Self-Propelled High Performance Mowing Conditioners

BiG M 420.

Pos: 6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/N/Nachbestellung (Nachbestellung dieses Dokuments) @ 349\mod_1436355974813_78.docx @ 2625865 @ 2 @ 1

2.2 Re-Ordering

Pos: 7 /BA/Zu diesem DokumentNachbestellung_Text (2017-08-10 16:09:56) @ 349\mod_1436355830140_78.docx @ 2625835 @ @ 1

Pos: 8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/Z/Zielgruppe dieses Dokuments @ 187\mod_1380113123454_78.docx @ 1609723 @ 2 @ 1

If this document should become wholly or partially unusable, you can request a replacement document by stating the order number mentioned on the cover sheet.

2.3

Pos: 9 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Zielgruppe @ 345\mod_1434348246902_78.docx @ 2606935 @ @ 1

Target group of this document

Pos: 10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

This document aims at the operators of the machine fulfilling the minimum requirements of personnel qualification; refer to chapter entitled Safety “Personnel Qualification”.

14

Pos: 11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/S/So benutzen Sie dieses Dokument @ 188\mod_1380548350021_78.docx @ 1614365 @ 2 @ 1

2.4

Pos: 12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Verzeichnisse und Verweise @ 336\mod_1429854437094_78.docx @ 2556421 @ 3 @ 1

How to use this document

To this Document

2.4.1 Directories and References

Pos: 13 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/So benutzen Sie dieses Dokument_Verzeichnisse und Verweise_Text @ 333\mod_1429085378408_78.docx @ 2544425 @ @ 1

Table of contents/headers:

The table of contents as well as the headers in this instruction are used for quick navigation in the chapters.

Index directory:

In the index directory, you can find information on the desired subject via catchwords which are in alphabetical order. The index directory can be found on the last page of this instruction.

Cross references:

Cross references to another place in the operating instructions or to another document are in the text and specify the chapter and subchapter or section. The designation of subchapters or sections is presented in quotation marks.

Example:

Check that all screws on the machine are tight, refer to chapter Maintenance, “Tightening

Torques”.

The subchapter or the section can be found via an entry in the table of contents and in the index directory.

Pos: 14 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Richtungsangaben_mit Überschrift 3. Ebene @ 311\mod_1418209262291_78.docx @ 2405467 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Begriff "Maschine" @ 337\mod_1430721887716_78.docx @ 2563575 @ 3 @ 1

Direction information in this document such as front, rear, right and left always applies in the direction of travel.

Pos: 16 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Bezeichnung im weiteren Verlauf @ 296\mod_1412662863727_78.docx @ 2326247 @ @ 1

Throughout the remainder of these operating instructions, the “exact forage harvester BiG X” will be referred to by the terms “machine” and “vehicle”.

Pos: 17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Abbildungen_Darstellungsmittel @ 336\mod_1430133919063_78.docx @ 2558462 @ 3 @ 1

2.4.4 Figures

Pos: 18 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Abbildungen_Text @ 336\mod_1430134111209_78.docx @ 2558493 @ @ 1

The figures in this document do not always represent the exact machine type. The information which refers to the figure always corresponds to the machine type of this document.

Pos: 19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

15

To this Document

Pos: 20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Umfang des Dokuments @ 346\mod_1434979896995_78.docx @ 2611366 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 21 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Umfang des Dokuments_alle Beipacks und Varianten enthalten_Text @ 346\mod_1434979460226_78.docx @ 2611335 @ @ 1

In addition to standard equipment, accessories kits and versions of the machine are described

Pos: 22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/D/Darstellungsmittel @ 336\mod_1429865448625_78.docx @ 2556625 @ 3 @ 1 in this document. Your machine may deviate from this document.

2.4.6 Means of representation

Pos: 23 /Überschriften/Zwischenüberschriften/P-T/Symbole im Text @ 336\mod_1430121354111_78.docx @ 2557539 @ @ 1

Icons in the text

Pos: 24 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Darstellungsmittel_ohne Hinweis und Warnung_BA @ 339\mod_1431002650179_78.docx @ 2570965 @ @ 1

In this document, the following means of representation are used:

Action step

A bullet point (

) designates an action step you have to perform, as for example:

• Set the left outside mirror.

Sequence of actions

Several bullet points (

) located in front of a sequence of action steps identify a sequence of actions to be performed step by step, as for example:

Pos: 25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Set the screw.

• Tighten counter nut.

List

Dashes (-) identify lists such as, for example:

– Brakes

– Steering

– Lighting

16

Pos: 26 /Überschriften/Zwischenüberschriften/P-T/Symbole in Abbildungen @ 336\mod_1430121455379_78.docx @ 2557570 @ @ 1

Symbols in figures

Pos: 27 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Darstellungsmittel_Übersicht Symbole_BA @ 329\mod_1427193088297_78.docx @ 2523598 @ @ 1

To visualize parts and actions steps, the following icons are used:

Icon

1

Explanation

Reference sign for part

Position of a part (e.g. move from pos. I to pos. II)

I

Dimensions (e.g. B = width, H = height, L = length)

X

To this Document

Action step: Tighten screws with torque key with specified tightening torque

Direction of motion

Direction of travel opened closed enlargement of display detail

Framings, dimension line, dimension line limitation, reference line for visible parts or visible mounting material

Framings, dimension line, dimension line limitation, reference line for covered parts or covered mounting material

Laying routes

LH

RH

Left-hand machine side

Right-hand machine side

Pos: 28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

17

To this Document

Pos: 29 /Überschriften/Zwischenüberschriften/U-Z/Warnhinweise_Zu diesem Dokument @ 337\mod_1430720690194_78.docx @ 2563366 @ @ 1

Warning signs

Pos: 30 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Warnhinweise_Zu diesem Dokument_Text @ 337\mod_1430720301162_78.docx @ 2563335 @ @ 1

Warning

WARNING! - Type and source of hazard!

Effect: Injuries, serious material damage.

• Measures for hazard prevention.

Caution

CAUTION! - Type and source of hazard!

Effect: Damage to property.

• Measures for risk prevention.

Pos: 31 /Überschriften/Zwischenüberschriften/F-J/Hinweise mit Informationen und Empfehlungen_Zu diesem Dokument @ 337\mod_1430721734582_78.docx @ 2563548 @ @ 1

Notes with information and recommendations

Pos: 32 /BA/Zu diesem Dokument/Hinweise mit Informationen und Empfehlungen_Text @ 337\mod_1430721371455_78.docx @ 2563487 @ @ 1

Note

Note

Effect: Economic benefit of the machine.

• Measures to be performed.

Pos: 33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

18

Pos: 34 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sicherheit @ 0\mod_1195566748646_78.docx @ 635 @ 1 @ 1

Safety

3 Safety

Pos: 35 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/B/Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung @ 103\mod_1332169199326_78.docx @ 940071 @ 2 @ 1

Ver

3.1 Intended use

Pos: 36 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch Big M 400/420/500 @ 103\mod_1332169761803_78.docx @ 940157 @ @ 1

The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is a self-propelled work machine with three disc mowers and integrated mower conditioners. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is intended for use in agriculture. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is used to mow various living grasses and legumes (from the initial stage to the end of the photosynthetic process).

The three mowing units can be used individually or together, thereby making it possible to adjust the working width as required. The integrated mower conditioners accelerate the drying process of the mowed crop.

Pos: 37 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Zur bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung gehört auch @ 103\mod_1332171944900_78.doc x @ 940301 @ @ 1

Intended use also includes compliance with the operating, cleaning, maintenance and repair conditions set by the manufacturer.

Pos: 38 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/V/Vernüftigerweise vorhersehbare Fehlanwendung @ 103\mod_1332169519322_78.docx @ 940100 @ 2 @ 1

3.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Pos: 39 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Vernünftigerweise vorhersehbare Fehlanwendung T1 @ 103\mod_1332170020800_78.docx @ 940186 @ @ 1

Any usage outside of intended use (as described above) constitutes non-intended use and therefore represents misuse as defined by the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any resulting damages. The user alone shall be liable.

Pos: 40 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Auflistung von Fehlanwendungen @ 103\mod_1332171361892_78.docx @ 940244 @ @ 1

Examples of such misuse are:

• Mowing undergrowth and bushes

• Mowing non-living plants such as straw or maize stalks

• Mowing woody or highly fibrous plants such as trees, cotton stalks or sugar cane

Pos: 41 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Nicht bestimmungsgemäß @ 103\mod_1332171672294_78.docx @ 940272 @ @ 1

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may have a negative effect on the machine characteristics or safe and reliable use of the machine or may interfere with proper operation.

Unauthorised modifications shall therefore release the manufacturer of any liability for consequential damage.

Pos: 42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

19

Safety

Pos: 43 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/N/Nutzungsdauer der Maschine @ 318\mod_1423658430909_78.docx @ 2465744 @ 2 @ 1

3.3

Pos: 44 /BA/Einleitung/Nutzungsdauer der Maschine_Text @ 318\mod_1423556613022_78.docx @ 2463145 @ @ 1

Service life of the machine

– The service life of this machine strongly depends on proper use and maintenance as well as the operating conditions.

– Permanent operational readiness as well as long service life of the machine can be achieved by observing the instructions and notes of these operating instructions.

– After each season of use, the machine must be checked thoroughly for wear and other damage.

– Damaged and worn parts must be replaced before placing the machine into service again.

– After the machine has been used for five years, carry out full technical inspection of the machine. According to the results of this inspection, a decision concerning the possibility of reuse of the machine should be taken.

– Theoretically, the service life of this machine is unlimited as all worn or damaged parts can be replaced.

Pos: 45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

20

Pos: 46.1 /BA/Sicherheit/Personalqualifikation und -schulung @ 0\mod_1195639383185_78.docx @ 1136 @ 3 @ 1

Safety

3.3.1 Personnel Qualification and Training

The machine may be used, maintained and repaired only by persons who are familiar with it and have been instructed about the dangers connected with it. The operator must define areas of responsibility and monitoring of personnel. Should personnel lack the required knowledge, they must receive the required training and instruction. The operator must ensure that the contents of these operating instructions have been fully understood by personnel.

Pos: 46.2 /BA/Sicherheit/Gefahren bei Nichtbeachtung der Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1195639434013_78.docx @ 1155 @ 3 @ 1

Repair work not described in these operating instructions should only be performed by authorised service centres.

3.3.2 Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the Safety Instructions

Pos: 46.3 /BA/Sicherheit/Sicherheitsbewusstes Arbeiten_Teil1 @ 0\mod_1195639792576_78.docx @ 1174 @ 3 @ 1

Failure to follow the safety instructions could result in personal injury and environmental hazards as well as damage to the machine. If the safety instructions are not respected, this could result in the forfeiture of any claims for damages.

Failure to follow the safety instructions could result, for example , in the following hazards:

• Endangering of persons due to not protected working areas.

• Breakdown of important machine functions

• Failure of prescribed methods for repair and maintenance

• Endangering of persons due to mechanical and chemical effects

• Damage to the environment due to leaking hydraulic oil

Pos: 46.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Always observe the safety instructions set out in these operating instructions, all existing accident prevention rules and any internal work, operating and safety rules issued by the operator.

The safety and accident prevention regulations of the responsible professional associations are binding.

The safety instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer should also be observed.

Observe the applicable traffic laws when using public roads.

Be prepared for emergencies. Keep the fire extinguisher and first aid box within reach. Keep emergency numbers for doctors and fire brigade close to the telephone.

21

Safety

Pos: 46.5 /BA/Sicherheit/Sicherheits- und Unfallverhütungs-Vorschriften fürBiG M @ 348\mod_1435816773224_78.docx @ 2620038 @ 2 @ 1

3.4 Safety and Accident Prevention Regulations

1 Please follow all generally applicable safety and accident prevention regulations in addition to the safety instructions contained in these operating instructions!

2 The attached warning and safety signs provide important information for safe operation. Pay attention to these for your own safety!

3 When using public roads, observe the respective traffic regulations!

4 Make sure that you are familiar with all equipment and controls as well as with their functions before you begin working with the machine. It is too late to learn this when you are using the machine for work!

5 The user should wear close fitting clothes. Avoid wearing loose or baggy clothing.

6 Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire!

7 Before starting or moving the machine, make certain that nobody is in the vicinity of the machine! (Watch for children!) Make sure that you have a clear view!

8 Attach implements correctly! Attach and secure implements to specified devices only!

9 When attaching or detaching implements, place the supporting devices in the correct positions!

10 Observe permitted axle loads, total weight and transport dimensions!

11 Check and attach transport equipment, such as lighting, warning devices and any protective equipment!

12 Actuating mechanisms (ropes, chains, linkage, etc.) for remotely operated devices must be designed in such a way that, in whatever transport and working position, they cannot trigger accidental movements.

13 Ensure that implements are in the prescribed condition for road travel and lock them in place in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions!

14 Never leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving!

15 Always drive at the correct speed for the prevailing driving conditions! Avoid sudden changes in direction when travelling uphill and downhill or across a gradient!

16 Hitched implements and ballast weights affect the driving, steering and braking response of the machine. Make sure that you are able to brake and steer the machine as required!

17 Take into account the extension radius and/or inertia of an implement when turning corners!

18 Start up implements only when all safety devices have been attached and set in the required position!

19 Keep safety equipment in good condition. Replace missing or damaged parts.

20 Keep clear of the working range of the machine at all times!

21 Never operate the hydraulic folding frames if anyone is inside the swivel range!

22 Parts operated by external power (e.g. hydraulically) can cause crushing and shearing injuries!

23 Do not stand within the turning and swivel range of the implement!

Pos: 46.6 /BA/Sicherheit/Sicherheits- und Unfallverhütungs-Vorschriften BiG M 400/420/500 Zusatz @ 119\mod_1342170562046_78.docx @ 1071934 @ @ 1

24 Before leaving the mower, lower the front mower onto the ground, firmly step on the parking brake pedal. Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key!

25 No one should stand between the mower and the implement unless the vehicle has been secured against rolling by means of the parking brake and/or wheel chocks!

26 Caution: When the front mower P.T.O shaft has been removed, the drive shaft at the front of the machine continues to turn if the engine is running.

Pos: 46.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

22

Pos: 46.8.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/G/Gefahrenbereiche @ 187\mod_1380012427290_78.docx @ 1606906 @ 3 @ 1

Safety

3.4.1 Danger zones

Pos: 46.8.2 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereiche_Einleitung_fuer alle @ 453\mod_1463991292572_78.docx @ 3077571 @ @ 1

When the machine is switched on, a danger zone may be created around this machine.

To avoid getting into the danger zone of the machine, maintain at least the safety distance.

If the safety distance is not followed, people may be seriously injured or killed.

• Do not switch on the drives and the engine until you are sure that no one has ignored the safety distance.

• If people ignore the safety distance, switch off the drives.

• Stop the machine in the shunting operation and field mode.

Pos: 46.8.3 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereiche_Sicherheitsabstand_Tabelle_BiG M_X-DISC_Mähwerke @ 453\mod_1464004870510_78.docx @ 3079707 @ @ 1

The safety clearance is:

For machine in shunting operation and field mode

In front of the machine

Behind the machine

Laterally to the machine

30 m

5 m

3 m

For machine switched on without driving motion

In front of the machine 3 m

Behind the machine

Laterally to the machine

5 m

3 m

Pos: 46.8.4 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereiche_Sicherheitsabstand_allg Text_fueralle @ 453\mod_1463992314739_78.docx @ 3077782 @ @ 1

The safety distances named here are minimum distances according to the intended use. These safety distances must be increased depending on operating conditions and environmental conditions, when required.

Pos: 46.8.5 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereiche_Text Abhilfe_BiG M @ 458\mod_1464788109077_78.docx @ 3094993 @ @ 1

• Before working in the danger zone of the machine: Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to chapter Safety, “Shutting Down and Safeguarding the Machine”. This also applies to brief inspection work.

• Follow the information in all operating instructions concerned:

Pos: 46.8.6 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereich Gelenkwelle_fuer alle @ 453\mod_1463993075614_78.docx @ 3077842 @ @ 1

– The operating instructions of the machine

– The operating instructions of universal shaft

Pos: 46.8.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Danger zone universal shaft

People may become caught by the universal shaft, pulled in and seriously injured.

• Observe the operating instructions of the universal shaft.

• Provide the section tube and universal shaft guards with adequate cover.

• Allow the universal shaft locks to engage.

• Attach the chains to prevent the universal shaft guards from rotating with the shaft.

• Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

• Make sure that the universal shaft guards are attached and functional.

• If the angles between universal shaft and PTO shaft are too large, switch off the PTO shaft.

The machine may be damaged. Parts could be hurled up and hurt people.

23

Safety

Pos: 46.8.8 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereich Zapfwelle_fuer alle @ 453\mod_1463993689007_78.docx @ 3077933 @ @ 1

Danger zone PTO shaft

People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the PTO shaft and the driven components.

Before switching on the PTO shaft:

• Make sure that all safety devices are fitted and in the protection position.

• Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of PTO shaft and universal shaft.

• Switch off the drives if they are not necessary.

Pos: 46.8.9 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereich zwischen Hochleistungs-Mähaufbereiter und Mähwerke_BiG M @ 453\mod_1463994993578_78.docx @ 3078055 @ @ 1

Danger zone between mower conditioner and mowers

People situated between the mower conditioner and the mower may be seriously injured or killed if they are careless or if the machine rolls away or moves.

• Before working between mower conditioner and mower: Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, “Shutting Down and Safeguarding the Machine”. This also applies to brief inspection work.

• If the lifting unit has to be actuated, keep all people away from the movement area of the machine parts to be raised.

Pos: 46.8.10 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereich fortschleudernde Gegenstände_BiG X_BiG M_Mähwerke_X-DISC @ 453\mod_1463997269904_78.docx @ 3078488 @ @ 1

Danger zone because objects may shoot out

Crops and foreign bodies may shoot out and injure or kill people.

• Before starting the machine, instruct all persons to leave the danger zone of the machine.

• If people are in the danger zone of the machine, switch off drives and diesel engine immediately.

Pos: 46.8.11 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereich bei eingeschaltetem Antrieb_fuer alle @ 453\mod_1463995368453_78.docx @ 3078086 @ @ 1

Pos: 46.8.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Danger zone when drive is switched on

When the drive is switched on, there is a danger to life caused by rotating machine parts. There must be nobody in the danger zone of the machine.

• Before starting the machine, direct all people out of the danger zone of the machine.

• If hazardous situations arise, switch off drives immediately and instruct people to leave the danger zone.

24

Pos: 46.8.13 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereich durch nachlaufende Maschinenteile_Einleitung_fuer alle @ 453\mod_1463995805759_78.docx @ 3078178 @ @ 1

Danger zone due to coasting machine parts

When machine parts are coasting, people may be seriously injured or killed.

When the drives have been switched off, the following machine parts will coast:

Pos: 46.8.14 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende SicherheitshinweiseGefahrenbereich durch nachlaufende Maschinenteile_Aufz_BiG M @ 466\mod_1467617832845_78.docx @ 3136985 @ @ 1

– Fan

– Conditioner

– Conveyors

Pos: 46.8.15 /BA/Sicherheit/1. Grundlegende Sicherheitshinweise/Gefahrenbereich durch nachlaufende Maschinenteile_Abhilfe_fuer alle ausser Ladewagen und Vorsätze @ 453\mod_1463996677614_78.docx @ 3078358 @ @ 1

• Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, “Shutting Down and

Safeguarding the Machine”.

• Do not approach the machine until all machine parts have come to a standstill.

Pos: 46.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Safety

25

Safety

Pos: 46.10 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Einweisersitz / Personenbeförderung @ 45\mod_1276767521968_78.docx @ 408886 @ 2 @ 1

3.5 Conveying persons, guides, operating personnel

1 Only persons who are guiding the driver or directing the machine may be conveyed on the guide's seat

Pos: 46.11 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Selbstfahrende Arbeitsmaschine @ 120\mod_1343031911873_78.docx @ 1095434 @ 2 @ 1

2 Persons are not permitted to ride as passengers

3.6

Pos: 46.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Self-propelled working machine

1

The warning flashers and warning beacon must be used in accordance with local traffic laws when using public highways.

2

Switch on the lighting so that the vehicle can be easily recognised.

3

The machine must not be taken into operation if the safety equipment is not functioning.

4

Always check the machine for driving and operational safety before use.

5

Hold the hand-grip firmly when climbing in and out of the mower.

6

It is not permitted to transport people on the platform.

7

The road safety switch must be in road position during road travel to ensure that all hydraulic functions - except for the steering and brakes – are deactivated.

8

Only drive the machine at the permitted speed.

9

Implements must be in transport position and locked in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for road travel.

10

If the engine is running in an enclosed space, divert the exhaust fumes and ensure sufficient ventilation.

11

When using starting fluid, avoid ignition sources and naked flames. Keep starting fluid clear of batteries and electrical cables.

26

Pos: 46.13 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Autopilot @ 0\mod_1195646567591_78.docx @ 1384 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

3.7 Autopilot

1

Autopilot must only be used for its intended purpose. It must only be used in open fields, off public and semi-public roads, away from open areas frequented by people and far away from any persons that could be endangered. They must only be used for their intended purpose: - Automatic guide of the machine by GPS (Global Positioning System).

2

Before placing the autopilot in service, check the functionality of safety elements that can be checked and make a visual inspection of all the components.

To do this, the user should proceed as follows:

• Check switching off of the autopilot when the steering wheel is moved and the seat switch engages

• Check for proper operating condition - i.e. free of mechanical damages and leaks

3

When autopilot is in operation, there must be on one within 50 m of the machine in any direction.

4

The operator is not permitted to leave the driver's cabin of the machine while autopilot is in operation.

5

While the autopilot is in operation, the driver must regularly check the direction in which the machine is moving and its travel path to be able to take over manual control of the machine immediately if obstructions or interruptions come up in the vehicle's path.

6

After autopilot has been in operation and before leaving the field, autopilot must always be switched off on the autopilot release switch on the console.

7

Manipulating safety-related elements of the autopilot is prohibited, as is making changes to the hydraulic, electrical or electronic components.

8

The autopilot should only be installed by an authorised service centre.

Pos: 46.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

27

Safety

Pos: 46.15 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Section Control @ 456\mod_1464611386983_78.docx @ 3088651 @ 2 @ 1

3.8 SectionControl

1 The SectionControl system must only be used for its intended purpose. It must only be used in open fields, off public or semi-public roads, away from open areas frequented by people and far away from any persons in the danger zone. It must only be used for its intended purpose: - Automatic mower control via GPS (Global Positioning System)

2 Before starting up SectionControl, visually check the machine. Furthermore, the safety functions must be checked.

To do this, the operator should proceed as follows:

• The operator must check that SectionControl is switched off by the intervention via control lever or by means of the seat switch.

• Check for proper operating condition, i.e. the machine is free of mechanical damages and leaks.

3 While SectionControl is in operation, there must be no one in the danger zone around the machine.

4 It is not permitted to leave the driver's cabin of the machine while SectionControl is in operation.

5 While SectionControl is in operation, the driver must regularly check the travel path in order to be able to immediately take over manual control of the mowers in case of obstacles on the travel path or interruptions.

Pos: 46.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 to the hydraulic, electrical or electronic components.

7 The SectionControl should only be installed by authorised professional workshops.

28

Pos: 46.17 /BA/Sicherheit/Arbeitsgeräte @ 0\mod_1195643623216_78.docx @ 1270 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

3.9 Implements

1 Caution! The flywheel will continue to rotate for some time even after the drive has been disengaged! Keep away from the implement during this time. Do not work on the machine until it has come to a standstill.

2 Cleaning, lubricating and adjusting the implements must be carried out only when the drive is switched off, the engine switched off and the ignition key removed!

Pos: 46.18 /BA/Sicherheit/Hydraulikanlage Mähaufbereiter (BiG M400 / BiG M500) @ 38\mod_1265362557136_78.docx @ 348614 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 46.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1 The hydraulic system is pressurised!

2 When connecting hydraulic cylinders and engines, make sure that the hydraulic hoses are connected correctly!

3 When connecting the hydraulic hoses to the mower-conditioner hydraulics, take care that the hydraulic system is depressurised both on the tractor side and on the device side!

4 When functions are connected hydraulically between the mower-conditioner and the accessory equipment, connecting parts should be identified so that faulty operation is excluded! If the connectors are interchanged, the functions will be reversed (e.g. raising/lowering) - Risk of accident!

5 Check the hydraulic hose lines at regular intervals and replace them if damaged or worn!

The new hoses must fulfil the technical requirements set by the manufacturer of the implement!

6 When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to avoid the risk of injury!

7 Liquids escaping under high pressure (hydraulic oil) can penetrate the skin and cause serious injury! Seek medical help immediately should injuries occur! Danger of infection!

8 Before working on the hydraulic system, depressurise the system and switch off the engine!

29

Safety

Pos: 46.20 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Batterie @ 0\mod_1195646320763_78.docx @ 1308 @ 2 @ 1

3.11 Battery

1 Maintenance work on the batteries requires sufficient knowledge and the availability of proper tools!

2 Keep naked flames, burning matches and spark sources clear of the battery; Risk of explosion!

3 Never check the charging level of the battery by connecting the two poles with a metal object. Use an acid tester or voltmeter.

4 Do not charge a frozen battery; Risk of explosion ! Warm the battery to 16 °C beforehand.

5 Battery acid can cause severe injuries by burning your skin and eyes. For this reason, wear suitable protective clothing.

Pos: 46.21 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Kühlsystem @ 0\mod_1195646385154_78.docx @ 1327 @ 2 @ 1

3.12 Cooling system

The heated cooling system is pressurised – Risk of burns ! - For this reason, only remove the radiator cap with the engine switched off and after the engine has been able to cool.

Pos: 46.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/RReifen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.docx @ 18075 @ 2 @ 1

3.13 Tyres

Pos: 46.23 /BA/Sicherheit/Reifen @ 0\mod_1195646435716_78.docx @ 1346 @ @ 1

1

When working on the tyres, make sure that the implement is safely lowered and secured against rolling (wheel chocks).

2

Installing wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and suitable tools!

3

Repair work on the tyres and wheels should be done by specially trained personnel using appropriate installation tools only!

4

Check tyre pressure regularly! Inflate the tyres to the recommended pressures!

5

Check the wheel nuts periodically! Missing wheel nuts can result in a wheel falling off and the machine tipping over.

Pos: 46.24 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Notausstieg @ 0\mod_1195646495279_78.docx @ 1365 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 46.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The right hand side window in the cabin is designed for being an emergency exit. In case of an emergency the cabin can be left over the emergency exit. To do this, the right hand side window must be manually unlocked before opening.

30

Pos: 46.26 /BA/SicherheitArbeiten im Bereich von Hochspannungsleitungen @ 452\mod_1463477703144_78.docx @ 3073243 @ 2 @ 1

3.15

Safety

Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines

1

Always take great care when working under or in the vicinity of power transmission lines.

2

Ensure that when in operation or being transported, the machine cannot exceed a total height of approx. 4m.

3

If there is any need to travel under overhead lines, the machine operator must request information on the rated voltage and the minimum height of the overhead lines from the overhead line operator.

4

Always keep the safety distances according to the table.

Rated voltage kV

Safe distance from overhead lines m

To 1

Above 1 to 110

Above 101 to 220

Above 220 to 380

1

2

3

4

Pos: 46.27 /BA/Sicherheit/Brandschutzmaßnahmen @ 0\mod_1195646926716_78.docx @ 1423 @ 2 @ 1

3.16 Fire preventions

Pos: 46.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

1 Keep the machine clean to prevent the danger of fire! In particular, remove any crop wound around rotating parts.

2 The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard. Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

3 The fire hazard can be reduced by removing accumulated crop from the machine several times a day (interval depends on the type of crop) and checking the machine components for overheating. Check for oil leaks or exiting oil and take corrective action. Heed the lubricating instructions.

4 Frequently check the hydraulic oil lines thoroughly for proper condition and position with sufficient clearance to contact edges that may be sharp.

5 Check the vicinity of the hot zones of the engine, the exhaust system and pipes and the turbo charger, and remove crop residues.

6 Take great care when handling fuels. Never fill in fuel in the vicinity of unshielded flames or sparks that may cause ignition. Do not smoke when filling in fuel! Extreme fire hazard.

31

Safety

Pos: 46.29 /BA/Sicherheit/Wartung/Wartung Mäher mit Gasspeicher+ Auswechseln von Arbeitswerkzeugen @ 0\mod_1195647075607_78.docx @ 1442 @ 2 @ 1

3.17 Maintenance

1 Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning! - Remove the ignition key!

2 Regularly check that nuts and bolts are properly seated and tighten if necessary!

3 When carrying out maintenance work on a raised mowing unit, always use suitable means to secure it against falling.

4 When replacing working tools with cutting edges, use suitable tools and gloves!

5 Oils, greases and filters must be disposed of correctly!

6 Always disconnect the power supply before working on the electrical system!

7 If protective devices and guards are subject to wear, check them regularly and replace them in good time!

8 When performing electrical welding work on the vehicle and mounted devices, turn the power supply off at main battery switch or disconnect generator cable and battery!

9 Replacement parts must at least comply with the technical requirements set by the manufacturer of the implements! This is guaranteed by original KRONE spare parts!

10 Only use nitrogen for filling pneumatic accumulators - risk of explosion!

Pos: 46.30 /BA/Sicherheit/Wartung/Zusatz Wartung Mäher @ 348\mod_1435817863627_78.docx @ 2620259 @ @ 1

Pos: 46.31 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Telefon und Funkgeräte @ 0\mod_1195647114060_78.docx @ 1461 @ 2 @ 1

11 When performing electrical welding work on the vehicle and on mounted implements, mark all plug connections of the control units and loosen them. Furthermore mark all plug connections of “Relay circuit board cabin” and “Relay circuit board console” and loosen them (refer to chapter Maintenance - Electrics “Control Units and Fuses”).

3.18 Telephone and radio sets

Pos: 47 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Telephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functional troubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of the vehicle.

32

Pos: 48 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/S/Sicherheitsausstattung @ 17\mod_1236613960651_78.docx @ 205812 @ 2 @ 1

Safety

Pos: 49 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batteriehauptschalter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.docx @ 409039 @ 3 @ 1

3.19.1 Main battery switch

Pos: 50 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete WarnhinweiseAchtung – Motorschaden: Den Batterie-Hauptschalter nicht bei laufendem Motor betätigen @ 349\mod_1436272532454_78.docx @ 2624529 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Engine damage!

• Do not switch off the main battery switch while the engine is running, the ignition key must be in the “STOP” position.

• In case of an emergency, the main battery switch can also be actuated when the ignition key is not in the “STOP” position.

Pos: 51 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 420_Caterpillar Bild mit Legende @ 143\mod_1358843186580_78.docx @ 1278708 @ @ 1

Fig. 1

1) Main battery switch 0)

I)

Electrical power circuit interrupted

Electrical power circuit turned on

Pos: 52 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 420_Caterpillar Text @ 143\mod_1358843532553_78.docx @ 1278737 @ @ 1

The main battery switch is located front on the right machine side above the front wheel behind the lateral flap.

The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine’s power supply.

Interrupt the electrical power circuit after using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs.

• Turn the main battery switch to “0” position to interrupt the electrical power circuit.

Pos: 53 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

33

Safety

Pos: 54 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Unterlegkeile @ 33\mod_1254202555660_78.docx @ 318451 @ 3 @ 1

3.19.2

Pos: 55 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Unterlegkeile BM 420 Bild @ 80\mod_1315489626538_78.docx @ 706258 @ @ 1

Wheel chocks

1

BM 420 0021_1

Fig.2

Pos: 56 /BA/Sicherheit/Selbstfahrer/Unterlegkeile BM 420 Text @ 80\mod_1315489430312_78.docx @ 706230 @ @ 1

• The machine features 2 wheel chocks

• The wheel chocks (1) are located in direction of travel front left behind the platform

• The wheel chocks must always be carried along

• When parking the machine, always secure it against rolling with both wheel chocks

Pos: 57.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/S/SMV-Kennzeichnungstafel @ 508\mod_1500894961101_78.docx @ 3490263 @ 3 @ 1

• Fold the wheel chocks open completely and place them as close as possible to the wheels in that a way that the machine cannot roll away

3.19.3 SMV Emblem

Pos: 57.2 /BA/Sicherheit/SMV-Kennzeichnung_für alle MaschinenSMV-Kennzeichungstafel_Bild @ 503\mod_1496825928811_78.docx @ 3460830 @ @ 1

1

Fig. 3

Pos: 57.3 /BA/Sicherheit/SMV-Kennzeichnung_für alle MaschinenSMV-Kennzeichungstafel_Text_US @ 503\mod_1496826899491_78.docx @ 3460861 @ @ 1

The SMV emblem (Slow-Moving Vehicle) (1) is attached to slow-moving machines or vehicles travelling on public highways at a speed less than 40 km/h (25 mph).

The SMV emblem (1) is at the rear in the centre or at the rear on left.

Pos: 57.4 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/SMV-Kennzeichnungstafel_Einleitungssatz @ 485\mod_1479386282450_78.docx @ 3264355 @ @ 1

When driving the machine on public highways, the SMV emblem must be mounted.

Pos: 57.5 /BA/Sicherheit/SMV-Kennzeichnung_für alle MaschinenWenn die Maschine auf Transportfahrzeugen (z. B. LKW oder Bahn) befördert wird_Zusatzsatz_EU USA @ 508\mod_1500636210416_78.docx @ 3489536 @ @ 1

If the machine is transported on transport vehicles (for example lorry or train), the SMV emblem must be covered or dismounted.

Pos: 58 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

34

Pos: 59.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSicherheitsroutinen @ 187\mod_1380089318480_78.docx @ 1608182 @ 2 @ 1

3.20 Safety routines

Pos: 59.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMaschine stillsetzen und sichern @ 190\mod_1381323544614_78.docx @ 1624780 @ 3 @ 1

Safety

3.20.1 Stopping and securing the machine

Pos: 59.3 /BA/Sicherheit/3. SicherheitsroutinenMaschine stillsetzen und sichern -Selbstfahrer @ 488\mod_1482310568200_78.docx @ 3282726 @ @ 1

WARNING

Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts!

If the machine has not been shut down, machine or machine parts may move unintentionally.

People may be seriously injured or killed, as a result.

• Before leaving the machine: Shut down and safeguard the machine.

To park the machine safely:

• Park the machine on a stable, paved and even surface.

• Switch off drives and wait until trailing parts have come to a complete standstill.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.

• Switch off the main battery switch.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back by using wheel chocks and

Pos: 59.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Angehobene Maschine und Maschinenteile sicher unterbauen @ 190\mod_1381323662799_78.docx @ 1624809 @ 3 @ 1 parking brake.

3.20.2 Supporting lifted machine and machine parts securely

Pos: 59.5 /BA/Sicherheit/3. Sicherheitsroutinen/Angehobene Maschine und Maschinenteile sicher unterbauen @ 316\mod_1422618583318_78.docx @ 2447466 @ @ 1

WARNING

Crushing hazard due to movement of the machine or machine parts!

If the machine is not securely supported, the machine or machine parts may roll, fall or sag.

Thus there is a risk of crushing or death.

• Before working on or under raised parts: Securely support the machine or machine parts.

In order to securely support the machine or machine parts:

• Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to “Shutting down and Safeguarding the

Machine”.

• Securely support the raised machine or machine parts.

• Never support the raised machine or machine parts with materials which may give way.

• Never use hollow blocks or bricks to support the machine or machine parts. Hollow blocks and bricks may break in case of permanent load.

• Never work under the machine or machine parts that are held up by a car jack.

Pos: 60 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

35

Safety

Pos: 61 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/LLage der Sicherheitsaufkleber an der Maschine @ 0\mod_1195634967326_78.docx @ 1020 @ 2 @ 1

3.21 Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the Machine

Pos: 62 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/GGrundmaschine "Front-/ Heckansicht" @ 14\mod_1231774361478_78.docx @ 172491 @ 3 @ 1

3.21.1 Basic machine „front -/ rear view“

Pos: 63 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicherheitsaufkleber Grundmaschine Front Heck Big M 420_USA_Caterpillar (2017-07-12 15:09:16) @ 148\mod_1361375292883_78.docx @ 1327283 @ @ 1

5

8

9

7 6

2

36

3

4

Fig. 4

1

3

4

BM 420 0151

1) 2)

27 002 062 0 (1x) Required

4)

27 002 060 0 (2x) Required

949 228 0 (1x) Required

5)

WARNING

Avoid severe injury to eyes and skin from sulfuric acid.

Wear face mask, gloves and

942 538 -0

942 538 0 (1x) Required

7)

Before performing maintenance and repair work, switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

942 289 0 (1x) Required

8)

EMERGENC

EXIT

Y

35

Produkt:

Format:

Farbe:

100

A very 895

100 x 35 w e i ß F 9 W L = B a s i s , S F r o t F 9 C L , L a c k L A V

942 537 0 (1x) Required

Safety

3)

Warning

To avoid personal injury

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

27 002 057 0

27 002 057 0 (2x) Required

6)

Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks against unintended rolling.

942 250 0 (1x) Required

9)

To avoid injury or death, do not contact electric lines.

942 547 0 (1x) Required

Pos: 64 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

37

Safety

Pos: 65 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/GGrundmaschine "linke und rechte Maschinenseite" @ 14\mod_1231774462634_78.docx @ 172514 @ 3 @ 1

3.21.2 Basic machine „left and right side hand of machine”

Pos: 66 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicherheitsaufkleber Grundmaschine rechte/linke Seite Big M 420_USA_Caterpillar (2017-07-11 15:58:30) @ 148\mod_1361427300462_78.docx @ 1327586 @ @ 1

11

9

10

2

4

11

10

1 12 9

7

8

3

2

Fig. 5

2

3

4

BM 420 0152

38

Safety

1) 2)

CAUTION

To avoid serious injury or death

Read and understand operator´s manual before operating equipm

Lower implement, stop tractor engine and remove key before leaving operator´s platform.

Keep all shields and guards in place.

Keep hands feet and clothing away from moving parts.

Keep riders off the machine.

Make certain every one is clear of the machine before starting tractor engine and starting.

Do not allow unqualified operator to run equipment.

Do not operate equipment in transport position.

Never lubricatem, adjust, unclog or service the equipment with tractor engine is running.

Wait for all movement to stop before opening shield or servicing machine.

Never work underneath equipment without securely supporting.

27 002 054 0

CAUTION

27 002 059 0

27 002 059 0 (3x) required

27 002 054 0 (1x) required

3)

4)

It is impermissible to carry passengers on ladder steps or platforms.

942 291 0 (2x) required

Warning

To avoid Possible injury.

Do not stay in the swivel area of the outrigger arms!

Keep your distance!

27 003 029 0

27 003 029 0 (2x) required

7) 8)

942 545 0 (1x) required

10)

942 539 0 (1x) required

11)

WARNING

9)

WARNING

Hydraulic accumulators store energy.

To AVOID explosion, depressurize the system on the fluid side before repairing.

Failure to comply could result

27 004 017 0

27 004 017 0 (4x) required

12)

Pos: 67 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

27 002 060 0 (2x) required

Avoid bodily injury from rotating engine fan.

Keep hands out of fan discharge area when engine is running.

942 546 -0

942 546 0 (2x) required

Before parking the machine, secure it with wheel chocks against unintended rolling.

942 250 0 (1x) required

39

Safety

Pos: 68 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerk links / rechts @ 14\mod_1231774559868_78.docx @ 172537 @ 3 @ 1

3.21.3 Lateral mowing unit left / right

Pos: 69 /Abkürzungen /CV-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 70 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicherheitsaufkleber Seitenmähwerke (CV) Big M 420_CV_USA_Caterpillar @ 190\mod_1381394754373_78.docx @ 1625787 @ @ 1

1

3

4

2

5 4

1

2

4

6

3 1

4

2

6 4 5

1

2

4

40

5 3

Fig. 6

1 4

4 1 3 5

BM 420 0153_1

1)

Safety

2)

DANGER

Blade can cause serious injury or death.

- Stay clear of machine while in operation.

- Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

27 002 056 0 (4x) required

4)

27 002 055 0 (6x) required

3)

Warning

To avoid personal injur

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

27 002 057 0 (4x) required

5)

27 002 057 0

27 002 058 0 (8x) required

6)

Pos: 71 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

27 004 016 0 (4x) required 27 002 060 0 (2x) required

41

Safety

Pos: 72 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 73 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/Sicherheitsaufkleber Seitenmähwerke (CV) Big M 420_CRi_USA_Caterpillar @ 190\mod_1381398858347_78.docx @ 1625937 @ @ 1

LH 3

RH

4

1

2

LH

4

1

3

4

2

6*

1

2

4

1

2

42

5* 3*

1* 4*

Fig. 7

*) right-hand and left-hand side of the machine

RH = right-hand side of the machine

LH= left-hand side of the machine

5* 4*

BM420CRi017

1)

Safety

2)

DANGER

Blade can cause serious injury or death.

- Stay clear of machine while in operation.

- Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

27 002 056 0 (4x) required

4)

27 002 055 0 (6x) required

3)

Warning

To avoid personal injur

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

27 002 057 0 (4x) required

5)

27 002 057 0

27 002 058 0 (8x) required

6)

Pos: 74 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

27 004 016 0 (4x) required 27 002 060 0 (2x) required

43

Safety

Pos: 75 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

3.21.4 Front mowing unit

Pos: 76 /Abkürzungen /CV-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 77 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/CV/Sicherheitsaufkleber Frontmähwerk Big M 420_USA_CV CAT @ 189\mod_1381148215642_78.docx @ 1620087 @ @ 1

1

2

4

5 1

4

1

2

4

2

Fig. 8

6

3

44

5

6

BM420CV003

1) 2)

DANGER

Blade can cause serious injury or death.

- Stay clear of machine while in operation.

- Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

27 002 056 0 (3x) Required

4)

Safety

27 002 055 0 (3x) Required

3)

27 002 058 0 (3x) Required

949 228 0 (1x) Required

5)

With hydraulic front guard flap option

Warning

To avoid personal injury

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

27 002 057 0

27 002 057 0 (2x) Required

Pos: 78 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

6)

27 002 060 0 (2x) Required

45

Safety

Pos: 79 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 80 /BA/Sicherheit/Aufkleber/Selbstfahrer/Big M 420/CRi/Sicherheitsaufkleber Frontmähwerk (CRI) Big M 420_USA_Caterpillar @ 149\mod_1361455866117_78.docx @ 1330678 @ @ 1

1

4

2

5

1

2 4

1

2 4

3 7

5

6

BM420CRi013

Fig. 9

6

46

1)

27 002 055 0 (3x) Required

3)

Safety

2)

DANGER

Blade can cause serious injury or death.

- Stay clear of machine while in operation.

- Keep discharge chute and shields in place.

27 002 056 0 (3x) Required

4)

27 002 058 0 (3x) Required

949 228 0 (1x) Required

5)

With hydraulic front guard flap option

Warning

To avoid personal injury

Never put your hand into the danger area as parts may be moving.

6)

Pos: 81 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

27 002 057 0

27 002 057 0 (2x) Required

7)

CAUTION

To avoid serious injury or death

Read and understand operator´s manual before operating equip

Lower implement, stop tractor engine and remove key before leaving operator´s platform.

Keep all shields and guards in place.

Keep hands feet and clothing away from moving parts.

Keep riders off the machine.

Make certain every one is clear of the machine before starting tractor engine and starting.

Do not allow unqualified operator to run equipment.

Do not operate equipment in transport position.

Never lubricatem, adjust, unclog or service the equipment with tractor engine is running.

Wait for all movement to stop before opening shield or servicin machine.

Never work underneath equipment without securely supporting.

27 002 054 0

27 002 054 0 (1x)

27 002 060 0 (2x) Required

47

Data memory

Pos: 82 /BA/Datenspeicher/Datenspeicher @ 368\mod_1441604875252_78.docx @ 2698746 @ 1 @ 1

Pos: 83 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

A variety of electronic components of the machine contains data memories that save temporarily and permanently technical information on machine condition, events and errors.

This technical information generally documents the condition of a part, module, system or of the environment:

– Operating states of system components (e.g. filling levels)

– Status messages of the machine and its single components (e.g. number of revolutions of wheel, wheel speed, retardation of movements, lateral acceleration)

– Malfunctions and defects in important system components (e.g. light and brakes)

– Reactions of machine in special driving situations (e.g. actuation of airbag, installing stability control systems)

– Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature)

These data are exclusively of a technical nature. They are used to detect and remedy errors as well as to optimize machine functions. There is no possibility to create motion profiles on driven routes from these data.

If services are occupied (e.g. repair services, service processes, warranty cases, quality assurance), this technical information can be read by employees of service network (including manufacturer) from the event and error data memory by means of special diagnostic units.

There you receive further information, if necessary. After the error has been remedied, the information in the error storage is either deleted or overwritten continuously.

When using the machine, situations are possible in which these technical data in connection with other information (accident protocol, damage to the machine, testimonies etc.) could become transferable to people - if applicable in consultation with an expert.

Additional functions regulated by a contractual agreement with the customer (e.g. remote maintenance) permit the transmission of certain machine data from the machine.

48

Pos: 84 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/K-O/Maschinenbeschreibung @ 107\mod_1334231806004_78.docx @ 965201 @ 1 @ 1

Machine Description

Pos: 85 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/V/Varianten zur Maschinenausstattung @ 348\mod_1435841651854_78.docx @ 2621564 @ 2 @ 1

5.1 Variants for Machine Equipment

Pos: 86 /BA/Maschinenbeschreibung/Maschinenübersicht/Selbstfahrer/Varianten BiG M 420 @ 348\mod_1435843311387_78.docx @ 2621655 @ @ 1

The machine may be equipped with the following variants:

• Hydraulic lateral adjustment front mounted mower for levelling system

• Hydraulic cutting height adjustment

• Aktivo comfort seat

• Hydraulic swath merging system

Pos: 87 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMaschinenübersicht @ 0\mod_1195565731130_78.docx @ 555 @ 2 @ 1

• BSS swath width in case of CV design

Pos: 88 /BA/Maschinenbeschreibung/Maschinenübersicht/Selbstfahrer/Maschinenübersicht BiG M 420_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358840274243_78.docx @ 1278590 @ @ 1

11 10 9 8 7

1 2 12

Fig. 10

1 Lateral mowing unit right

2 Outrigger arm right

3

Pos: 89 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

4 Front mowing unit

5 Outrigger arm left

6 Lateral mowing unit left

7 Cabin

13 5 6

4

8 Operating console

9 Engine

11 Work hydraulics valves

12 Batteries / main battery switch

13 Shut-off valve front outrigger

BM 420 0158

49

Machine Description

Pos: 90 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/KKennzeichnung @ 0\mod_1195564622099_78.docx @ 496 @ 2 @ 1

5.3

Pos: 91 /BA/Einleitung/Kennzeichnung/BiG MBig M 420 @ 452\mod_1463552425538_78.docx @ 3074855 @ @ 1

Identification Plate

1

BM 420 0059

Fig. 11

The machine data are located on a nameplate (1). It is located on the lower right side of the machine on the front of the frame.

Pos: 92 /BA/Einleitung/Kennzeichnung/Angaben für Anfrage und Bestellungen_Fahrzeugident-Nr. @ 0\mod_1195565119708_78.docx @ 515 @ 2 @ 1

5.4 Information Required for Questions and Orders

Pos: 93 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Type

Year of manufacture

Vehicle ID number

Note

The entire identification plate represents a legal document and should not be altered or rendered illegible!

When asking questions concerning the machine or ordering spare parts, be sure to provide type designation, vehicle ID number and the year of manufacture : To ensure that these data are always available, we recommend that you enter them in the fields above.

Note

Authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer help to ensure safety. The use of spare parts, accessories and other devices which are not manufactured, tested or approved by KRONE will result in the revoking of the liability for damages resulting thereof.

50

Pos: 94 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Ansprechpartner @ 0\mod_1195569394286_78.docx @ 839 @ 3 @ 1

Machine Description

5.4.1 Contact

Pos: 95 /BA/AdressenAdresse Maschinenfabrik KRONE Spelle @ 489\mod_1484905432391_78.docx @ 3290621 @ @ 1

Maschinenfabrik Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

Heinrich-Krone-Strasse 10

D-48480 Spelle (Germany)

Telephone: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-0 (Head Office)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-339 (Head Office)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-239 (Spare parts - domestic)

Fax.: + 49 (0) 59 77/935-359 (Spare parts - export)

Pos: 96 /BA/AdressenAdresse KRONE North America @ 417\mod_1453355357015_78.docx @ 2921495 @ @ 1

Mailing address

Krone North America, Inc.

P.O. Box 18880

Memphis, TN 38181-0880

USA

Physical address

Krone North America, Inc.

3363 Miac Cove

Memphis, TN 38118

USA

Phone +1 901 842-6011

Fax +1 901 842-6016

E-mail [email protected]

Internet www.krone-northamerica.com

Pos: 97 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

51

Technical Data of the Machine

Pos: 98.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Technische Daten der Maschine @ 134\mod_1351154219999_78.docx @ 1195165 @ 1 @ 1

6

Pos: 98.2 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Technische Daten mit 2. Überschrift @ 0\mod_1195566374865_78.docx @ 594 @ 2 @ 1

Technical Data of the Machine

All information, illustrations and technical data in these operating instructions correspond to the latest state at the time of publication. We reserve the right to make design changes at any time and without notification of reasons.

Pos: 98.3 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Grundmaße Fahrzeug Big M 420_Caterpillar/MAN @ 140\mod_1355220777826_78.docx @ 1246434 @ @ 1

Vehicle

Basic dimensions

Transport width

Transport length

Transport height

3000 mm

8165 mm

4000 mm

10.000 kg - front / 6.000 kg - rear Weight distribution

Pos: 98.4 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Motor Caterpillar C13 BiG M 420 USA @ 189\mod_1381226967886_78.docx @ 1622855 @ @ 1

Engine

Engine manufacturer

Engine type

Number of cylinders and arrangement

Emission level (Tier)

Power

Cooling system

Combustion method

Caterpillar

C13

6 cylinders in row

IIIb (EU) / Tier 4i (USA)

309 KW (415 PS)

Liquid cooling

Direct injection

Engine speed road operation field mode

850 – 1650 rpm

1900 rpm

24 V; 142 ±30 A Starter (without load)

Pos: 98.5 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Fahrantrieb Big M 420_Caterpillar/MAN @ 137\mod_1353481050673_78.docx @ 1217255 @ @ 1

Travelling gear

Type

Pos: 98.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Working speed

Transport speed

Continuous hydraulic drive with rotary piston motors

0 to 20 km/h

0 to 40 km/h

All-wheel Standard

Axle separation Standard

52

Pos: 98.7 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Achsen Big M 420_Caterpillar/MAN @ 142\mod_1358417808790_78.docx @ 1273931 @ @ 1

Axles

Steering angle

Steering

Suspension front axle

Pos: 98.8 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Bereifung_MAN @ 462\mod_1465885170718_78.docx @ 3112125 @ @ 1

Tyres

53°

Technical Data of the Machine

Rear axle

Hydro-pneumatic

Front 750/60 R30 (CARGO X BIB)

Rear 600/60 R 30,5 (CARGO X BIB)

Front 750/65 R26 (MEGA X BIB)

Rear 600/65 R28 (AC 65)

Air pressure

1.2 bar

1.2 bar

1.9 bar

1.2 bar

Note

When using the machine on slopes, increase the values specified in the table by 0.4 bar.

Pos: 98.9 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Radmuttern_Caterpillar/MAN @ 142\mod_1358420623083_78.docx @ 1274079 @ @ 1

Wheel nuts

Tightening torque

Pos: 98.10 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Abmessungen Mähwerk CV_Caterpillar/MAN @ 137\mod_1353499031570_78.docx @ 1218454 @ @ 1

Mowing units CV design

Number of mowing units

Working width

Number of cutting discs

Number of blade drums

630 Nm

3

9.720 mm

4 per lateral mowing unit

5 per front mowing unit

4 per lateral mowing unit

2 per front mowing unit

V-shaped steel tines

700/1.000 rpm

Conditioner system

Speed conditioner

Pos: 98.11 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Abmessungen Mähwerk CRI_Caterpillar/MAN @ 140\mod_1355221207089_78.docx @ 1246463 @ @ 1

Mowing units CRI design

Number of mowing units

Working width

Number of cutting discs

Number of blade drums

Pos: 98.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Conditioner system

Speed conditioner

3

9.000 mm

5 per mowing unit

2 per mowing unit

Rollers

760 rpm

53

Technical Data of the Machine

Pos: 98.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/TTechnische Daten Klimaanlage @ 136\mod_1352814649537_78.docx @ 1211328 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.1 Technical Data Air Conditioning System

Pos: 98.14 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Klimaanlage 900 m³/h 15 Ampere @ 190\mod_1381227246656_78.docx @ 1622914 @ @ 1

Part

Evaporator

Heater

Fan

Voltage

Power consumption

Refrigerant

Filling quantity

Performance data

Refrigerating capacity* 5200 Watt*

Heating capacity 4000 Watt

900 m

12 V

3

/h free blowing

15 amperes

R 134a (CFC free)

2000 g

* measured at +30°C ambient temperature (manufacturer's data)

Pos: 98.15 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Klimaanlage Kältemitteldatenblatt R 134a (Auszug) @ 0\mod_1197351117948_78.docx @ 17726 @ 3 @ 1

6.1.2 Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt)

Refrigerant R 134a:

Chemical designation:

Chemical formula:

Molecular weight:

Boiling point (at 1.013 bar):

Freezing point:

Critical temperature:

Critical pressure:

Density (liquid at +25° Celsius):

Flammability limits

Environmental data

FKW 134a:

ODP - Ozonolysis potential

CLP - Chlorine load potential

HGWP - Greenhouse effect

PCR - Photochemical reactivity

Pos: 98.16 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Motor-Elektrik / Maschinen-Elektrik_Caterpillar @ 350\mod_1436446528605_78.docx @ 2626692 @ 2 @ 1

6.2 Technical Data of Electrical System

1,1,1,2-tetrafluorethane

CH

2

F CF

3

102.0 g/mol

-26.1°C

-101.0°C

-101.1°C

40.60 bar

1.206 kg/m

3 in air - not flammable

ODP = 0

CLP = 0

HGWP = 0.26

PCR = 0.5

Designation

Alternator (engine electronics)

Alternator (on-board electrical system)

Number of batteries

Pos: 98.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Battery voltage

Battery capacity per battery

28 V; 115 A

14 V; 270 A

3 pieces

12 V

135 Ah

54

Pos: 98.18 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBetriebsstoffe @ 174\mod_1371620600320_78.docx @ 1490571 @ 2 @ 1

6.3 Consumables

Pos: 98.19 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Betriebsstoffe Fahrzeug BiG M 420 Caterpillar @ 189\mod_1381226752521_78.docx @ 1622646 @ @ 1

Vehicle

Diesel tank

Pos: 98.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSchmierstoffe @ 17\mod_1236177314933_78.docx @ 201837 @ 2 @ 1

Engine coolant

6.4 Lubricants

Pos: 98.21 /BA/Einleitung/Technische Daten/Selbstfahrer/BiG M 420/Technische Daten: Schmierstoffe Fahrzeug BiG M 420 Caterpillar @ 190\mod_1381230081930_78.docx @ 1622943 @ @ 1

Vehicle

Hydraulic oil

Transfer gearbox

Engine oil

Pos: 98.22 /Abkürzungen /Mähwerke CV-Ausführung @ 145\mod_1359535035820_78.docx @ 1295126 @ @ 1

Mowing units (CV design)

Pos: 98.23 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen_Füllmengen/Mähwerke/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Füllmengen Frontmähwerk BiG M 420 CV @ 95\mod_1328526745348_78.docx @ 799072 @ @ 1

Angular gear*

Input gearbox * (CRI)

Shifting gear *

Main gearbox **

Cutter bar *

Cutter bar **

* = front mowing unit

Pos: 98.24 /Abkürzungen /Mähwerke CRi-Ausführung @ 145\mod_1359535111951_78.docx @ 1295445 @ @ 1

Mowing units (CRi design)

Pos: 98.25 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen_Füllmengen/Mähwerke/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Füllmengen Frontmähwerk BiG M 420 CRi @ 95\mod_1328526778343_78.docx @ 799100 @ @ 1

Filling quantity

700 litres

60 litres

Filling

Quantity

[Litres]

1.7 l

0.9 l

6.8 l

2 x 1.7 l

1 x 7.0 l

2 x 8.0 l

Technical Data of the Machine

Refer to the enlosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

Pos: 98.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Angular gearbox

Input gearbox

Angular gearbox

Gearbox for top roller drive

(optional)

Cutter bar

Filling quantity

80 litres

Filtered lubricants

Bio-degradable lubricants

HLP46, HE46

6.0 litres Mobil SHC 630

34 litres

Refer to the enlosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

Filling

Quantity

[Litres]

3 x 1.7 l

3 x 0.7 l

3 x 0.9 l

3 x 0.3 l

3 x 7.0 l

Filtered oils

Brand name

SAE 90

** = lateral mowing units

Filtered oils

Brand name

SAE 90

Bio-degradable lubricants

Brand name

On request

Bio-degradable lubricants

Brand name

On request

55

Technical Data of the Machine

Pos: 98.27 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/Vogel/Betriebsstoffe Fettsorten der Zentralschmierung @ 348\mod_1435838648092_78.docx @ 2621117 @ 3 @ 1

6.4.1 Central Lubrication System, NLGI Class 2

AGIP

ARAL

BP

Autol Top 2000

Long-term grease H

Energrease LS EP 9346

Minimum conveying temperature

Saponification [°C]

Spec. Ca

Li

Li

Li

10

25

–20

25

CASTROL

ESSO

ELF

FINA

Spheerol EP L2 Li

Exxon multi-purpose grease Li

ELF Multi 2

EP multi-purpose grease

Li

Li

Li

KROON OIL Lithep Grease

MOBIL Mobilux EP 2

Li

Li

Li

MOGUL

ÖMV

OPTIMOL

SHELL

LV 1 EP

ÖMV Signum M283

Olit EP 2

Retinax EP L2

Li

Li/Ca

Li

Li

Li

Li

Zeller & Gmelin Divinol multi-purpose grease 2 Li

Biologically fast degradable lubricating greases

Pos: 99 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

ARAL BAB EP 2

AVIA Syntogrease

BECHEM UWS VE 42

DEA

FINA

Dolon E EP2

Biolical EP S2

Li/Ca

Li

Li/Ca

Li/Ca

Li/Ca

–20

25

25

–20

25

LUBRITECH Stabyl Eco EP2

Li

Li/Ca

25

–20

ÖMV ÖMV Ca 25

Ca –20

Zeller & Gmelin Divinol E2 Li 25

–20

–20

–20

–20

25

10

–15

–20

25

25

25

–20

–15

–20

–20

56

Pos: 100.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/K-O/Kabine @ 0\mod_1195650476560_78.docx @ 1556 @ 1 @ 1

Cabin

7 Cabin

Pos: 100.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Warnung - Aufstiegsleiter zur Fahrerkabine BiG X Facelift @ 401\mod_1447766131022_78.docx @ 2839706 @ @ 1

WARNING

Pos: 100.3 /BA/Kabine/Aufstiegsleiter/Aufstiegsleiter Big M 420 @ 47\mod_1285667878078_78.docx @ 457056 @ @ 1

Risk of injury due to falling from a great height!

The ladder allows operators to climb to heights from which a fall could lead to severe to fatal injuries.

• Do not climb up or down the ladder while the machine is moving.

• It is impermissible to carry passengers on ladder steps or platforms.

• Always keep the ladder clean. In particular, make sure that it is free of deposits of grease or other slippery substances.

Pos: 100.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 12

• Ladder (1) to the driver’s cab

1

BM 420 0001

57

Cabin

Pos: 100.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/KKabinentür öffnen @ 0\mod_1195650425029_78.docx @ 1537 @ 2 @ 1

7.1

Pos: 100.6 /BA/Kabine/Tür Öffnen von innen/außen @ 0\mod_1195651571638_78.docx @ 1633 @ @ 1

Opening the cabin door

1

BM 400 0182

Fig. 13

• From the outside:

Use the door key to unlock the door lock (1); press in the button (1) and open the door.

1

BM 400 0183

Pos: 100.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 14

• From the inside:

Lift the door opening lever (1) and open the door.

58

Pos: 100.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBedienungselemente @ 0\mod_1195651806826_78.docx @ 1652 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 100.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.docx @ 1671 @ 3 @ 1

7.2.1 Overview

Pos: 100.10 /BA/Kabine/Bedienelemente Übersicht Big M 420_Caterpillar @ 148\mod_1361271868965_78.docx @ 1322146 @ @ 1

Cabin

12

1

2

Pos: 100.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

3

Fig.15

2 Steering column

3 Service brake

5 Switch group - roof panel

6 Info centre

9

5 13

7

10

4

11

6

8

BM 420 0145

9 Switch group – air conditioning/heating

10 Interior lighting

12 ISO compartment for radio

13 Side window wiper (right/left)

59

Cabin

Pos: 100.12.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/LLuft-Komfort-Sitz @ 78\mod_1314281916697_78.docx @ 696162 @ 2 @ 1

7.3 Air comfort seat

Pos: 100.12.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr! - Kurzzeitige Ablenkung @ 78\mod_1314282284221_78.docx @ 696190 @ @ 1

Danger! - Brief distraction

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The driver’s seat must only be adjusted when the machine is stopped.

Pos: 100.12.3 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Gefahr! - Eingeschränkter Bewegungsfreiraum des Mulitfunktionshebels (alte Darstellung) @ 79\mod_1314595386879_78.docx @ 696925 @ @ 1

Danger ! – Limited freedom of movement for the multi-function lever

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• After adjusting the seat, the right armrest and the steering column adjustment, check whether the multi-function lever is freely moveable in all directions. Should this not be the case, the setting needs to be readjusted.

Pos: 100.12.4 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Warnung - Fahrersitz falsch eingestellt (alte Darstellung) @ 79\mod_1314351997140_78.docx @ 696784 @ @ 1

WARNING! - Wrong set driver´s seat!

Health problems.

• Prior to start-up, adjust the driver`s seat ergonomically and individually according to the driver

Pos: 100.12.5 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Luft-Komfort-Sitz STANDARDLuft-Komfort-Sitz_Bild_Gesamtübersicht BM 420/500 Big X @ 325\mod_1425560162607_78.docx @ 2498209 @ @ 1

10

8

2

3

4

5

1

6 12

7

9

BX480595

Fig. 16

Pos: 100.12.6 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Einführtext @ 78\mod_1314338699867_78.docx @ 696252 @ @ 1

The air-cushioned comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.

Pos: 100.12.7 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Gewichtseinstellung @ 78\mod_1314339002000_78.docx @ 696280 @ @ 1

Pos: 100.12.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Weight adjustment

In order to prevent health problems, the individual driver’s weight adjustment should be checked and adjusted prior to operation of the machine. The adjustment should be carried out whilst sitting absolutely stationary.

• Pull the lever (6) upwards briefly (position I).

60

Cabin

Pos: 100.12.9 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Höheneinstellung @ 78\mod_1314339309445_78.docx @ 696308 @ @ 1

Height adjustment

The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.

• Pull the lever (6) upwards completely (position I) to move the driver’s seat (1) up. Press the lever (6) down completely (position II) to move the driver’s seat (1) down. When the upper or lower end position of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.

Pos: 100.12.10 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Horizontalfederung @ 78\mod_1314340542270_78.docx @ 696364 @ @ 1

Horizontal suspension

The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the horizontal suspension.

• Swing the lever (5) to the front - the horizontal suspension is active; swing the lever (5) back

– the horizontal suspension is switched off.

Pos: 100.12.11 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Längseinstellung @ 78\mod_1314340870689_78.docx @ 696392 @ @ 1

Pos: 100.12.12 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Sitzneigungseinstellung @ 78\mod_1314341157250_78.docx @ 696420 @ @ 1

Longitudinal adjustment

• Pull the locking lever (4) up, and push the driver’s seat (1) forward or backward into the requested position. Permit the locking lever (4) to snap into place; after locking, the driver’s seat must not be movable into any other position.

Seat angle adjustment

• Pull the left key (3) up and at the same time set the angle of the sitting surface by increasing or decreasing the pressure on the seat surface.

Pos: 100.12.13 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Sitztiefeneinstellung @ 78\mod_1314342965217_78.docx @ 696448 @ @ 1

Seat depth adjustment

• Pull the right key (2) up and at the same time bring the sitting surface into the required position by pushing forward and backward.

Pos: 100.12.14 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Kopfstütze @ 78\mod_1314343284989_78.docx @ 696476 @ @ 1

Headrest

Set the headrest in such a way that the upper edges of the head and the headrest are on the same height, if possible.

• Adjust the height of the headrest (10) by pulling out and pressing down across the noticeable snaps.

Pos: 100.12.15 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Bandscheibenstütze @ 78\mod_1314343609780_78.docx @ 696504 @ @ 1

Pos: 100.12.16 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Rückenlehneneinstellung @ 78\mod_1314344065766_78.docx @ 696532 @ @ 1

Lumbar support

• The height as well as the intensity of the arching in the backrest can be adapted individually by turning the hand wheel (9) to the left or right.

Pos: 100.12.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Adjustment of the backrest

• Pull the locking lever (7) up to set the inclination of the backrest. Permit the locking lever (7) to snap into place – after locking, the backrest must not move into a different position any more.

61

Cabin

Pos: 100.12.18 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Schwingungsdämpfer einstellen @ 79\mod_1314596261195_78.docx @ 696981 @ @ 1

Set the Vibration Damper

Pos: 100.12.19 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Warnung - Schwingungsdämpfer falsch eingestellt (alte Darstellung) @ 79\mod_1314596183569_78.docx @ 696953 @ @ 1

WARNING! - Wrong set driver´s seat!

Health problems.

• The vibration damper must always be set so tightly that the seat cannot drift, also in case of a bad road, and that the pedals are always in contact with the vibration damper.

Pos: 100.12.20 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Luft-Komfort-Sitz STANDARD/Schwingungsdämpfer einstellbarer @ 79\mod_1314354261168_78.docx @ 696895 @ @ 1

The oscillating behaviour of the driver’s seat can be optimally adjusted to each driving situation via the adjustable damper stepless from “soft” to “hard”.

• Pull lever (12) up (seating comfort: soft)

Pos: 100.12.21 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Armlehne links @ 78\mod_1314344564181_78.docx @ 696588 @ 3 @ 1

• Pull lever (12) down (seating comfort: hard)

7.3.1 Setting the left armrest

Pos: 100.12.22 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Luft-Komfort-Sitz STANDARD/Armlehne links neuer Mutifunktionshebel Bild @ 79\mod_1314353402049_78.docx @ 696867 @ @ 1

8

11

BX850945

Pos: 100.12.23 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Armlehne links Beschreibung @ 79\mod_1314345159341_78.docx @ 696616 @ @ 1

Fig. 17

• Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.

• Remove the cover cap (11) to adjust the height of the armrest.

Pos: 100.12.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Undo the hexagon nut; move the armrest into the requested position and tighten the hexagon nut again. Press the cover cap (11) onto the hexagon nut again.

62

Pos: 100.12.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Armlehne rechts @ 79\mod_1314345446706_78.docx @ 696644 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 100.12.26 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Armlehne rechts Bild BM 420/500 Big X @ 79\mod_1314352240603_78.docx @ 696811 @ @ 1

Cabin

3

1

2

BX850931

Pos: 100.12.27 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Armlehne rechts Beschreibung @ 79\mod_1314346051414_78.docx @ 696700 @ @ 1

Fig. 18

The right armrest (1) and the multi-function lever are one unit.

Setting the right armrest

• Undo the clamping screw (2); move the armrest (1) into the requested height and tighten the clamping screw (2) again.

Pos: 100.12.28 /BA/Kabine/Fahrersitz/Armlehne rechts Beschreibung Zusatz BM 420/500 BigX @ 79\mod_1314353125257_78.docx @ 696839 @ @ 1

Pos: 100.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• The angle of inclination and the height of the right armrest can be adjusted by activating the lever (3)

63

Cabin

Pos: 100.14 /BA/Kabine/Verbandskasten / Betriebsanleitung Schublade BM 420/500 @ 41\mod_1272347696858_78.docx @ 375780 @ 3 @ 1

7.3.3 Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions

Pos: 100.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.19

The drawer (2) for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions is located below the front of the driver’s seat (1).

64

Pos: 100.16 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEinweisersitz @ 52\mod_1289471929875_78.docx @ 504469 @ 2 @ 1

Cabin

7.4 Guide's seat

Pos: 100.17 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte Warnhinweise/Warnung - Einweisersitz: Ablenkung des Fahrers @ 120\mod_1343311143147_78.docx @ 1100178 @ @ 1

WARNING

Pos: 100.18 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Beifahrersitz Bild BM 500 @ 42\mod_1272431803112_78.docx @ 377335 @ @ 1

Danger to life due to brief distraction of the driver!

The driver may be distracted by a second person in the cab, possibly causing him not to pay adequate attention to his driving and to endanger people as a result.

• The passenger seat may only be used while the driver is being instructed.

• While the machine is being operated, there must be no other person in the cab or on the machine except the driver, unless the driver is being instructed.

Fig.20

Pos: 100.19 /BA/Kabine/Einweisersitz / Beifahrersitz/Einweisersitzfläche herunterklappen @ 52\mod_1289472477171_78.docx @ 504541 @ @ 1

• Before use fold down the guide's seat surface (1).

Pos: 100.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/KKühlbox @ 42\mod_1272436051831_78.docx @ 377418 @ 3 @ 1

7.4.1 Cooler

Pos: 100.21 /BA/Kabine/Kühlbox Bild BM 420 / 500 @ 42\mod_1272436122175_78.docx @ 377518 @ @ 1

1

2

3

3

1

4

BM 500 0177

Fig.21

Pos: 100.22 /BA/Kabine/Kühlbox Text @ 42\mod_1272437167768_78.docx @ 377542 @ @ 1

Pos: 100.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cooler (1) is located under the guide's seat (2) in the cab.

The cooler can be connected to the 12-V socket (3) on the right next to the passenger seat with the 12-V plug (4).

65

Cabin

Pos: 100.24 /BA/Kabine/Notausstieg BM 420/500 @ 41\mod_1272290080084_78.docx @ 375572 @ 3 @ 1

2 b

3 c

1

1

BM 500 0165

Pos: 100.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.22

In case of an emergency (1), the side window on the RH side in the direction of travel, next to the driver's seat, can be opened as an exit door.

To do this:

• Swivel the lever (2) forward until it reaches the locking point

• Pull the safety cotter pin (3) and remove it

• Open the side window (1) completely

66

Pos: 100.26 /BA/Kabine/On-Board- Diagnosestecker (OBD) – Motor Caterpillar (Motordiagnose Stecker ) @ 147\mod_1360912275651_78.docx @ 1317016 @ 3 @ 1

7.4.3 Engine diagnostics plug (Service Tool Connector)

2 1

Cabin

BM 420 0138

Pos: 100.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 23

The engine diagnostics plug (1) is located in the cabin, behind the instructional seat and below the storage surface (2).

67

Cabin

Pos: 100.28 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lenksäule und Fußpedale BM 500/BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289480764906_78.docx @ 504895 @ 2 @ 1

7.5 Steering Column and Foot Pedals

1

5

2

4

8 3 7

6

10

9

Fig.24

1 Button for horn

3 Pilot lamp indicator

6 Full beam indicator light

Pos: 100.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

8 Release lever for horizontal steering column adjustment

9 Release lever for horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment

10 Service brake

BM 500 0132_1

68

Pos: 100.30 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lenksäulenverstellung @ 504\mod_1498116145515_78.docx @ 3470628 @ 3 @ 1

7.5.1 Steering Column Adjustment

Cabin

Danger ! - Loss of control over the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Adjust the steering column only when the machine is at a standstill.

• The steering column (1) is held in vertical position by spring pressure. Before actuating the pedal (2), hold the steering wheel with both hands.

1

3

2

BX100300_2

Fig. 25

Horizontal and vertical steering column adjustment

• Use the pedal (2) to release the steering column (1), and adjust to the desired position.

After the pedal (2) has been released, the steering column (1) will be locked.

Pos: 100.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Horizontal steering column adjustment

• Loosen release lever (3). Move the steering column (1) into the requested position. Lock the release lever (3) again.

69

Cabin

Pos: 100.32 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Hupe @ 504\mod_1498110653469_78.docx @ 3470596 @ 3 @ 1

7.5.2 Horn

1

Pos: 100.33 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Blinklichtschalter @ 504\mod_1498121358264_78.docx @ 3470700 @ 3 @ 1

BX100210_2

Fig. 26

• When the push-button (1) is pressed, the horn is sounded.

7.5.3 Flashing Light Switch

1

2

BX100213_2

Fig. 27

Note

When you want to change the direction of travel in road traffic, use flashing light to shows this.

• Switch (1) forward - direction indicator right

• Switch (1) backward - direction indicator left

Pos: 100.34 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The direction indicator warning light (2) lights up when the flashing lights are switched on.

70

Pos: 100.35 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Fernlicht @ 504\mod_1498123087719_78.docx @ 3470732 @ 3 @ 1

7.5.4 Full Beam

1

2

Pos: 100.36 /BA/Kabine/Lenksäule/Lichthupe @ 504\mod_1498124110049_78.docx @ 3470884 @ 3 @ 1

BX100212_2

Fig. 28

Note

Full beam only when dipped beam is turned on.

Turn off full beam when a vehicle is approaching from the opposite direction.

• Switch full beam on - press lever (1) down.

• Switch full beam off - pull lever (1) up.

When full beam is switched on, the blue pilot lamp (2) will be lit.

Cabin

2

1

BX200040_2

Pos: 100.37 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 29

• Pull the headlamp flasher lever (1) up.

71

Cabin

Pos: 100.38 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Betriebsbremse betätigen @ 49\mod_1286779662750_78.docx @ 463113 @ 3 @ 1

7.5.6

Pos: 100.39 /BA/Kabine/Betriebsbremse betätigen Bild BM 420/500 Big X @ 52\mod_1289487058875_78.docx @ 505805 @ @ 1

Using the operating brake

1

BX100111_1

Fig. 30

Pos: 100.40 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Betriebsbremse betätigen Text @ 74\mod_1309242945934_78.docx @ 660390 @ @ 1

Danger!

– when the operating brake function is limited.

Pos: 100.41 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Check the brake function every time before starting to drive.

72

Pos: 100.42.1 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Schaltergruppe Dachkonsole Bild BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347266509191_78.docx @ 1160361 @ 2 @ 1

7.6 Switch Group Roof Panel

1 2 3 4 5 6

Cabin

7 8 9 10 11

Fig. 31

Pos: 100.42.2 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Schaltergruppe Dachkonsole Text BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347267004931_78.docx @ 1160395 @ @ 1

1 Work lights cabin roof

2 Work lights bottom front

3 Work lights lateral bottom and work lights mowing units right, left

4 Mirror adjustment (right outside mirror only)

5 Rear work lights

6 Parking light / dipped beam

7 Allround light (optional)

Pos: 100.42.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

10 Windshield wiper

11 Windshield wiper washer system

73

Cabin

Pos: 100.42.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBeleuchtung @ 0\mod_1195658399935_78.docx @ 1881 @ 2 @ 1

7.7 Lighting

Pos: 100.42.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.docx @ 1671 @ 3 @ 1

7.7.1 Overview

Pos: 100.42.6 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Beleuchtung Übersicht BM 420 @ 47\mod_1285674059968_78.docx @ 457109 @ @ 1

6

4 7 6

7 4

2

1 3

9 8

3

8 9

5

12

11 10

Fig.32

1 Working floodlights for mowing unit right

2 Working floodlights for mowing unit left

3 Working floodlights, side lower

4 Working floodlight lower pointing to the front

5 Working floodlight rear

6 Cab roof working floodlight

7 Dipped beam / full beam

Pos: 100.42.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

8 Front parking light (clearance lamp)

9 Indicators / hazard warning flashers

10 Licence plate lamp

11 a) Brake light b) Indicators / hazard warning flashers c) Tail light / rear parking light (clearance lamp)

12 Allround light (optional)

11

11 a b c

BM 420 0002

74

Pos: 100.42.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/BBlinker, Warnblinkanlage und Bremslicht @ 405\mod_1449490637036_78.docx @ 2878946 @ 3 @ 1

7.7.2 Direction indicator, hazard lights and brake light

Pos: 100.42.9 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Blinker Hinweis Fahrtrichtungswechsel bei Straßenfahrt mit Blinklicht anzeigen. (2012-08-10 12:02:46) @ 48\mod_1286516520484_78.docx @ 461683 @ @ 1

Note

In road traffic the change of travelling direction is indicated by a flashing light.

Pos: 100.42.10 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker, Warnblinkanlage und Bremslicht Bild BM 420 @ 48\mod_1286519378578_78.docx @ 461839 @ @ 1

Cabin

12a

12b

10

10

BM 420 0003

Fig.33

Pos: 100.42.11 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker einschalten @ 48\mod_1286517252328_78.docx @ 461735 @ 4 @ 1

7.7.2.1 Switching on the indicator

• Actuate the direction indicator on the steering wheel; the indicators (10, 12b) will flash on one side (right/left).

Pos: 100.42.12 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Bremslicht @ 48\mod_1286517961515_78.docx @ 461761 @ 4 @ 1

7.7.2.2 Brake light

Pos: 100.42.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/U-Z/Warnblinkanlage @ 48\mod_1286518286593_78.docx @ 461813 @ 4 @ 1

When the ignition is switched on, the brake lights (12a) will light up as soon as the operating brake is pressed.

7.7.2.3 Switching on the hazard warning flasher

Pos: 100.42.14 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Warnblinkanlage Bild BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347268382748_78.docx @ 1160508 @ @ 1

12b

1

10

BM 420 0004_1

Fig.34

Pos: 100.42.15 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Blinker/Bremslicht/Warnblinkanlage/Blinker, Warnblinkanlage und Bremslicht BM 400/420/500 @ 0\mod_1195658983248_78.docx @ 1921 @ @ 1

The switch (1) for the hazard warning flasher is located in roof panel switch group.

• Actuate the rocker switch (1). The red pilot lamp in the switch (1) will start flashing.

Pos: 100.42.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• When the hazard warning flasher has been switched on, all indicators (10, 12b) will flash at the same time.

75

Cabin

Pos: 100.42.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SStandlicht / Abblendlicht @ 47\mod_1285679225203_78.docx @ 457241 @ 3 @ 1

7.7.3 Side light/dipped beam

Pos: 100.42.18 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Standlicht / Abblendlicht Bild BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347268955251_78.docx @ 1160621 @ @ 1

I

II

III

1

12c

7

11

9

BM 420 0005_1

Pos: 100.42.19 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Standlicht / Abblendlicht Text @ 48\mod_1286520637718_78.docx @ 461971 @ 44 @ 1

Fig.35

The rocker switch (1) for the parking light and the dipped beam is located in the roof panel switch group.

The switch has three positions:

I - Off

II - Parking light

III – Dipped beam

7.7.3.1 Switching on the parking light

7.7.3.2

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:

The following lamps will light up when the parking light is switched on:

9 Front parking light

12c Rear parking light

Switching on the dipped beam

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position III.

When dipped beam is turned on, the following are lit:

9 Front parking light

11 Licence plate lamp

12c Tail light

Pos: 100.42.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The dipped beam can be switched on only when the ignition has been switched on.

76

Pos: 100.42.21 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Arbeitsscheinwerfer @ 48\mod_1286522984234_78.docx @ 462049 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 100.42.22 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Bild BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347270164680_78.docx @ 1160765 @ @ 1

Fig. 36

Pos: 100.42.23 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Text BM 420 / 500 @ 130\mod_1347271298137_78.docx @ 1160794 @ @ 1

The rocker switch (1,2,3,4) for the work lights is located in the switch group roof panel.

1 Work lights cabin roof

2 Work lights bottom front

3 Work lights lateral bottom and work lights mowing units right, left

4 Rear work lights

It has 2 settings:

I Off

II On

Pos: 100.42.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Always switch off the working floodlights during road travel!

Cabin

77

Cabin

Pos: 100.42.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine @ 48\mod_1286524163921_78.docx @ 462127 @ 4 @ 1

7.7.4.1 Working floodlights Cab

Pos: 100.42.26 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine Bild BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347274714584_78.docx @ 1160823 @ @ 1

1

I

II

6

BM 500 0162_1

Fig. 37

Pos: 100.42.27 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Kabine Text BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347275354690_78.docx @ 1160936 @ @ 1

The 6 working floodlights (6) on the cab roof can only be switched on when the parking light is switched on.

• Set the rocker switch (1) to position II:

When the rocker switch (1) is turned on, the following are lit:

6 Cab roof floodlights

Pos: 100.42.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front @ 48\mod_1286524169140_78.docx @ 462153 @ 4 @ 1

7.7.4.2 Working floodlight Bottom front

Pos: 100.42.29 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front Bild BM 420 @ 130\mod_1347276018374_78.docx @ 1161049 @ @ 1

2

II

I

4 4

BM 420 0008_1

Fig. 38

Pos: 100.42.30 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer unten Front Text @ 130\mod_1347276310451_78.docx @ 1161079 @ @ 1

• Set the rocker switch (2) to position II:

When the rocker switch (2) is turned on, the following are lit:

Pos: 100.42.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

4 Working floodlight front (right and left)

78

Pos: 100.42.32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer seitlich unten und Mähwerke rechts/links @ 48\mod_1286524157656_78.docx @ 462101 @ 4 @ 1

7.7.4.3 Working floodlights "down the side and at the right/left mowing units"

Pos: 100.42.33 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer setlich unten und Mähwerke rechts/links Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347277074891_78.docx @ 1161341 @ @ 1

4

3

I

II

Cabin

5

6 7

BM 420 0006_1

Fig. 39

Pos: 100.42.34 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer setlich unten und Mähwerke rechts/linksText BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347277757715_78.docx @ 1161401 @ @ 1

The two working floodlights (4,5,6,7) can only be switched on when the parking light is switched on.

• Set the rocker switch (3) to position II:

When the rocker switch (3) is turned on, the following are lit:

4 Working floodlights for mowing unit right

5 Working floodlights for mowing unit left

6 Working floodlights lateral right

Pos: 100.42.35 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/A-E/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Heck @ 48\mod_1286525027906_78.docx @ 462205 @ 4 @ 1

7 Working floodlights lateral left

7.7.4.4 Working floodlight rear

Pos: 100.42.36 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Heck Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347279118287_78.docx @ 1161513 @ @ 1

4

5

I

II

BM 420 0007_1

Fig.40

Pos: 100.42.37 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Arbeitsscheinwerfer Heck Text BM 400/420/500 @ 48\mod_1286529514968_78.docx @ 462491 @ @ 1

• Set the rocker switch (4) to position II:

When the rocker switch (4) is turned on, the following are lit:

Pos: 100.42.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

5 Working floodlight rear

79

Cabin

Pos: 100.42.39 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/RRundumleuchten optional @ 48\mod_1286524188234_78.docx @ 462179 @ 3 @ 1

7.7.5 Allround lights (optional)

Pos: 100.42.40 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Rundumleuchte Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347279511325_78.docx @ 1161543 @ @ 1

13

1

BM 420 0009_1

Fig.41

Pos: 100.42.41 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Arbeitsscheinwerfer/Rundumleuchte Text BM 400/420/500 @ 49\mod_1286530440406_78.docx @ 462543 @ @ 1

Pos: 100.42.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Option depends on user’s country

In some countries the allround lights must be switched on in road traffic.

Switch on the allround lights (13)

The switch (1) for the allround lights is located in the roof panel switch group.

• Actuate the rocker switch (1). The orange pilot lamp in the switch (1) will light up.

80

Pos: 100.42.43 /BA/Kabine/BeleuchtungInnenbeleuchtung/Spotlight Facelift @ 430\mod_1455702349532_78.docx @ 2972486 @ 3 @ 1

7.7.6 Interior lighting/reading lamp

Cabin

Fig. 42

The interior lighting (1) and the reading lamp (2) are located on the cab roof.

Item Designation Explanation

3 On/Off switch Switches the interior lighting (1) on and off.

Switches the lighting for the reading lamp (2) on or off.

After ignition stage II is switched off, the interior lighting will stay on for the amount of time set on time relay.

The time for switch-off delay can be adjusted with the time relay (5):

• Open the cover (7) on the cab roof

• Move switch (6) S1 and S2 to the desired position (see table)

S1 S2 (s)

Off Off 110...900

On On 14...110

On Off 2.5 14

Off On 0...2.5

Pos: 100.42.44 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Use a screwdriver to make fine adjustments to the rotary potentiometer (8) of the time relay (5) that controls the switch-off delay (amount of time) to match time intervals t (s).

81

Cabin

Pos: 100.42.45 /BA/Kabine/Beleuchtung/Innen-Raumbeleuchtung / Zusätzlicher Spotlight BM 420/500 @ 130\mod_1347002500384_78.docx @ 1159306 @ 3 @ 1

7.7.7 Additional Spotlight

I

II

III

1

Fig. 43

The spotlight is used to illuminate the multi-function lever.

The spotlight (2) is located on the cab roof.

Pos: 100.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The rocker switch (1) for the spotlight has three positions:

I- 30% brightness

II – Off

III – 100% brightness

2

BM 420 0089

82

Pos: 100.44.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/AAußenspiegel @ 32\mod_1253519080403_78.docx @ 313745 @ 2 @ 1

7.8 Outside mirrors

Pos: 100.44.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr- Außenspiegel (2012-08-08 15:22:38) @ 32\mod_1253519267091_78.docx @ 313770 @ @ 1

Danger! - Impaired vision

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Pos: 100.44.3 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Außenspiegel links BM 420 @ 49\mod_1286776114734_78.docx @ 462847 @ 3 @ 1

• Before starting to drive, adjust the mirror so that the rear driving area is fully visible.

Cabin

7.8.1 Left Outside Mirror

1

BM 420 0010

Pos: 100.44.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.44

• Adjust the left outside mirror (1) manually.

83

Cabin

Pos: 100.44.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/RRechter Außenspiegel und Anfahrspiegel BM 400 @ 49\mod_1286776268859_78.docx @ 462873 @ 3 @ 1

7.8.2 Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror

Pos: 100.44.6 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Rechter Außenspiegel und Anfahrspiegel Bild BM 420 @ 131\mod_1347282021728_78.docx @ 1161768 @ @ 1

2

3

1

BM 420 0011_1

Pos: 100.44.7 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Außenspiegel rechts @ 49\mod_1286777019984_78.docx @ 462951 @ 4 @ 1

Fig. 45

7.8.2.1 Setting the right outside mirror

The right outside mirror (1) is electrically adjustable. The switch (3) is located in the roof panel.

• Turn the switch (3) to the right (arrow to the right).

Pos: 100.44.8 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Anfahrspiegel einstellen @ 49\mod_1286776763796_78.docx @ 462925 @ 4 @ 1

• Press the switch (3) up, down and to the side until the outside mirror (1) is set correctly.

7.8.2.2 Setting the anti-collision mirror

The anti-collision mirror (2) must be adjusted manually.

Pos: 100.44.9 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Anfahrspiegel Hinweis (2012-08-08 15:31:56) @ 49\mod_1286776577265_78.docx @ 462899 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 100.44.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Set the anti-collision mirror in such a way that the ground area next to the right front wheel can be checked prior to starting.

84

Pos: 100.44.11 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Innenspiegel @ 0\mod_1195711607577_78.docx @ 2043 @ 2 @ 1

7.9 Inside mirror

BMII-197

Fig. 46:

Adjust the inside mirror manually.

Adjust the inside mirror according to requirements.

Pos: 100.45 /BA/Kabine/Spiegel / Sonnenblende/Sonnenblende BM 420 / 500 @ 131\mod_1347281315525_78.docx @ 1161656 @ 2 @ 1

7.10 Sun blind

Fig. 47

Pos: 100.46 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Adjust the sun blind according to requirements.

Cabin

85

Cabin

Pos: 100.47 /BA/Kabine/Frontscheibenwischer BM 420/500 @ 131\mod_1347282447153_78.docx @ 1161827 @ 2 @ 1

7.11 Windshield wipers

1

BM 420 0090

Fig. 48

The rocker switch (1) for the windshield wipers is located in the roof panel.

The switch has three positions:

I - Off

II - Interval

III - Continuous operation

Switching on the windshield wipers

• Actuate the rocker switch (1).

Pos: 100.48 /BA/Kabine/Scheibenwaschanlage – Frontscheibe BM 420/500 @ 131\mod_1347284689341_78.docx @ 1161926 @ 2 @ 1

7.12 Washer system – windshield

1

BM 420 0091

Pos: 100.49 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 49

The rocker switch (1) for the windshield washer system is located in the roof panel.

Switching on the windshield washer system

• Actuate the rocker switch (1).

86

Pos: 100.50.1 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Schalterkonsole BM 420_Caterpillar @ 147\mod_1360914238362_78.docx @ 1317485 @ 2 @ 1

Cabin

2 2

5

4 7

3

6

1

BM 420 0139

Fig. 50

1)

3)

5)

Panel switch

Ignition lock

12 V socket

2) Indicator lamps

4) Cigarette lighter

6) CAN diagnostics socket

Pos: 100.50.2 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Hinweis CAN-Diagnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss Anbringungsort @ 41\mod_1271762668461_78.docx @ 372652 @ @ 1

Note

The CAN diagnostics socket and USB port are located between the driver's seat and the switch panel.

Pos: 100.50.3 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Konsolenschalter_BM 420 Caterpillar @ 147\mod_1360927287996_78.docx @ 1318065 @ 2 @ 1

7.14 Panel Switch

Fig. 51

1) Release switch – road/field

3)

5)

Parking brake release switch

Axle separation key

Pos: 100.50.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

7) Fold up or fold down front guard flaps switch (front mowing unit optional)

2) Autopilot release switch (optional)

4) Travelling gear release switch

6) Switch hydraulic auger hood left

(optional)

8) Hydraulic auger hood right switch

(optional)

87

Cabin

Pos: 100.50.5 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Betätigung Freigabeschalter (2012-08-08 11:37:12) @ 0\mod_1195717535303_78.docx @ 2202 @ 3 @ 1

7.14.1 Actuating release switches

1

1

2

BX 400 0006

Fig. 52:

Pos: 100.50.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Locked release switch

Effect: Release switches cannot be activated.

• To actuate the release switches (1), push the lock (2) forward and press the release switch.

88

Pos: 100.50.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFreigabeschalter Straße/Feld @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.docx @ 6351 @ 3 @ 1

7.14.2 Release switch – road/field

Pos: 100.50.8 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Stellung Freigabeschalter bei Straßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196320338201_78.docx @ 6332 @ @ 1

Danger! - Release switches for road travel not in position (I) "Road travel"

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• The road/field release switch must be in position "I" for road travel.

• This ensures that only the travelling gear, steering and brakes are activated.

Pos: 100.50.9 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld @ 123\mod_1345103856599_78.docx @ 1128554 @ @ 1

1 II

Cabin

Pos: 100.50.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

I

BM 400 0007

Fig. 53

The release switch road/field (1) is used to switch from road travel to field mode and vice versa.

I - Road travel

II – Field mode

Note

Depending on the position of the "Road/field" release switch, the "Road travel or field mode" working screen appears in the Info Centre.

89

Cabin

Pos: 100.50.11 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Autopilot / -optional @ 0\mod_1195717962350_78.docx @ 2240 @ 3 @ 1

7.14.3 Autopilot release switch / - optional

1 II

I

BM 400 0009

Fig. 54:

Actuating the autopilot release switch (1) releases the autopilot function.

Note - Autopilot is not released

• Autopilot is only available in Field mode with the travelling gear turned on

• The road/field release switch must be active in field operation and the travelling gear release switch must be switched on.

I - Autopilot off

II - Autopilot released

Pos: 100.50.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Autopilot is not released

• For further information, please consult the operating instruction "Autopilot Brief

Introduction" included with delivery

90

Pos: 100.50.13 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Feststellbremse @ 0\mod_1195718259850_78.docx @ 2259 @ 3 @ 1

7.14.4 Release switch - holding brake

Pos: 100.50.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 55:

Note - Parking brake engaged

Effect: Brake overheating

• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.

• The holding brake is applied automatically when the ignition is switched off.

Cabin

91

Cabin

Pos: 100.50.15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFreigabeschalter Fahrantrieb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.docx @ 6293 @ 3 @ 1

7.14.5 Release switch travelling gear

Pos: 100.50.16 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Ungewolltes bewegen der Maschine @ 0\mod_1196319463264_78.docx @ 6313 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unintentional movement of the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• No persons may be present in the direct hazardous area of the machine when the travelling gear release switch is actuated!

• Always remove the ignition key before leaving the cabin.

To turn off the machine:

• Activate the parking brake switch; move the travelling gear switch (1) to position off (I).

Pos: 100.50.17 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb @ 0\mod_1195720600131_78.docx @ 2278 @ @ 1

1 II

I

BM 400 0010

Pos: 100.50.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 56:

When the travelling gear release switch (1) is actuated, the travelling gear is released.

I - Travelling gear off

II - Travelling gear on

Note - Mower drives cannot be switched on.

• When the travelling gear is switched off (position II), the mowing unit drive cannot be switched on.

92

Pos: 100.50.19 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Taste Achstrennung @ 0\mod_1195722759115_78.docx @ 2297 @ 3 @ 1

7.14.6 Axle separation key

Cabin

Fig. 57:

Actuating the axle separation key switches axle separation on or off.

Note - Axle separation does not turn on

• Axle separation can only be activated in drive level 1 (field mode).

• When activating the axle separation, the maximum top speed is 14 km/h (instead of 19 km/h).

• If the axle separation is switched when travelling faster than 14 km/h, the electronics prevent the axle separation from being activated. Only after the speed has been reduced to below 14 km/h, are the electronics, the valves, and the axle separation activated.

• Actuate axle separation key (1) – axle separation switched on

Pos: 100.50.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Actuate axle separation key (1) again – axle separation switched off

93

Cabin

Pos: 100.50.21 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Kontrollleuchten_BM 420 Caterpillar @ 147\mod_1360927890269_78.docx @ 1318094 @ 2 @ 1

7.15 Indicator Lamps

Fig. 58

1) Charge indicator lamp (12V)

3) Fault indicator lamp yellow (engine fault)

5) Diesel particle filter indicator lamp

(regeneration is deactivated)

7) Diesel particle filter indicator lamp

(regeneration active)

Pos: 100.50.22 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Kontrollleuchte Ladekontrollleuchte12/24 Volt BM 420_Caterpillar @ 147\mod_1361194038532_78.docx @ 1320404 @ 3 @ 1

2)

4)

6)

Charge indicator lamp (24V)

Fault indicator lamp red (engine fault)

Diesel particle filter indicator lamp

(regeneration is required)

7.15.1 Charge Indicator Lamp

Charge indicator lamp (12V), charge indicator lamp (24V)

The charge indicator lamps (1, 2) light up if the ignition key in the ignition stages (I and II) is turned.

Charge indicator lamp (12V)

The charge indicator lamp (12V) goes out during starting process.

The charge indicator lamp (1) lights up for 2 seconds after starting the engine.

The charge indicator lamp (1) lights up for 2 seconds after switching off the engine.

Charge indicator lamp (24V)

The charge indicator lamp (24 V) goes out during starting process and does not light up after the starting process.

Pos: 100.50.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The charge indicator lamp (2) does not light up after the engine has been switched off.

94

Pos: 100.50.24 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Ladekontrollleuchte_ Störung, Ursache, Behebung_Caterpillar @ 147\mod_1361199189247_78.docx @ 1320885 @ @ 1

Malfunction

After starting the engine, the charge indicator lamp (12V) still lights up after 2 seconds.

Cabin

Cause, remedy

The connection cable to the three-phase generator (12V) is loose.

• Tighten the cable connections firmly.

The V-belt on the three-phase generator is loose.

• Tighten the V-belt.

The three-phase generator is defective.

Have the three-phase generator replaced by a specialist workshop.

The charge indicator lamp

(24V) lights up continuously after starting the engine.

Regeneration deactivated

Regeneration active

The connection cable to the three-phase generator (24V) is loose.

• Tighten the cable connections firmly.

The V-belt on the three-phase generator is loose.

• Tighten the V-belt.

The three-phase generator is defective.

Have the three-phase generator replaced by a specialist workshop.

Pos: 100.50.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten Teil3 Störleuchten Motorfehler BM420/500 und BiG X @ 115\mod_1339684399818_78.docx @ 1012501 @ @ 1

Fault indicator lamp red (engine fault) Stop immediately!

Inform the KRONE dealer or the KRONE customer service

Fault indicator lamp yellow (engine fault)

Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible

Pos: 100.50.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung InfobereicheInfobereich Motordaten Teil3 DPF-Leuchten (Dieselpartikelfilter) BM420 @ 356\mod_1438694671007_78.docx @ 2654309 @ @ 1

Diesel particulate filter lamps

Regeneration required

The lamp lights up when regeneration is required and the soot content has reached 80%.

The lamp lights up when regeneration has been deactivated manually.

The lamp lights up when regeneration is active. It will go out when regeneration is complete.

Pos: 100.50.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

95

Cabin

Pos: 100.50.28 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zündschloss BM 420/500 @ 147\mod_1361177933788_78.docx @ 1318972 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.2 Ignition lock

1

BM 400 0142

Fig. 59

The ignition lock (1) has four positions:

0 - Off

I - Electric circuit for electronics is switched on

Pos: 100.50.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

II The ignition is switched on

III -Start position

96

Pos: 100.50.30 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose @ 42\mod_1272437710878_78.docx @ 377567 @ 3 @ 1

7.15.3 Cigarette lighter / 12-V socket

Pos: 100.50.31 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Achtung (2012-08-06 16:37:09) @ 42\mod_1272438967737_78.docx @ 377642 @ @ 1

Caution! - Hot cigarette lighter!

Effect: Burns

• Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by the handle.

• Never hold onto the cigarette lighter (1) when it is pushed in.

Pos: 100.50.32 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Bild BM 420_Caterpillar @ 147\mod_1361192374198_78.docx @ 1320255 @ @ 1

2

Cabin

1

3

BM 400 0143

Fig. 60

Pos: 100.50.33 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Zigarettenanzünder / 12 V Steckdose Text @ 0\mod_1195725058068_78.docx @ 2355 @ @ 1

Press the cigarette lighter (1) in; when the required temperature is reached the insert will come out by itself.

The socket (2) can be used to connect other power consumers with 12 volts and a maximum of

10 amperes. When the engine has been switched off, the battery will be discharged. Use the specified plug to connect accessory units.

Pos: 100.50.34 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Steckdose 12 V Hinweis BM 420/500 @ 42\mod_1272440213768_78.docx @ 377745 @ @ 1

Note

An additional 12-V socket is located in the driver’s cab on the right next to the passenger seat facing in the direction of travel.

Pos: 100.50.35 /BA/Kabine/Diagnosestecker (ISO-Bus) @ 83\mod_1317733119227_78.docx @ 730585 @ 2 @ 1

7.16 Diagnostics Socket (ISO-Bus)

Note

Pos: 100.50.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

A diagnostics socket (3) (ISO-Bus) is located additionally in direction of travel right next to the passenger seat.

97

Cabin

Pos: 100.50.37 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Diagnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271765654040_78.docx @ 372900 @ 3 @ 1

7.16.1 Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection

Fig. 61

• CAN interface (1)

• USB connection (2)

Pos: 100.50.38 /BA/Kabine/Schalterkonsole/Hinweis CAN-Diagnosesteckdose / USB-Anschluss Anbringungsort @ 41\mod_1271762668461_78.docx @ 372652 @ @ 1

Pos: 100.51 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The CAN diagnostics socket and USB port are located between the driver's seat and the switch panel.

98

Pos: 100.52 /Layout Module /Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.docx @ 54443 @ @ 1

This page has been left blank deliberately.

Pos: 100.53 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Cabin

99

Cabin

Pos: 100.54.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMultifunktionshebel @ 184\mod_1378997406387_78.docx @ 1587556 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 100.54.2 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Nur im Feldbetrieb @ 184\mod_1378997469830_78.docx @ 1587584 @ @ 1

In field mode only

Pos: 100.54.3 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel BM 420/500 NEU Teil 1 Bild @ 184\mod_1378997526285_78.docx @ 1587612 @ @ 1

2

3

1

16

24

10

4

5

25

11

9

15

8

12

6

7

19

20

21

Pos: 100.54.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 62

13 14

17

22

23

18a 18b

BM 500 0107

100

Pos: 100.54.5 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel BM 420 NEU Teil 1 Tabelle @ 184\mod_1378902502789_78.docx @ 1582635 @ @ 1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Switching off all mowing unit drives

Bringing up pre-setting “I” cutting height (option)

Bringing up pre-setting “II” cutting height (option)

Folding down / lowering mowing unit left

Hold down the “12” key to switch from transport position to headland position.

Lower from headland position to working position without “12” key.

Folding up / lifting mowing unit left

Hold down the “12” key and fold up from headland position to transport position

Lift from working position to headland position without “12” key.

Folding down /lowering mowing unit right:

Hold down the “12” key to switch from transport position to headland position.

Lower from headland position to working position without “12” key.

Folding up / lifting mowing unit right:

Hold down the “12” key and fold up from headland position to transport position

Lift from working position to headland position without “12” key.

Lifting front mowing unit (headland position = transport position)

9 Folding up both lateral mowing units at the same time

Hold down the “12” key and fold up from headland position to transport position

Lifting all the mowing units

Lift from working position to headland position without “12” key.

10 Folding down both lateral mowing units at the same time

Hold down the “12” key to switch from transport position to headland position.

Lowering all the mowing units

Lower from headland position to working position without “12” key.

Pos: 100.54.6 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE AusführungMultifunktionshebel BM 420 NEU Teil 2 @ 456\mod_1464614287447_78.docx @ 3088832 @ @ 1

11 Lower front mounted mower

12 Additional function for keys "4 to 11"

Cabin

14 not assigned

15 Activation key for automatic steering system (optional)

17 Additional function: mowers release

18a Activation key for SectionControl (optional)

18b Deactivation key for SectionControl (optional)

19 Increase engine speed by holding down the button until the rated speed is reached

20 Change from rated speed to idle speed and vice versa

21 Reduce engine speed by holding down the button until the idle speed is reached

23 Cross actuating lever

24 Levelling system right (optional)

25 Levelling system left (optional)

Pos: 100.54.7 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Hinweis die Tasten (5,7 und 8) haben 2 Schaltstufen. @ 346\mod_1434953803267_78.docx @ 2610856 @ @ 1

Note

The keys (5, 7 and 8) have two shift steps, key (9) can optionally be equipped with two shift steps, as well.

• By pressing a key to the first shift step, the mower is raised incrementally (as long as the key is held down) from working position to headland position.

Pos: 100.54.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• By pressing a key once to the second shift step, the mower is raised automatically from working position into headland position.

101

Cabin

Pos: 100.54.9 /BA/Kabine/Multifunktionshebel BiGM/NEUE Ausführung/Multifunktionshebel BM 420/500 Fortsetzung @ 41\mod_1271256276293_78.docx @ 369225 @ 34 @ 1

7.17.1 Multi-Function Lever (Continued)

7.17.1.1 Driving

E F

D G

H

J

K

L

M

15

16

A

B

C

BM 500 0108

Pos: 100.55 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.63

15 Actuation key for travelling gear

16 Selector switch for acceleration ramp

A Acceleration (in forward travel) / Deceleration (in reverse) / Start travelling gear with actuation key (15) pressed

B - Multi-function lever – central position

C - Acceleration (in reverse) / Deceleration (in forward travel) / Start travelling gear with actuation key (15) pressed

D - Deceleration to 0 km/h / Fast reversing with actuation key (15) pressed (in field operation only)

E - Multi-function lever – central position

F - Switch on cruise control / Save current speed for cruise control – press activation key (15) and rotate multi-function lever in direction F

G - Without (17) key pressed, switch off left mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on left mower drive

H - Central position

J - Without (17) key pressed, switch off right mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on right mower drive

K - Without (17) key pressed, switch off front mower drive / with (17) key pressed, switch on front mower drive

L - Central position

M - Without (17) key pressed, switch off all mower drives / with (17) key pressed, switch on all mower drives

102

Pos: 100.56.1 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Klimatronik / Heizung Übersicht (2012-08-09 09:35:28) @ 0\mod_1195728661475_78.docx @ 2453 @ 23 @ 1

7.18

7.18.1

Klimatronik / heating

Control and display elements

Cabin

The Klimatronik is a control unit for air conditioning and heating systems in modern vehicle cabs. The driver’s work is made easier through clear, intuitive control of all tasks and optimum climate control in the driver’s cab.

Note

If the electrical power supply to the control unit is interrupted, the control unit automatically performs a self test after power is restored. After the self test is complete, the last setting to be saved appears.

Fig. 64

Key function key

1

Key to switch air conditioning on and off

2

Key to adjust the desired cab temperature upward.

Alternative: Manual settings "Up"

3

Key to adjust the desired cab temperature downward.

Alternative: Manual settings "Down"

4

Key to switch the controller on and off

5

Key to switch the evaporator fan speed Manual / Automatic

6

Key to switch REHEAT mode on and off (demoisturising the cab air)

7

Covered key to switch the temperature display to ° Fahrenheit

103

Cabin

LCD function of LCD display

Pos: 100.56.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 65

8

Icon indicates REHEAT mode

9

Icon indicates air conditioning

10

Icon indicates fully automatic mode is turned on

11

Bar indicates fan speed in manual mode

12

Icon indicates manual fan mode

13

4-place seven segment display shows setpoint value or error code

14

Icon indicates unit of measure for temperature (°)

15

Indicates the icon for vehicle cab

104

Pos: 100.56.3 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Anlage einschalten (2012-08-09 09:42:21) @ 0\mod_1195729216365_78.docx @ 2491 @ 33 @ 1

7.18.2 Operation

7.18.3 Switching on the System

Cabin

Fig. 66

Press the key

Note

After the system is switched on, the control unit performs a self test and the software version is displayed for about 5 seconds.

Then the operating hours of the air conditioning system are displayed for 5 seconds (for example 6 operating hours).

Then the last saved setting appears in the display.

Pos: 100.56.4 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Einstellen der gewünschten Kabinentemperatur @ 0\mod_1195729761475_78.docx @ 2510 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.4 Setting the Desired Cab Temperature

Fig. 67

The set cab temperature is shown in °C, for example 26°C. The control unit is in Automatic mode.

Pos: 100.56.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

To lower the desired cab temperature to 21°C, for example, press the value appears in the display. (press key 5 x) key until the desired

105

Cabin

Pos: 100.56.6 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Klimabetrieb Ein- / Ausschalten @ 0\mod_1195730018068_78.docx @ 2529 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.5 Switch air conditioning On / Off

Fig. 68

You can switch on the air conditioning with the key.

Air conditioning is now turned on; icon indicates air conditioning.

The compressor is turned on by the control unit if necessary.

Pos: 100.56.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pressing the icon disappears.

key again turns off air conditioning (compressor is deactivated). The

106

Pos: 100.56.8 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/REHEAT - Betrieb Ein- / Ausschalten @ 348\mod_1435824868528_78.docx @ 2620381 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.6 Switching REHEAT Mode On/Off

Cabin

Fig. 69

REHEAT mode = (demoisturize cabin air)

Switching on the REHEAT mode:

key.

The icon shows REHEAT mode in the display.

In REHEAT mode:

• The compressor is permanently switched on to demoisturize cabin air.

• The evaporator fan speed is 100%.

• The evaporator fan speed can be reduced manually (refer to chapter “Manual Setting of

Evaporator Fan Speed”).

• The control unit switches heating on if necessary. This prevents that the cabin temperature is changed.

REHEAT mode is automatically limited to 60 minutes.

Switching off REHEAT mode:

• Press key again.

Pos: 100.56.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The REHEAT mode is switched off. The icon will no longer be displayed.

107

Cabin

Pos: 100.56.10 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Manuelles Einstellen der Verdampferlüfterdrehzahl (2012-08-09 09:53:31) @ 0\mod_1195733653506_78.docx @ 2567 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.7 Manual setting of evaporator fan speed

Fig. 70

Switch on manual evaporator fan speed with the key.

The manual setting for fan speed is now active. The currently set fan speed appears in bar display (full bar display = 100%). The AUTO icon no longer appears.

Fan flashes for 5 seconds. During this time the fan speed can be increased with the key or lowered with the key in increments of 10%.

Note

The lowest fan speed that can be set is 30% (three bars are displayed).

Pos: 100.56.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Pressing the key twice reactivates AUTO mode. The Auto icon appears ; the

icons are no longer displayed.

and

108

Pos: 100.56.12 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Umschalten der Temperaturanzeige in ° Fahrenheit @ 0\mod_1195734049209_78.docx @ 2586 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.8 Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit

8

Cabin

Fig. 71

The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Celsius.

Press and hold the covered key (8) and press the

Fahrenheit.

key as well. The display switches to °

The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Fahrenheit.

Pressing the (8) key and

Pos: 100.56.13 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Anzeige von Störungen im Display (2012-08-09 10:00:52) @ 0\mod_1195734281959_78.docx @ 2605 @ 3 @ 1

7.18.9

key again switches the display back to ° Celsius.

Showing Faults in the Display

Error code (F0)´

Fig. 72

Error in room temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator ( F0 ).

Note

The control unit has recorded an error in the room temperature sensor. Controller is no longer ready for operation.

Cause of sensor fault:

Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit , temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

Note

If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

109

Cabin

Error code (FI)

Fig 73

Error in blow-out temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F1).

Note

The control unit has recorded an error in the blow-out temperature sensor. The control is no longer ready for operation.

Cause of sensor fault:

Short circuit or interruption in sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit , temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

Pos: 100.57 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting that was valid before the fault was recorded.

110

Pos: 100.58 /BA/Kabine/Klimaanlage/Heizung/Verstellbare Lüfterdüsen BM 420/500 (2012-08-09 10:14:03) @ 42\mod_1272517641193_78.docx @ 378245 @ 2 @ 1

7.19 Adjustable Fan Nozzles

1

1

1

3

Pos: 100.59 /BA/Kabine/Radioeinbau (2012-08-09 10:16:20) @ 0\mod_1195735722428_78.docx @ 2644 @ 2 @ 1

Fig.74

Fan nozzles (1), adjustable

Note

Set the fan nozzles in such a way that the panes do not mist up.

7.20 Radio

1

Cabin

1

BM 500 0184

BM 400 0215

Pos: 101 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 75:

1

ISO compartment for radio

Note

Telephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functional troubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of the vehicle.

111

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Info-Center „EasyTouch“ @ 0\mod_1195737815318_78.docx @ 2663 @ 1 @ 1

8

Pos: 102.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Übersicht @ 0\mod_1195651857513_78.docx @ 1671 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

8.1.1 Overview

Pos: 102.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Info-Center Easy Touch Übersicht @ 149\mod_1361778360457_78.docx @ 1335125 @ @ 1

I

II

III

V

IV

Fig. 76

• I = Display

• II = Keys

• III = Keys

1 to

8

(1 - 8)

to D

D

(A - D)

Pos: 102.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• V = Menu key

BM 420 0159

112

Pos: 102.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Allgemeine Beschreibung der Tasten_Drehpoti_Menütaste @ 0\mod_1195738501881_78.docx @ 2701 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

2

1

Pos: 102.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 77

The Info Centre informs you about the current actions and the current operating condition of the machine. You can use the Info Centre to make settings for the machine and start or stop actions. Its main components are:

Keys 1-8

Keys 1-8 are used to activate the softkeys located in the right column (IV). For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey next to the key, it has no function.

Keys A-D

The keys A-D are used to activate the softkeys located in the line just above them (V). For the assignment of the keys, see the illustration. If there is no softkey above the key it has no function.

Rotary potentiometer (1)

The rotary potentiometer has two functions:

1

The rotary potentiometer can be turned to change settings and to select the desired menu in the menu level.

2

Pressing the rotary potentiometer activates and saves the settings.

Menu key (2)

You can use the key with the rotary potentiometer to call or close the menu level or to go to the preceding menu level. Holding the key down slightly longer takes you back to the basic screen.

1

113

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.7.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Display Beschreibung @ 0\mod_1195739127068_78.docx @ 2740 @ @ 1

I

II III IV

5 6

VI

7 8

V

B C D BM 400 0114

Fig. 78

Display (screen display)

The display is divided up into the following sections:

Status line (I):

• Time, number of errors, status display of mowing units

Information section:

• Engine information (II)

• Travelling gear information (III)

• Settings (IV and V)

• Drive information (VI) (only in Field mode basic screen)

Pos: 102.7.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung InfobereicheInformationsbereich BiG M 420 Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358151786495_78.docx @ 1266739 @ 2 @ 1

8.2 Information Section

Basic screen road travel Basic screen field mode

100

75

50

25

0

100

75

50

25

0

Pos: 102.7.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 79

After the ignition is switched on, depending on the position of the "Road / Field" release switch, the basic screen "Road Travel" or "Field Mode" appears in the display.

114

Pos: 102.7.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Statuszeile Text BiG M 420/500 @ 269\mod_1401962457652_78.docx @ 2036442 @ @ 1

Symbol Designation

Error

Error central lubrication system

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Description

– At least one error has occurred.

You can find the number of the present errors in front of the symbol.

– For error remedy, refer to operating instructions of central lubrication system.

Pos: 102.7.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Statuszeile Tabelle BiG M 420 @ 270\mod_1402050620751_78.docx @ 2037801 @ @ 1

Headland Position

Lateral mowing unit left

Front mowing unit Lateral mowing unit right

Drive off drive on Drive off drive on Drive off drive on

Working position

Folded up

Pos: 102.7.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

115

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.7.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten BiG M 420 Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358152086675_78.docx @ 1266768 @ 3 @ 1

8.2.1 Motor Data (II) Information Section

UPM

II 1080

0

100

75

50

25

0

20 40

R

60 80 110

70°C

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 103 0

Fig.80

1080

Road mode: 850 - 1650 rpm

Field mode: 850 - 1900 rpm

0 20 40 60 80 110

Engine capacity as %

Pos: 102.7.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten Teil3 Störleuchten Motorfehler BM420/500 und BiG X @ 115\mod_1339684399818_78.docx @ 1012501 @ @ 1

Fault indicator lamp red (engine fault) Stop immediately!

Inform the KRONE dealer or the KRONE customer service

Fault indicator lamp yellow (engine fault)

Consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible

Pos: 102.7.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten Teil3 DPF-Leuchten (Dieselpartikelfilter) BM420 @ 356\mod_1438694671007_78.docx @ 2654309 @ @ 1

Diesel particulate filter lamps

Regeneration required

Regeneration deactivated

The lamp lights up when regeneration is required and the soot content has reached 80%.

The lamp lights up when regeneration has been deactivated manually.

Regeneration active

The lamp lights up when regeneration is active. It will go out when regeneration is complete.

Pos: 102.7.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Motordaten Teil2 Störleuchten Kühlwsser / Tankanzeige BM420 Caterplillar @ 152\mod_1362648235353_78.docx @ 1354862 @ @ 1

Cooling water temperature display.

Pos: 102.7.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cooling water temperature display temperature reaches the critical range.

R changes to yellow if the cooling water

Fuel gauge

Diesel fuel reserve display (appears in the display if the tank contains less than 10 per cent of the diesel fuel)

116

Pos: 102.7.12.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III) Bild BM 400 @ 29\mod_1251200813705_78.docx @ 281322 @ 3 @ 1

8.2.2 Information section of the travelling gear data (III)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

III

0.0

4

0.0

N km/h

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0116

Fig. 81

Pos: 102.7.12.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Tempomat @ 29\mod_1251199726596_78.docx @ 281172 @ @ 1

Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the saved speed for Cruise control operation in km/h.

Pos: 102.7.12.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Fahrgeschwindigkeit @ 29\mod_1251199875752_78.docx @ 281197 @ @ 1

Travelling speed

Road mode: 0 - 40 km/h

Pos: 102.7.12.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Beschleunigungsrampe @ 29\mod_1251199880768_78.docx @ 281222 @ @ 1

Acceleration ramp

Cruise control inactive

Field mode: 0 - 19 km/h

1 = Lowest acceleration ramp

Pos: 102.7.12.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Fahrtrichtung @ 29\mod_1251199885768_78.docx @ 281247 @ @ 1

Direction of travel

2 = ... 3 = ... = Highest acceleration ramp

= Forward travel

Pos: 102.7.12.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Antriebsart @ 29\mod_1251199893346_78.docx @ 281272 @ @ 1

Type of drive

= Neutral (stopped) = Reverse travel

Pos: 102.7.12.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Axle sep. active

(only possible in Field mode)

Parking brake is applied

Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if there are serious drive problems.

117

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.7.12.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Bergab - Modus @ 70\mod_1305726024726_78.docx @ 639629 @ @ 1

Downhill mode

Pos: 102.7.12.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/Autopilot @ 142\mod_1358153665545_78.docx @ 1266914 @ @ 1

The downhill mode symbol indicates to the driver that the speed of the machine is automatically restricted when travelling downhill.

Autopilot (Optionally Only in Field Mode)

Autopilot active Autopilot ready

Pos: 102.7.12.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Fahrantriebsdaten (III)/SectionControl @ 456\mod_1464614822999_78.docx @ 3088924 @ @ 1

SectionControl (optional only in field mode)

Autopilot inactive

Pos: 102.7.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

SectionControl active SectionControl ready SectionControl inactive

SectionControl error

118

Pos: 102.7.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Einstellungen @ 0\mod_1195800021723_78.docx @ 2862 @ 3 @ 1

8.2.3 Information section of settings (IV and V)

I

II III IV

5 6

VI

V

B C

Fig. 82

(see Chapter "Settings").

Pos: 102.7.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Beschreibung Infobereiche/Infobereich Antriebsdaten BiG M 420 @ 131\mod_1348472047808_78.docx @ 1165776 @ 3 @ 1

8.2.4

D

7 8

BM 400 0114

Information Section Drive Information (VI)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

VI

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0092

Fig. 83

Drive information appears only in the "Field Mode" basic screen.

970 rpm

Speed drive left

1070 rpm

Speed drive front

970 rpm

Speed drive right

970 rpm

Pos: 102.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Speed of left auger Speed of right auger

970 rpm

119

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Schnellzugrifftasten am Grundbild @ 0\mod_1195803032020_78.docx @ 2907 @ 2 @ 1

8.3 Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen

The quick access keys can be used to perform functions directly from the basic screen or to bring up the appropriate submenu.

Pos: 102.9.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe Seite 1/2 Bild BiG M 420 Caterpillar @ 356\mod_1438692047381_78.docx @ 2653880 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.1 Quick Access “Hydraulically Adjustable Cutting Height” (optional)

Fig. 84

Pos: 102.9.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe Seite 1/2 Text BiG M 420/500 @ 57\mod_1296204792046_78.docx @ 549897 @ @ 1

Appears only in basic screen "Field mode".

• Press the key or to display the hydraulically adjustable cutting height.

Submenu "Hydraulically adjustable cutting height" appears.

1.

= saved pre-set values

2. = saved pre-set values

3. = current cutting height values

You can use the

A and B

B keys to save pre-settings for cutting height.

= Save pre-set 1 cutting height

= Save pre-set 2 cutting height

Pos: 102.9.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

120

Pos: 102.9.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe Seite 2/2 BiG M 500 @ 81\mod_1316168422535_78.docx @ 715843 @ @ 1

Activating keys 1-8 sets the angle of the mowing units.

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 85

Inclination Mowing units lateral left

Front mowing unit

Lateral mowing units right

Mowing unit all reduce

Key 5 Key Key Key 7 increase

Key 6 Key Key Key

Note

If all mowing units are selected, the angle of the front mowing unit is set first. Then the lateral mowing units are automatically adjusted to the value of the front mowing unit.

• Press the key D to display the basic screen.

Pos: 102.9.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

121

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T1 BM400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093469796_78.docx @ 477992 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.2 Quick access "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" (ground pressure)

(optional)

Appears only in basic screen "Field mode"

Lateral spring compensation can be used to adjust the ground pressure of the lateral mowing units to local conditions. In order to protect the sward, the load on the lateral mowing units must be relieved so that they do not jump when mowing, yet do not leave any brush marks on the ground.

Note

To set the pressure, lower both lateral mowing units to the ground and set the front axle to working position.

Pos: 102.9.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T2 Bild BM 420 Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358157272605_78.docx @ 1267180 @ @ 1

Fig. 86

Pos: 102.9.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T3 BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288093474375_78.docx @ 478018 @ @ 1 the 5 compensation.

5 or 6

6 key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral spring

Submenu "Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation" appears.

(1) = saved values of pre-setting I

(2) = saved values of pre-setting II

(3) = current values of spring compensation

You can use the

A and B

B keys to save pre-settings (I and II) for hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation (ground pressure).

I = Save pre-setting I

II = Save pre-setting II the 7 key for

Pos: 102.9.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Activating key for

brings up pre-setting (I).

brings up pre-setting (II).

122

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulisch einstellbare seitliche Federentlastung T4 BM 400/420 @ 274\mod_1404283222140_78.docx @ 2062395 @ @ 1

Note

Different lateral mower weights for mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping

(BSS) Effect: Different group pressure.

With option "Mowing units with roller conditioner and swath grouping", the weight of the right mowing unit is greater than the weight of the left mowing unit. This is caused by the movement of the drive. Accordingly the compensation pressure must be set about 5 bar higher for the right mowing unit.

Fig. 87:

Activating keys 1-4 increases or reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing units.

Pressure Mowing units lateral left Mowing units lateral right reduce

Key Key increase

Key

Pos: 102.9.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

High compensation pressure =

Lower compensation pressure =

Key lower ground pressure higher ground pressure

123

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Schnellzugriff zum Menü Dieselpartikelfilter BM 420 Caterpillar @ 356\mod_1438682935891_78.docx @ 2652779 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.3 Quick Access “Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter”

Fig. 88

Quick access key to bring up “Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter“. Appears in the

“Road Mode and Field Mode” basic screen

• To bring up “Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter” menu level, press key 7 or 8 for softkey .

The sub-menu „Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter“ is displayed.

Note

For further information, please refer to chapter „Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter“

Pos: 102.9.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-6/Menü 3-6 Dieselpartikelfilter regenerieren/Dieselpartikelfilter manuell regenerieren @ 356\mod_1438693566002_78.docx @ 2654067 @ @ 1

Manually regenerating diesel particulate filter

• Press key

Pos: 102.9.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-6/Menü 3-6 Dieselpartikelfilter regenerieren/Dieselpartikelfilter manuell deaktivieren @ 356\mod_1438693604075_78.docx @ 2654218 @ @ 1

or for softkey to start regeneration.

Manually deactivating diesel particulate filter

• Press key 5 or 6 for softkey to deactivate regeneration.

If regeneration is deactivated, the ECM does not initiate any regeneration until the driver starts regeneration manually or the machine is restarted.

Then the ECM initiates the regeneration again automatically. the D key to bring up the basic screen.

Pos: 102.9.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press menu key on the rotary potentiometer to go back one menu level.

124

Pos: 102.9.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundendaten-Zähler @ 274\mod_1404283801560_78.docx @ 2062594 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.4 Quick Access „Customer Data Counter“

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 89

Appears in the basic screen “Road Operation and Field Mode”

• Press B key under the softkey

Customer data counter

Designation

1

2

Counter stopped

for bringing up the customer counter

A counter is activated

3 Counter (active counters are highlighted in colour)

Operating hours counter (h)

Working hours counter (h)

Odometer (km)

Surface counter ha Surface in hectares

Øha / h Average surface hectares per hour

Fuel consumption

L/h

Ø L/ha

Current average consumption

Current average consumption per hectare

4

10

4.1

4.2

Display information of the currently active counter

Display of the activated customer counter (for example Client 1)

Selected surface counter

Counter stopped

A counter is activated

Freely usable numeric input field (for example to assign several different cultivated areas to the customer record)

125

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Kundendatensatz (1) ändern bzw. neuanlegen @ 291\mod_1410761146365_78.docx @ 2297135 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.5 Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one

5 6

1

7 8

2

B C D

BM4000109_2

Fig. 90

A total of 30 customer records can be created. Select the customer record you want to modify; select a free customer record to create a new entry with the and keys.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an alphanumeric input field.

• You can change the customer record or enter a new one with the rotary potentiometer. (To accept the desired alphanumeric value, press the rotary potentiometer.)

Note

Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and confirming causes the program to exit the input field without saving the entries or changes. Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming causes the program to accept and save the entry or change. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

Pos: 102.9.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

126

Pos: 102.9.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Zähler ein- bzw. ausschalten @ 274\mod_1404292575380_78.docx @ 2063551 @ 4 @ 1

8.3.5.1 Switching the counter on or off

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 91 the 5 and 6 keys to turn the counter on the B key brings up the basic screen.

and off .

Pos: 102.9.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

127

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Nutzfläche eines Kundenzählers löschen @ 274\mod_1404291551680_78.docx @ 2063401 @ 4 @ 1

8.3.5.2 Selecting / Deleting the Area(s) of a Customer Counter

1

3

Fig. 92

It is possible to assign up to 10 areas to each customer counter. However, it is also possible to select just one area. The counters shown in (3) are assigned to the selected area.

You can either delete individual areas or all areas of a customer counter. When deleting the area, all counters displayed in (3) are reset to zero.

Pos: 102.9.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Nutzfläche für einen Kundensatz zuordnen bzw. auswählen @ 175\mod_1372325259523_78.docx @ 1499449 @ @ 1

Assigning or selecting the area for a customer record

The selection of the right customer record is a prerequisite for this.

• Press

Pos: 102.9.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Einzelne Nutzflächen eines Kundenzählers löschen @ 175\mod_1372324988934_78.docx @ 1499421 @ @ 1

or key until the area appears in the input field (1).

Deleting single areas of a customer counter

A prerequisite for this is that the right customer record is selected.

• Press or key until the area to be deleted appears in the input field (1).

• Press C appears.

key under the softkey to delete the area, an information message “Delete?”

• Press key under the softkey to confirm the deletion process.

• Press B key under the softkey to cancel the deletion process.

Pos: 102.9.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Repeat deletion of the counters for each created area, if necessary.

128

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Alle Nutzflächen eines Kundenzählers löschen @ 175\mod_1372324755685_78.docx @ 1499393 @ @ 1

Deleting all areas of a customer counter

A prerequisite for this is that the right customer record is selected.

• Press or key until the sigma sign ( ) appears in the input field (1).

• To delete all areas, press all areas?” appears.

C key under the softkey , an information message “Delete

• Press key under the softkey to confirm the deletion process.

• Press B

Pos: 102.9.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Wechseln zu den allgemeinen Zähler (Maschinendaten-Zähler) @ 29\mod_1251278517328_78.docx @ 282578 @ 4 @ 1

key under the softkey to cancel the deletion process.

8.3.5.3 Switching to General Counters (Machine Data Counters) the key under the softkey brings up the "Counters and machine data"

Pos: 102.9.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 menu.

For more information see Section "Counters and Machine Data"

129

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulische Achsfederung Straßenfahrt BM 420 Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358166057496_78.docx @ 1267455 @ 34 @ 1

8.3.6

8.3.6.1

Quick access "Hydraulic axle suspension"

From the "Road travel" basic screen

Pos: 102.9.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 93

When travelling on public roads, the front axle must be lowered to reach a transport height of max. 4 m. the C key lowers axle suspension with inching.

130

Pos: 102.9.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulische Achsfederung Grundbild Bild BM 420 Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358166179228_78.docx @ 1267484 @ 4 @ 1

8.3.6.2 From the "Field mode" basic screen

100

75

50

25

0

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 94

Pos: 102.9.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Schnellzugrifftasten/Hydraulische Achsfederung Grundbild Text BM 400/420 @ 51\mod_1288095723421_78.docx @ 478122 @ @ 1 the C key brings up the "Hydraulic axle suspension" submenu.

The "Hydraulic axle suspension" menu appears.

• Activating or key for lifting axle suspension. (inching)

• Activating or key to the 5 or 6 key for

approaching mowing position. (inching)

lowering axle suspension. (inching)

= Sensor B20 axle suspension

= Sensor alive (axle suspension is located under the working position)

= Sensor not alive (axle suspension is located above the working position) the D key brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 102.9.34 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

131

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.9.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/SchnellzugrifftastenEinstellungen Maschine BM 420 Caterpillar @ 504\mod_1498207898098_78.docx @ 3472216 @ 3 @ 1

8.3.7 Quick access "Machine settings"

Fig. 95

Appears in basic screen "Road mode and field mode" the D key brings up menu level "Machine setting".

The "Machine settings" menu appears.

Note

Pos: 102.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

For more information, see chapter "Machine settings"

132

Pos: 102.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMenüebene @ 80\mod_1315900872940_78.docx @ 708317 @ 2 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüebene Kurzüberblick Big M 420 Caterpillar @ 175\mod_1372246274420_78.docx @ 1497668 @ @ 1

Short Overview

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

1

Settings

1-1

Parameter

1-1-1

Work

1-2

Setting Machine

1-3

Units

1-4

Language

1-5

Display

1-5-4

Direction of Rotation

1-5-5

Configuring Status Line

1-6

Date/Time

1-9

Address Owner

1-5-1

Contrast

1-5-2

Beeper

133

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

2

Counters

3

Maintenance

3-1

Calibrating Cutting Height

3-3

Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System (only accessible for technicians)

3-5

Manual Mode (only accessible for technicians)

3-6

Regenerating Diesel Particle Filter (DPF)

4

Service

4-1

Diagnostics

4-1-1

Front Axle

4-1-3

Spring Compensation Optional

4-1-4

Cutting Height Optional

4-1-5

Swath Hood Optional

4-1-6

Sideshift Optional

4-1-7

Front Guard Flaps Optional

134

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

4-1-9

ISOBUS Steering System

4-1-10

Work

4-1-11

CAN Bus

4-1-12

Traction Drive

4-1-13

Electronics

4-1-14

Diesel Engine

4-1-15

Multi-Function Lever

4-1-16

Control Unit Console

4-1-17

Terminal

135

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Short Overview

Main Menu Sub-Menu Sub-Menu Designation

4-2

1

2

: n

Error List

4-3

Fitter's Section

4-4

Information

5

4-4-1

Joystick

4-4-2

Software

4-4-3

Machine

4-4-8

Display Software Packages

Basic Screen

Pos: 102.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

136

Pos: 102.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüebene aufrufen @ 0\mod_1196058555821_78.docx @ 3161 @ 3 @ 1

8.4.1 Bringing up a Menu Level

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 96

• You can bring up a menu level with the

The display indicates the menu level.

The menu level is divided into five main menus: key on the rotary potentiometer.

= Main menu 1 "Settings"

= Main menu 2 "Counters"

= Main menu 3 "Maintenance"

= Main menu 4 "Service"

= Main menu 5 "Basic screen"

Pos: 102.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• You can close the menu level that was called with on the rotary potentiometer.

137

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.16.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Hauptmenü 1 „Einstellungen“ @ 89\mod_1322031869516_78.docx @ 757694 @ 2 @ 1

8.5 Main menu 1 "Settings"

Pos: 102.16.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 97

The main menu level is active.

• Select main menu 1 with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The display shows menu level 1 "Settings".

The main menu, "Settings", is divided into the following menus:

= Menu 1-1 "Parameters"

= Menu 1-2 "Machine setting"

= Menu 1-3 "Units"

= Menu 1-4 "Language"

= Menu 1-5 "Display"

= Menu 1-6 "Date/time"

= Menu 1-9 "Owner's address" the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

138

Pos: 102.16.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500/Menü 1-1 Parameter BiG M 400 @ 9\mod_1219816874593_78.docx @ 122840 @ 2 @ 1

8.6 Menu 1-1 "Parameters"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0019_1

Fig. 98:

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-1 "Parameters" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display indicates the menu level "Parameters".

The "Parameter" menu is divided into two sub-menus:

Pos: 102.16.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

= Menu 1-1-10 "Work parameters"

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired menu.

Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the parameters of the selected menu to be displayed or the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

139

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.16.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-1 Parameter Big M 400 / 500Eingabe von Parametern @ 509\mod_1501596909034_78.docx @ 3495646 @ 3 @ 1

8.6.1 Entering parameters

Fig. 99

Note

As long as data is being read, the current process can be stopped by pressing the key next to the softkey.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• When you press the rotary potentiometer, you exit the input field and the value that was entered is applied.

Note

To apply the default setting values, press the 5 key next to the softkey.

• To jump back to the screen that was previously displayed, press the 7 key next to the softkey.

Pos: 102.16.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

140

Pos: 102.16.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Einstellung Maschine BM 420 @ 274\mod_1404369456555_78.docx @ 2065523 @ 2 @ 1

8.7 Menu 1-2 „Machine Setting“

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 100

Main menu 1 “Settings” is displayed.

• Select menu 1-3 “Machine Setting” with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level "Machine Setting".

The “Machine Setting” menu is divided into 2 pages:

Pos: 102.16.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüerkärung für Seite 1 bis 3 @ 51\mod_1288099830734_78.docx @ 478252 @ @ 1

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 3:

Pos: 102.16.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Menüerkärung Tasten Einstellung Maschine @ 28\mod_1250603053175_78.docx @ 275901 @ @ 1 the B key to bring up the previous page of the "Machine setting" menu. the C key to bring up the next page of the "Machine setting" menu. the D key brings up the basic screen.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The selection box is highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box

Pos: 102.16.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

141

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.16.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Einstellmöglichkeiten (Seite1/3) @ 51\mod_1288102051312_78.docx @ 478382 @ @ 1

Setting options (page 1/3)

Pos: 102.16.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 1a) BiG M 420 @ 274\mod_1404371138407_78.docx @ 2065775 @ @ 1

Fig. 101

1) Selection between and

CV = tines conditioner

CRI= roller conditioner

2) Setting for lifting mechanism, front axle on headland

Front axle can only be raised in manual mode.

Semi

The semi-automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating position as soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected.

Auto

Pos: 102.16.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The automatic lifting mechanism moves the front axle into the operating position,

• as soon as at least one mowing unit drive is connected or

• as soon as a mowing unit is lowered from the headland position into the operating position. In addition, the automatic lifting mechanism lifts the front axle again as soon as the “Lifting all Mowing Units" function is actuated on the multi-function lever.

142

Pos: 102.16.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 1b/3) BiG M 400 Einstellung Federentlastung (3)_Überschnitt einstellen (4) @ 279\mod_1405346789463_78.docx @ 2149975 @ @ 1

CV

50

cm

Semi

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 102

3) Setting spring compensation (optional)

Hydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched on.

Hydraulically adjustable spring compensation switched off.

4) Adjusting the overcut in cm / inch

Pos: 102.16.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 1b/3) BiG M 400 Auswahl von Mähwerks- Zusatzausrüstungen (optional) (5) @ 174\mod_1371189296325_78.docx @ 1486835 @ @ 1

5) Selection of mowing unit additional equipment (optional)

Both augers selected

Only right hand auger selected

Only left hand auger selected

No auger selected

Hay hood selected

Pos: 102.16.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 1b/3) BiG M 400 Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe ein-/ausschalten (optional) (6) @ 174\mod_1371190175220_78.docx @ 1486874 @ @ 1

6) Switch hydraulically adjustable cutting height on and off (optional) hydraulically adjustable cutting height switched on. hydraulically adjustable cutting height switched off.

Pos: 102.16.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

143

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.16.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Einstellmöglichkeiten (Seite2/3) @ 51\mod_1288101419671_78.docx @ 478330 @ @ 1

Setting options (page 2/3)

Pos: 102.16.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 2/3) BiG M 420 Frontklappen / Hangausgleich @ 132\mod_1349083231605_78.docx @ 1169526 @ @ 1

Fig. 103

Pos: 102.16.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Setting the Hydraulic Front Flaps (Optional)

Symbol Designation

Hydraulic front guard flaps switched on

Hydraulic front guard flaps switched off

Setting the Sideshift (optional)

Symbol Designation

Sideshift switched on

Sideshift switched off

144

Pos: 102.16.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Einstellmöglichkeiten (Seite3/3) @ 51\mod_1288102821890_78.docx @ 478434 @ @ 1

Setting options (page 3/3)

Pos: 102.16.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 Bild Fahrhebel NEU @ 274\mod_1404372998415_78.docx @ 2066114 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

10 9

BM 500 0130

Fig.104

Pos: 102.16.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/1-2 Einstellung Maschine Big M 400/Menü 1-2 (Seite 3/3) Text BM 420/500 Zeit Wegsteuerung @ 51\mod_1288100911312_78.docx @ 478304 @ @ 1

1) Setting time / distance control

The following descriptions refer to function (9,10) "Raise/lower all mowing units" on the multifunction lever.

Time control (determines the delay time of lifting or lowering the lateral mowing units to the front mowing unit)

Distance control (determines the distance still to be covered before the lateral mowing units are raised or lowered to the front mowing unit).

2) Input field: Delay time to raise lateral mowing units.

3) Input field: Delay time to lower lateral mowing units.

Pos: 102.16.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

4) Input field: Distance to be covered before lifting lateral mowing units.

5) Input field: Distance to be covered before lowering lateral mowing units.

145

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.16.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-3 „Einheiten“ @ 0\mod_1197532786335_78.docx @ 24301 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.1 Menu 1-3 "Units"

Fig. 105

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-3 "Units" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display indicates the selected measuring units. The currently set measuring unit is highlighted in colour.

= Anglo-American units active

= English/American units active

= Metric (SI) units

= Metric (SI) units inactive

Setting the measuring units:

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

Pos: 102.16.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

146

Pos: 102.16.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 EinstellungenMenü 1-4 „Sprache“ @ 456\mod_1464676967235_78.docx @ 3089796 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.2 Menu 1-4 “Language”

Info centre "EasyTouch"

1

2

Fig. 106

Main menu 1 “Settings” is called.

• Select menu 1-4 “Language” by using the incremental encoder.

• Press incremental encoder.

The display shows the languages that can be selected.

Setting the language

(1) Currently set language

(2) Display of the selected language

• Turn and press the incremental encoder to select and confirm the desired language.

• Press the key next to the incremental encoder to change to the level above.

Note

Pos: 102.16.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The selected language will be active after the machine is restarted (ignition off and on again).

147

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.16.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5 „Display“ @ 89\mod_1322042220039_78.docx @ 758191 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.3 Menu 1-5 "Display"

5 6

7 8

Pos: 102.16.30 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

B C D

BM4000225_1

Fig. 107

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears.

• Select menu 1-5 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 1-5 "Display".

The "Display" menu is divided into the following menus:

= Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"

= Menu 1-5-2 "Beeper"

= Menu 1-5-4 "Direction of Rotation"

= Menu 1-5-5 "Configure status line" the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

148

Pos: 102.16.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-1 „Kontrast“ @ 9\mod_1219844730062_78.docx @ 124157 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.4 Menu 1-5-1 "Contrast"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 108

You can adjust the brightness of the display in the "Contrast" Diagnostics menu.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-1 "Contrast" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Contrast" setting appears.

= Day design

= Night design

The value after the symbols /

Setting and saving the brightness

indicates the set brightness value.

Pos: 102.16.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The higher the value after the / symbols the greater the brightness of the display.

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to make the desired selection. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

• Turning the rotary potentiometer increases or reduces the value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

149

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.16.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-2 Beeper @ 89\mod_1322042675069_78.docx @ 758419 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.5 Menu 1-5-2 Beeper

Pic. 109

The acoustic signal (beeper) for alarm messages, information messages and for pressing a key can be activated and deactivated in this menu. For alarm messages and information messages the duration of the tone can be set additionally.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-2 "Beeper" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The display indicates the beeper settings.

= Key pressed

Beeper function

= Alarm Message

= Information message

= Beeper inactive = Beeper active

= Beeper limited by time

Activate / deactivate beeper

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour)

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to adjust the desired function

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box

Pos: 102.16.34 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

150

Pos: 102.16.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-2 Beeper zeitlich begrenzen @ 41\mod_1271228361090_78.docx @ 368764 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.6 Beeper limited by time

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 110

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the selection box. (The selection box is highlighted in colour.)

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting (

• Press the rotary potentiometer (a new input field appears).

).

• Press the rotary potentiometer to jump to a new input field. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

• Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to set the desired value.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box.

Pos: 102.16.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

151

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.16.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-4 Drehrichtung @ 89\mod_1322043577709_78.docx @ 758566 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.7 Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation

Fig. 111

The direction of rotation of the rotary potentiometer for scrolling can be changed in this menu.

The rotary potentiometer is set in the factory so that turning it to the left scrolls down and turning it to the right scrolls up (as indicated by the blue arrow) (1).

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-4 "Direction of rotation" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows a list for which the direction of rotation can be changed for the rotary potentiometer.

• Activating or parameter list

key to change the direction of rotation for the

• Activating or key to change the direction of rotation for input fields. the 5 or 6 key to change the direction of rotation for menus.

Note

The blue arrow (1) indicates the direction of rotation for the rotary potentiometer to scroll down. the B key under the softkey brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 102.16.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• To apply the default setting values, press the key under the softkey.

152

Pos: 102.16.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-5-5 Statuszeile konfigurieren @ 89\mod_1322043912248_78.docx @ 758654 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.8 Menu 1-5-5 Configure status line

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Mä rz

24

Montag

Fig. 112

The first field (1) of the status display for the basic screens "Road travel/Field mode“ can be adjusted individually in this menu.

Menu 1-5 "Display" is active.

• Select menu 1-5-5 "Configure status line" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The selection options of the displays (2) for the first field (1) of the status line are shown.

Possible displays (2):

= Time

März

24

Montag

= Time and date

= Diesel fuel consumption per hour

/

= Hectares per hour

/

= Diesel fuel consumption per hectare

/

To change the display for the status line:

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired display. The display is highlighted in colour.

• To accept the selected display, press the rotary potentiometer

The display that was just selected now appears in the basic screens

Pos: 102.16.40 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key under the softkey opens the basic screen.

153

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.16.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-6 „Datum/Uhrzeit“ @ 89\mod_1322060573514_78.docx @ 759970 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.9 Menu 1-6 Date/time

Fig. 113

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears:

• Select menu 1-6 "Date/time" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the date and the time.

To set date/time

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in colour.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer allows you to jump to the input field.

• Set the desired date/time with the rotary potentiometer.

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection field.

Pos: 102.16.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

154

Pos: 102.16.43 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 1 Einstellungen/Menü 1-9 „Adresse Lohnunternehmer“ @ 89\mod_1322128074780_78.docx @ 761468 @ 3 @ 1

8.7.10 Menu 1-9 Owner's address

März

24

Montag

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 114

Main menu 1 "Settings" appears.

• Select menu 1-9 "Owner's address" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer

The display shows the owner's address.

Note

A maximum of 30 characters can be entered in the input field. The information is used each time a print job is sent to the CAN printer. If a line contains no characters (including no spaces), that line will not be considered for printing.

To set the address:

1 2

Fig. 115

• You can use the rotary potentiometer to select the desired setting. The entry box is highlighted in colour

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer opens an alphanumeric input field

• You can change the text or enter a new one with the rotary potentiometer. (To accept the desired alphanumeric value, press the rotary potentiometer.)

Note

Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and confirming causes the program to exit the input field without saving the entries or changes. Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming causes the program to accept and save the entry or change. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back

Pos: 102.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key under the softkey opens the basic screen

155

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.18.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 2 Zähler/Hauptmenü 2 „Zähler“ @ 275\mod_1404379598824_78.docx @ 2066800 @ 23 @ 1

8.8 Main Menu 2 Counters

Fig. 116

• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows various counters.

Counter level (sets)

= total counter (cannot be deleted)

= counter level 1 (can be deleted)

= counter level 2 (can be deleted)

8.8.1

Pos: 102.18.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

= counter level 3 (can be deleted)

Machine Data Counter

Counter (active counters are highlighted colour)

= operating hour counter (h)

= working hours counter (h)

= surface counter (ha)

= odometer (both road and field mode)

= fuel consumption (l)

156

Pos: 102.18.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 2 Zähler/Hauptmenü 2 Löschen der Maschinendatenzähler @ 275\mod_1404386973100_78.docx @ 2067159 @ 43 @ 1

8.8.1.1 Deleting the Machine Data Counters (Sets 1 to 3)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 117

Machine data for counter levels (sets) 1 to 3 can be deleted in this menu.

• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 2 "Counter" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows various counters. the key for or the key to select the counter level (1) to be deleted. key under the softkey deletes all counters in a set. (Only the counters of sets 1 to 3 can be deleted.) key under the

Switching to Customer DataCounters softkey brings up the basic screen

8.8.2

Pos: 102.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 brings up the "Customer data counter" menu.

For more information, see Section "Customer Data Counters"

157

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.20.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3/Hauptmenü 3 „Wartung“ BiG M 420 Caterpillar @ 356\mod_1438695017957_78.docx @ 2654430 @ 2 @ 1

8.9 Main Menu 3 Maintenance

The “Maintenance” main menu is divided into up to four menus, depending on how the machine is equipped:

3-1

3-3

Main menu 3 “Maintenance”

Designation

Bringing up “Calibrating Cutting Height”

Bringing up “Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System” (only accessible to technicians)

3-5

Bringing up “Manual Mode” (only accessible to technicians)

3-6

Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter

Fig. 118

Pos: 102.20.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up main menu 3 “Maintenance”.

• Choose main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

158

Pos: 102.20.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMenü 3-1 „Kalibrierung Schnitthöhe“ @ 28\mod_1250833598028_78.docx @ 277855 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

8.9.1 Menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height"

Pos: 102.20.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schwenken der Mähwerke @ 28\mod_1250833011700_78.docx @ 277801 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Swivelling the mowing units

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Before swivelling the mowing units, ensure that nobody is within the swivel range.

• Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

• If required, switch off the machine immediately.

Pos: 102.20.5 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehenes zuschalten von Antrieben @ 28\mod_1250833758403_78.docx @ 277880 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Unexpected switching on of drives

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Travelling gear release switch must be switched off.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Observe the following instructions very precisely!

Pos: 102.20.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 „Kalibrierung Schnitthöhe“ BiG M 420 @ 132\mod_1349329326587_78.docx @ 1170854 @ @ 1

The sensors have been pre-adjusted to record cutting height in the factory. Heavy demand and the setting of components may cause an offset in the cutting pattern of the right / left and front mowing unit. If this happens, the sensors must be recalibrated.

• Perform calibration on an even and solid surface.

• Switch off the travelling gear release switch.

• You can use the C "Hydraulic Axle Suspension" key to move from the basic screen to mowing position (refer to chapter entitled “Quick Access Hydraulic Axle Suspension”).

• Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (float setting).

Pos: 102.20.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 „Kalibrierung alle Mähwerke auf 0° einstellen“ Bild @ 28\mod_1250668612774_78.docx @ 276409 @ @ 1

Adjust all mowing units to 0°.

3-1

5 6

7 8

Fig. 119

Pos: 102.20.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 „Kalibrierung Schnitthöhe" Menü aufrufen Text @ 28\mod_1250669698133_78.docx @ 276434 @ @ 1

To do this:

B C D

BM 500 0008

Pos: 102.20.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• You can bring up a menu level with the key on the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 3 "Maintenance" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 3-1 "Calibration of cutting height" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows the cutting height setting.

159

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.20.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-1/Menü 3-1 Alle Mähwerke auf 0° einstellen ausrichten @ 46\mod_1283317596765_78.docx @ 448365 @ @ 1

Aligning the Mowing Units

Fig. 120

Front mowing unit:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

• Use

1 or

2 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

Lateral mowing unit right:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

• Use

3 or

4 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

Lateral mowing unit left:

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bar.

5 or

6

6 key to align the cutter bar horizontally.

1 2

• Loosen the angle of rotation sensors on the right and left mowing unit and set them in the oblong hole until a value (1) of about 2900 mV to 3100 mV appears in the display

(calibration screen).

• Screw the angle of rotation sensors tightly into place.

Save sensor value (2) for inclination 0°

• Turn the rotary potentiometer to jump to the appropriate input field (2) (the input field is highlighted in colour).

• Press the rotary potentiometer. (The input box is highlighted in colour.)

• When you press the rotary potentiometer again, the value (1) for inclination 0° is applied in the input field (2).

Pos: 102.20.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The sensor for the front mowing unit is not adjustable. However, the value must be accepted at this point.

160

Pos: 102.20.12 /Layout Module /Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.docx @ 54443 @ @ 1

This page has been left blank deliberately.

Pos: 102.20.13.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/ISOBUS Lenksystem kalibrieren @ 275\mod_1404397033672_78.docx @ 2067739 @ 2 @ 1

8.10

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Calibrating Menu 3-3 ISOBUS Steering System

WARNING! –

Risk of injury due to the spontaneous movement of parts (e. g. steering axle)

• No persons may remain in the danger zone.

After replacing sensor system and actuator, the ISOBUS steering system must be recalibrated.

The following order must be adhered to for calibrating:

• Calibrate steering angle

• Calibrate steering (valves) (automatically or manually)

• Enter the steering radius

The calibrated values are checked for plausibility. The error message appears next to the calibrated value if a value is outside the valid range. The value cannot be saved.

• Start the engine and switch on the release switches <Field>, <Traction Drive> and

<Autopilot>.

• Bring the machine to a nominal speed of 1900 rpm.

• Bring up the main menus with menu key.

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select “Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 102.20.13.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenksystem Bild @ 142\mod_1358321317872_78.docx @ 1272443 @ @ 1

850

4

1

182 305

2

520

3

Fig. 121

Pos: 102.20.13.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenksystem Menüerklärung: Lenkwinkelsensor kalibrieren @ 142\mod_1358321797351_78.docx @ 1272472 @ @ 1

Menu Explanation:

Pos. Meaning

Steering angle sensor (The value of the selected steering angle sensor is displayed)

1 Steering angle left

2 Straight-ahead driving

3 Steering angle right

4 Engine speed

Pos: 102.20.13.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

161

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.20.13.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkwinkelsensor kalibrieren @ 275\mod_1404727549231_78.docx @ 2071559 @ 3 @ 1

8.10.1 Calibrating Steering Angle Sensor

Calibrating Steering Angle Left

The value of the steering angle sensor must be within the range 215-300 for left turn.

The steering angle sensor must be readjusted if the value is smaller than 215.

If the value is larger than 300, it must be checked if the steering angle sensor is correctly assembled.

The steering angle sensor is correctly assembled if the notch of the steering angle sensor shows in the direction of the plug.

• To move the steering axle to the maximum left position, the rear wheels must be steered until the steering will not go any further.

• Select the input field “Steering Angle Left” with the rotary potentiometer to save the actual value, the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer twice, the actual value is saved and the input field is left.

Calibrating Steering Angle Straight-Ahead Driving

When driving straight-ahead, the value for the straight-ahead driving steering angle sensor must be 320 - 420. The steering angle sensor must be readjusted if the value is not within the range

320 - 420.

• Steer the rear wheels until they are in straight-ahead driving position to move the steering axle to the centre position.

• Select the input field “Straight-Ahead Driving” with the rotary potentiometer to save the current value; the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer twice, the actual value is saved and the input field is left.

Calibrating Steering Angle Right

The value of the steering angle sensor must be within the range 450 - 650 for right turn.

If the value is larger than 650, the steering angle sensor must be readjusted.

If the value is smaller than 450, it must be checked if the steering angle sensor is installed in a correct way.

The steering sensor is correctly assembled if the notch of the steering angle sensor shows in the direction of the plug.

• To move the steering axle to the maximum right position, the rear wheels must be steered until the steering will not go any further.

• Select the input field “Steering Angle Right” with the rotary potentiometer to save the current value; the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer twice, the actual value is saved and the input field is left.

Pos: 102.20.13.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Calibration must be restarted if the steering angle sensor is readjusted during the calibration process.

162

Pos: 102.20.13.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung (Ventile)automatisch kalibrieren ÜS @ 134\mod_1351058496302_78.docx @ 1193325 @ 2 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

8.11 Calibrating Steering (Valves) Automatically

Pos: 102.20.13.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/WARNUNG- Verletzungsgefahr durch Bewegung der Lenkachse @ 134\mod_1351058403021_78.docx @ 1193297 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Risk of injury due to the movement of the steering axle

The valves are automatically actuated when starting the calibration. The steering axle moves accordingly.

• No persons may remain in the danger zone (steering axle).

Pos: 102.20.13.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Einführtext @ 134\mod_1351058338610_78.docx @ 1193269 @ @ 1

The valve currents are recorded by the system and saved during the automatic calibration. The process may take a few minutes. When starting the calibration, the steering is first controlled completely to the right. Then the system increases the valve current for the left valve until the system detects that a rotary movement takes place on the steering axle. Consequently, this current value will be saved as new minimum current. This process is repeated for the right valve.

The calibration will be interrupted as soon as the steering wheel is moved or the driver leaves the seat.

Pos: 102.20.13.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Bild @ 142\mod_1358322634268_78.docx @ 1272541 @ @ 1

3

1900

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

1900

940 mA

0.00

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

1

Fehler-Nr.

2

0.00

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

4

Pos: 102.20.13.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 122

163

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.20.13.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Menüerklärung @ 134\mod_1351058120734_78.docx @ 1193213 @ @ 1

Menu Explanation:

Pos. Meaning

1 Status of the calibration:

Valve Y52 “Steering Left” is calibrated.

Valve Y51 “Steering Right” is calibrated.

STOP

Calibration has been successful and values are saved.

The calibration process has been stopped.

2

An error has occurred.

Error number with symbol .

3

Calibration not running.

Calibration running.

4

STOP

Stop the calibration process.

Bring up the previous page.

Pos: 102.20.13.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Vorgang @ 175\mod_1372312811058_78.docx @ 1498534 @ @ 1

850

4

1900

1

182 305

2

520

3

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

Fig. 123 Calibrating ISOBUS steering system Calibrating steering

A prerequisite for calibrating the valves is that the steering angle sensor has been set and calibrated correctly before.

• Start the engine and switch on the release switches <Field>, <Traction Drive> and

<Autopilot>.

• Bring the machine to a nominal speed of 1900 rpm.

• Bring up main menus with menu key .

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select “Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Press C key for softkey to bring up “Calibrating Steering” menu.

164

1900

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

Info centre "EasyTouch"

3

1900

940 mA

0.00

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

1

Fehler-Nr.

2

0.00

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

4

Fig. 124

Make certain there are no persons in the danger zone of the steering axle.

• Press key for softkey“ “ to start calibration.

• Press key for

STOP

to finish calibration process.

Pos: 102.20.13.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press key for to bring up the previous view.

After the calibration is complete, the symbol appears for approx. 3 seconds.

165

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.20.13.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Fehlerliste Text @ 134\mod_1351057864536_78.docx @ 1193157 @ @ 1

If an error occurs during calibration, the calibration process will be interrupted and the corresponding error will be displayed.

Calibrating Steering Error List Automatically

Pos: 102.20.13.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung automatisch kalibrieren Fehlerliste Tabelle @ 134\mod_1351056606429_78.docx @ 1193129 @ @ 1

No.

Symbol

Meaning Cause / remedy

1

2

3

4

5

The value of the steering angle sensor B50 is smaller than the calibrated value “Steering completely left”.

The value of the steering angle sensor B50 is bigger than the calibrated value “Steering completely right”.

Recalibrate steering angle sensor B50.

Recalibrate steering angle sensor B50.

The valve Y52 “Steering left” has been controlled. Then, also the value of the steering angle sensor B50 has to become smaller. However, the sensor value has become bigger.

The valve Y51 “Steering right” has been controlled. Then, also the value of the steering angle sensor B50 has to become bigger. However, the sensor value has become smaller.

Although the valve Y52

“Steering left” is controlled, there are no changes on the steering angle sensor B50.

• The valves Y51 and Y52 have been interchanged. The left-hand side is controlled, but the steering turns to the right.

• Parameter 26027 “Valves reversed” set incorrectly.

• Steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Wrong sensor as steering angle sensor

B50.

• The valves Y51 and Y52 have been interchanged. The right-hand side is controlled, but the steering turns to the left.

• Parameter 26027 “Valves reversed” set incorrectly.

• Steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Wrong sensor as steering angle sensor

B50.

• The minimum current previously automatically determined is not correct.

Repeat calibration.

• Steering angle sensor B50 defective.

• Steering angle sensor B50 or linkage on the steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

6 Although the valve Y51

“Steering Right” is controlled, there are no changes on the steering angle sensor B50.

• Hydraulic valve Y52 “Steering Left” incorrect.

• The minimum current previously automatically determined is not correct.

Repeat calibration.

• Steering angle sensor B50 defective.

• Steering angle sensor B50 or linkage on the steering angle sensor B50 assembled incorrectly.

• Hydraulic valve Y51 “Steering right” defective.

166

Info centre "EasyTouch"

No.

Symbol

7 and 9

8 and 10

11

Meaning

Cable break Y52 valve steering left

Cable break Y51 valve steering right

Pressure has been detected on the pressure sensor B46

“Pressure steering”.

Cause / remedy

• Cable break to the valve Y52 “Steering left”

• Valve coil Y52 defective.

• Autopilot control defective.

• Cable break to the valve Y51 “Steering right”.

• Valve coil Y51 defective.

• Autopilot control defective.

• Steering intervention on the steering wheel.

• Pressure sensor B46 defective.

• Autopilot control defective.

Pos: 102.20.13.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkung manuell kalibrieren @ 134\mod_1351056504714_78.docx @ 1193101 @ 3 @ 1

8.11.1 Calibrating Steering (Valves) Manually

Steering Valve on Left

• Move the steering axle to the centre position (move the rear wheels until they are in straight-ahead driving position).

• Select the input field “Current Value Valve Left” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer to update the current value for the valve.

• Increase the value with the rotary potentiometer until a movement is discernible on the rear wheels.

• Reduce the value and press the rotary potentiometer until the rear wheels come to a stop.

The saved minimum current value for the left valve is updated.

Steering Valve on Right

• Move the steering axle to the centre position (move the rear wheels until they are in straight-ahead driving position).

• Select the input field “Steering Valve on Right” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer to update the current value for the valve.

• Increase the value with the rotary potentiometer until a movement is discernible on the rear wheels.

Pos: 102.20.13.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Reduce the value and press the rotary potentiometer until the rear wheels come to a stop.

The saved minimum current value for the right valve is updated.

167

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.20.13.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-3/Autopilot kalibrieren/Lenkradius einstellen @ 275\mod_1404450847730_78.docx @ 2068125 @ 2 @ 1

8.12 Setting the Steering Radius

1900

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1005 mA

0.00

%

5 mA

Min. 1080 mA

1 2

Fig. 125

After the steering angle sensor and the valves for the steering have been calibrated, the steering radius must be determined and entered.

• Press C key for softkey to bring up “Setting the Steering Radius” menu.

• Turn the steering wheel to the left up to the stop.

• Slowly drive a cycle.

• Measure the diameter of the driven cycle starting from the centre of the machine.

To save the current value, select the rotary potentiometer (1), the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer and set the diameter in cm.

• Press the rotary potentiometer to save the value.

• Turn the steering wheel to the right up to the stop.

• Slowly drive a cycle.

• Measure the diameter of the driven cycle starting from the centre of the machine.

• To save the current value, select the input field (2) with the rotary potentiometer, the input field is highlighted in colour.

• Press the rotary potentiometer and set the diameter in cm.

Pos: 102.20.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press the rotary potentiometer to save the value.

ISOBUS steering system is now calibrated.

168

Pos: 102.20.15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMenü 3-5 „Handbetrieb“ @ 132\mod_1349333816049_78.docx @ 1170912 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

8.12.1 Menu 3-5 „Manual Mode“

Pos: 102.20.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 102.20.17 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Handbetrieb Schwenken der Mähwerke @ 29\mod_1251188626799_78.docx @ 280962 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Swivelling the mowing units

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Travelling gear release switch must be switched off.

• Apply the parking brake.

• Before swivelling the mowing units, ensure that nobody is within the swivel range.

• Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.

• If required, switch off the machine immediately.

• Carelessness when you use manual mode can cause damage to the machine (watch out for possible collisions when swivelling the mowing units in and out).

Pos: 102.20.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Menü 3-5 „Handbetrieb“ BM 420 @ 132\mod_1349332153525_78.docx @ 1170883 @ @ 1

BM 400 0119_2

Fig. 126

If the multifunction lever or the sensor system is defective, the mowing units can be adjusted inching via manual mode.

Inching means that there is no float position when lowering the mowing units.

Moreover, this menu item allows you to set the cutting heights of the mowing units.

• Press menu key to bring up “Manual Mode” menu.

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 3-5 “Manual Mode” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows Manual Mode.

Manual mode is divided into 2 pages.

Page 1: Manual mode “Lifting/Lowering Mowing Units”

Page 2: Manual mode “Setting Cutting Height”

Pos: 102.20.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 102.20.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

169

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.20.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüerkärung für Seite 1 bis 2 @ 51\mod_1288100713546_78.docx @ 478278 @ @ 1

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 102.20.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-8/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251107696463_78.docx @ 279672 @ @ 1

• Press the key C to open the next page of the menu.

• Press the key B to open the previous page of the menu.

• Press the key D to display the basic screen.

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 102.20.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Menü 3-4 Symbolerklärung @ 0\mod_1197552930351_78.docx @ 26011 @ @ 1

Explanation of symbols:

Pos: 102.20.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 127

= raise front mowing unit inching with the

= lower front mowing unit inching with the key. key.

= fold down left mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with the key.

= fold down right mowing unit inching from transport position to headland position with the key.

= lower left mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with the key.

5

= lower right mowing unit inching from headland position to working position with the key.

6

= raise left mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with the key.

7

= raise right mowing unit inching from working position to transport position with the key.

170

Pos: 102.20.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SStatusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren (2) @ 0\mod_1197556508007_78.docx @ 26092 @ 3 @ 1

8.12.2 Status display of general sensors (2)

Pos: 102.20.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Menü 3-4 Sensor B14_15_48_49 @ 9\mod_1219909987241_78.docx @ 124321 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 128

= Sensor B15 position mowing unit left

= Sensor B14 position mowing unit right

= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left

= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit right

Pos: 102.20.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.docx @ 26073 @ @ 1

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

Pos: 102.20.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Aufrufen Grundbild/Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197556942913_78.docx @ 26130 @ @ 1

= Sensor short circuit the D key brings up the basic screen.

Pos: 102.20.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

171

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.20.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Hydraulisch einstellbare Schnitthöhe (Seite 2/2) @ 132\mod_1349339037229_78.docx @ 1171145 @ @ 1

Hydraulically Adjustable Cutting Height (Page 2/2)

1

Fig. 129

Activating keys 1-6 sets the inclination of the mowing units.

Inclination Mowing unit lateral left

Front mowing unit Mowing unit lateral right

Reduce

key 5 key key

Increase

Pos: 102.20.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-8/Sensorübersicht @ 29\mod_1251119423573_78.docx @ 280119 @ @ 1

Sensor overview:

Pos: 102.20.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-4/BM 400/Sensor B 41/42/43 Tabelle @ 132\mod_1349339370125_78.docx @ 1171170 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor OK green

B43

B42

B41

Pos: 102.20.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

key 6 key

Sensor not OK red Description

key

Cutting height front mowing unit

Cutting height lateral mowing unit right

Cutting height lateral mowing unit left

172

Pos: 102.20.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-6/Menü 3-6 Dieselpartikelfilter regenerieren/Menü 3-6 "Dieselpartikelfilter (DPF) manuell regenerieren" BM 420 Caterpillar @ 356\mod_1438692483174_78.docx @ 2653973 @ 3 @ 1

8.12.3 Menu 3-6 Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter

Info centre "EasyTouch"

2

1

Fig. 130

The bar graph (1) and the numerical value (2) indicate the soot content (as %) achieved.

Pos: 102.20.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-6/Menü 3-6 Dieselpartikelfilter regenerieren/Dieselpartikelfilter: Besschreibung Automatik-Modus @ 356\mod_1438693258428_78.docx @ 2654036 @ @ 1

Automatic mode

In general, the machine is in automatic mode and the engine control unit

(ECM=Engine Control Module) automatically determines the time required to regenerate the diesel particulate filter (DPF) and initiates regeneration. The indicator light “ “ appears in the display as soon as regeneration is carried out. Removing soot from the diesel particulate filter is called regeneration. The automatically started regeneration may at any time be deactivated.

Pos: 102.20.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-6/Menü 3-6 Dieselpartikelfilter regenerieren/Dieselpartikelfilter: Beschreibung Manueller-Modus @ 142\mod_1358338064423_78.docx @ 1272929 @ @ 1

Manual Mode

The regeneration can be carried out manually if the soot content is between 15% and 116%. A manually started regeneration can be deactivated at any time. The deactivated regeneration must be activated again at the latest when a soot content of 116% is reached. Otherwise, the engine will be throttled to the lower idle speed after an engine operation of 5 minutes with a soot content of 116%.

After an engine operation of 10 minutes with a soot content of 116%, all regeneration types are blocked.

If this is the case, maintenance regeneration may only be carried out by Caterpillar service technicians.

If the engine continues to run without regeneration until a soot content of 140% is reached, the

Pos: 102.20.37 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 engine switches off after 30 seconds. If this is the case, the diesel particle filter must be replaced.

173

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.20.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-6/Menü 3-6 Dieselpartikelfilter regenerieren/Menü 3-6 Dieselpartikelfilter regenerieren aufrufen @ 142\mod_1358337917507_78.docx @ 1272901 @ @ 1

Bringing Up Menu 3-6:

• Bring up main menu with menu key .

• Select main menu 3 “Maintenance” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 3-6 “Regenerating Diesel Particle Filter“ with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer. or

• Press the quick access key from the basic screen.

The sub-menu “Regenerating Diesel Particle Filter Manually” is displayed.

Pos: 102.20.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-6/Menü 3-6 Dieselpartikelfilter regenerieren/Dieselpartikelfilter manuell regenerieren @ 356\mod_1438693566002_78.docx @ 2654067 @ @ 1

Manually regenerating diesel particulate filter

• Press key

Pos: 102.20.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Menü 3-6/Menü 3-6 Dieselpartikelfilter regenerieren/Dieselpartikelfilter manuell deaktivieren @ 356\mod_1438693604075_78.docx @ 2654218 @ @ 1

or for softkey to start regeneration.

Manually deactivating diesel particulate filter

• Press key 5 or 6 for softkey to deactivate regeneration.

If regeneration is deactivated, the ECM does not initiate any regeneration until the driver starts regeneration manually or the machine is restarted.

Then the ECM initiates the regeneration again automatically. the D key to bring up the basic screen.

Pos: 102.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press menu key on the rotary potentiometer to go back one menu level.

174

Pos: 102.22.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Hauptmenü 4 Service @ 456\mod_1464686774042_78.docx @ 3091505 @ 2 @ 1

8.13 Main menu 4 "Service"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 131

• You can bring up a menu level with the key o n the rotary potentiometer.

• Select main menu 4 "Service" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu 4 "Service".

The main menu "Service" is divided up into four menus:

= Menu 4-1 "Diagnostics"

= Menu 4-2 "Error list"

= Menu 4-3 "Fitter's section (password-protected")

= Menu 4-4 "Information" the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

175

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 „Diagnose“ aufrufen BM 420 @ 188\mod_1380176295599_78.docx @ 1610707 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.1 Menu 4-1 Diagnostics

Fig. 132

• Press menu key to bring up “Diagnostics” menu.

• Select main menu 4 “Service” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 4-1 “Diagnostics” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level 4-1 “Diagnostics”.

Pos: 102.22.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 „Diagnose“ Menüs BM 420 @ 175\mod_1372326765399_78.docx @ 1499477 @ @ 1

Menu 4-1 Diagnostics

5 Designation

4-1-1

Front Axle

4-1-3

Spring Compensation

4-1-4

Cutting Height

4-1-5

Swath Hood

4-1-6

Sideshift

4-1-7

Front Guard Flaps

4-1-9

ISOBUS Steering System

4-1-10

Work

176

Pos: 102.22.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

4-1-11

4-1-12

CAN Bus

Traction Drive

4-1-13

4-1-14

Electronics

Diesel Engine

4-1-15

4-1-16

Multi-Function Lever

Control Unit Console

4-1-17

Terminal

Info centre "EasyTouch"

177

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 Anzeige nicht erfüllter Freigabebedingungen für die Diagnose BM 420 @ 132\mod_1349344753454_78.docx @ 1171277 @ @ 1

Display of Release Conditions Not Met for Diagnostics

5 6

7 8

Pos: 102.22.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

B C D

BM 400 0120

Fig. 133

Menu field (I) shows conditions that have not yet been met but which must be met to be able to perform diagnostics. An appropriate remedy must be found in each case.

Symbol Meaning

Diesel engine speed not at 1900 rpm

1900

RPM

GO

Diesel engine has not been started

S TOP

Diesel engine is not off

V > 0

Speed of vehicle is not correct

Turn axle separation release switch on or off

Turn the autopilot release switch on or off

Turn the travelling gear release switch on or off

Turn road/field release switch on or off

Turn release switch for parking brake on or off

Seat switch (driver's seat is unoccupied)

Open or close door

178

Pos: 102.22.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1 Anzeige möglicher Störungen für die Diagnose BM 420 @ 132\mod_1349345223062_78.docx @ 1171306 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.2 Display of Possible Faults for the Diagnostics

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0121

Fig. 134

The faults listed below may appear in menu field (I).

Error CAN* to engine control

Error CAN* to CUC (control unit console)

BEK

Error CAN* to DIOM

DIOM

Error CAN* to joystick

Error CAN* to KMC1 (KMC = Krone-machine controller)

KMC1

Error CAN* to SD (Smartdrive)

SD

Pos: 102.22.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Error CAN* to joystick

*) CAN = Controler-Area-Network

179

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.10.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Menü 4-1-1 „Diagnose Achsfederung“ BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283323788093_78.docx @ 448535 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.3 Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension

Fig. 135

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

Select menu 4-1-1 "Diagnostics of axle suspension" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Axle suspension diagnostics appears.

The "Axle suspension" diagnostics menu is divided into 2 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 102.22.10.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.10.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1

C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.10.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

180

Pos: 102.22.10.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Sensor B20 Achsfederung @ 0\mod_1197610185837_78.docx @ 26645 @ @ 1

Sensor Test (page 1/2)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 136

Status display of general sensors (2)

= Sensor B20 axle suspension

Pos: 102.22.10.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.docx @ 26073 @ @ 1

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

Pos: 102.22.10.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest @ 462\mod_1465895633693_78.docx @ 3112637 @ @ 1

Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.10.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 102.22.10.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altWARNUNG - Aktortest @ 301\mod_1413441650591_78.docx @ 2349581 @ @ 1

WARNING!

The functions are directly executed by energizing the actuators.

As a result, machine parts may start to move unexpectedly, persons may be captured and seriously hurt.

• Switch off PTO shaft.

• Deactivate tractor hydraulics.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

• The person performing the test must know the machine parts being actuated by controlling the actuators. If necessary, secure actuated machine components from unintentional lowering.

• Only perform the sensor test from a safe position outside the moving machine parts.

• Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone.

Pos: 102.22.10.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 102.22.10.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 102.22.10.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

181

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.10.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/2) @ 0\mod_1197610625431_78.docx @ 26684 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/2)

Pos: 102.22.10.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Aktorentest Achsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611281618_78.docx @ 26741 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the “Axle suspension” function.

1

5 6

7 8

BM 400 0041

B C D

Fig. 137

(1) Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 102.22.10.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.10.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-1/Tabelle Achsfederung BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197611724790_78.docx @ 26779 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to axle suspension.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y15 Lifting axle suspension

Y16 Lowering axle suspension

5 6

Pos: 102.22.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

182

Pos: 102.22.12.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Menü 4-1-3 „Diagnose Federendtlastung" @ 46\mod_1283325482906_78.docx @ 448591 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.4 Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 138

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-3 "Diagnostics of spring compensation" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Spring compensation diagnostics appears.

The "Spring compensation" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 102.22.12.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.12.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.12.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

183

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.12.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Sensortest Federentlastung (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 0\mod_1197617848837_78.docx @ 28267 @ @ 1

Sensor test spring compensation (2) (page 1/3)

Pos: 102.22.12.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 139:

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the spring compensation function.

Sensor Sensor OK

B44

B45 green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

Spring compensation left

Spring compensation right

184

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.12.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest @ 462\mod_1465895633693_78.docx @ 3112637 @ @ 1

Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.12.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 102.22.12.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altWARNUNG - Aktortest @ 301\mod_1413441650591_78.docx @ 2349581 @ @ 1

WARNING!

The functions are directly executed by energizing the actuators.

As a result, machine parts may start to move unexpectedly, persons may be captured and seriously hurt.

• Switch off PTO shaft.

• Deactivate tractor hydraulics.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

• The person performing the test must know the machine parts being actuated by controlling the actuators. If necessary, secure actuated machine components from unintentional lowering.

• Only perform the sensor test from a safe position outside the moving machine parts.

• Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone.

Pos: 102.22.12.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 102.22.12.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 102.22.12.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

185

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.12.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 102.22.12.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Aktorentest Federentlastung (2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618876212_78.docx @ 28305 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Spring compensation” function.

Fig. 140

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 102.22.12.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.12.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 102.22.12.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

186

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.12.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 102.22.12.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Aktorentest Federentlastung (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197621399243_78.docx @ 28384 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Spring compensation” function.

1 2

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0045

Fig. 141

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 102.22.12.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.12.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-3/Tabelle Aktoren Federentlastung @ 0\mod_1197620752884_78.docx @ 28364 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to spring compensation.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y31 Spring compensation right

Y42 Spring compensation left

Pos: 102.22.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

187

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.14.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4-1-4 Diagnose Schnitthöhe Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283328540437_78.docx @ 448674 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.5 Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height

4-1-4

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0052_1

Fig. 142

Pos: 102.22.14.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Menü 4-1-4 Diagnose Schnitthöhe Text BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_1251361156886_78.docx @ 284896 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-4 "Diagnostics of cutting height" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Cutting height diagnostics appears.

The "Cutting height" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 4

Pos: 102.22.14.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.14.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.14.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

188

Pos: 102.22.14.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Sensortest Schnitthöhe (2) (Seite 1/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283329291171_78.docx @ 448702 @ @ 1

Sensor test cutting height (2) (page 1/4)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.14.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 143

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the function of the cutting height.

Sensor Sensor OK green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B43

B42

B41

Cutting height – front mowing unit

Cutting height – right lateral mowing unit

Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit

189

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.14.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest @ 462\mod_1465895633693_78.docx @ 3112637 @ @ 1

Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.14.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 102.22.14.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altWARNUNG - Aktortest @ 301\mod_1413441650591_78.docx @ 2349581 @ @ 1

WARNING!

The functions are directly executed by energizing the actuators.

As a result, machine parts may start to move unexpectedly, persons may be captured and seriously hurt.

• Switch off PTO shaft.

• Deactivate tractor hydraulics.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

• The person performing the test must know the machine parts being actuated by controlling the actuators. If necessary, secure actuated machine components from unintentional lowering.

• Only perform the sensor test from a safe position outside the moving machine parts.

• Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone.

Pos: 102.22.14.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 102.22.14.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 102.22.14.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

190

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.14.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.docx @ 28464 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/4)

Pos: 102.22.14.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Der Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der Maschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.docx @ 285519 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 102.22.14.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Aktorentest Schnitthöhe (2/4) Bild BM 400 @ 275\mod_1404459439391_78.docx @ 2068237 @ @ 1

1

2

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0047_2

Fig. 144

Pos: 102.22.14.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 102.22.14.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.14.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 102.22.14.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

191

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.14.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.docx @ 28484 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/4)

Pos: 102.22.14.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Der Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der Maschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.docx @ 285519 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 102.22.14.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Aktorentest Schnitthöhe (3/4) Bild BM 400 @ 275\mod_1404719079435_78.docx @ 2070475 @ @ 1

2

5 6

2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0048_2

Fig. 145

Pos: 102.22.14.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 102.22.14.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.14.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Tabelle Aktoren Schnitthöhe 3/4 @ 46\mod_1283340572046_78.docx @ 449425 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y35 Cutting height right 1

Y36 Cutting height right 2

Y37 Cutting height – front mowing unit 1

5 6

Pos: 102.22.14.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y38 Cutting height – front mowing unit 2

7

192

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.14.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.docx @ 28504 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 4/4)

Pos: 102.22.14.29 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Der Aktortest dient zum Testen, der an der Maschine für die Funktion „Schnitthöhe“, verbauten Aktore @ 30\mod_1251366727948_78.docx @ 285519 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Cutting height” function.

Pos: 102.22.14.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Aktorentest Schnitthöhe (4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283341098734_78.docx @ 449481 @ @ 1

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0049_1

Fig. 146

Pos: 102.22.14.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung @ 30\mod_1251373725917_78.docx @ 286274 @ @ 1

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 102.22.14.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.14.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Tabelle Aktoren Schnitthöhe 4/4 @ 46\mod_1283341654625_78.docx @ 449507 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all Actuators related to cutting height.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y39 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 1

Y34 Cutting height – left lateral mowing unit 2

Pos: 102.22.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

193

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.16.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4-1-5 Diagnose hydraulische Schneckenhaube Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283344002875_78.docx @ 449562 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.6 Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood (optional)

Fig. 147

Pos: 102.22.16.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Menü 4-1-5 Diagnose hydraulische Schneckenhaube Text BM 400/500 @ 30\mod_1251376875502_78.docx @ 287117 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-5 "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Diagnostics for the hydraulic auger hood appears.

The "Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 102.22.16.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.16.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.16.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

194

Pos: 102.22.16.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Sensortest hydraulische Schneckenhauben (2) (Seite 1/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197628159400_78.docx @ 28695 @ @ 1

Sensor test - hydraulic auger hoods (2) (page 1/3)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.16.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 148

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the hydraulic auger hoods function.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S2

Hydraulic auger hoods left

S5

Hydraulic auger hoods right

195

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.16.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest @ 462\mod_1465895633693_78.docx @ 3112637 @ @ 1

Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.16.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 102.22.16.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altWARNUNG - Aktortest @ 301\mod_1413441650591_78.docx @ 2349581 @ @ 1

WARNING!

The functions are directly executed by energizing the actuators.

As a result, machine parts may start to move unexpectedly, persons may be captured and seriously hurt.

• Switch off PTO shaft.

• Deactivate tractor hydraulics.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

• The person performing the test must know the machine parts being actuated by controlling the actuators. If necessary, secure actuated machine components from unintentional lowering.

• Only perform the sensor test from a safe position outside the moving machine parts.

• Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone.

Pos: 102.22.16.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 102.22.16.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 102.22.16.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

196

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.16.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 102.22.16.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Der Aktortest /Testen, Funktion „hydraulische Schneckenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.docx @ 288297 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.

Pos: 102.22.16.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Aktorentest hydraulische Schneckenhaube (2/3) Bild BM 400 @ 275\mod_1404736479856_78.docx @ 2072267 @ @ 1

1

5 6

2

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0055_1

Fig. 149

Pos: 102.22.16.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 102.22.16.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.16.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 102.22.16.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

197

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.16.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 102.22.16.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Der Aktortest /Testen, Funktion „hydraulische Schneckenhauben“ @ 30\mod_1251378341908_78.docx @ 288297 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Hydraulic auger hoods" function.

Pos: 102.22.16.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung/Stromfluss @ 30\mod_1251367035870_78.docx @ 285544 @ @ 1

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 102.22.16.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Aktorentest hydraulische Schneckenhauben (3/3) Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251379241424_78.docx @ 289052 @ @ 1

1 2

5 6

7 8

B C D BM 400 0056

Fig. 150

Pos: 102.22.16.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.16.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-5/Tabelle Aktoren hydraulische Schneckenhauben BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197631161806_78.docx @ 28755 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the hydraulic auger hood.

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y32 Auger hoods right

Y33 Auger hoods left

3

Pos: 102.22.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

198

Pos: 102.22.18.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Menü 4-1-6 Diagnose Hangausgleich @ 46\mod_1283347867062_78.docx @ 449617 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.7 Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics (optional)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 151

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics sideshift" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Sideshift diagnostics appears.

The "Sideshift" diagnostics menu is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 102.22.18.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.18.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.18.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

199

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.18.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Sensortest Hangausgleich (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 81\mod_1316093658099_78.docx @ 714718 @ @ 1

Sensor Test – Sideshift (2) (page 1/3)

Fig. 152

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the sideshift function.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S73

Sideshift (Only on BiG M 400)

Pos: 102.22.18.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest @ 462\mod_1465895633693_78.docx @ 3112637 @ @ 1

Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.18.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 102.22.18.8 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altWARNUNG - Aktortest @ 301\mod_1413441650591_78.docx @ 2349581 @ @ 1

WARNING!

The functions are directly executed by energizing the actuators.

As a result, machine parts may start to move unexpectedly, persons may be captured and seriously hurt.

• Switch off PTO shaft.

• Deactivate tractor hydraulics.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

• The person performing the test must know the machine parts being actuated by controlling the actuators. If necessary, secure actuated machine components from unintentional lowering.

• Only perform the sensor test from a safe position outside the moving machine parts.

• Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone.

Pos: 102.22.18.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 102.22.18.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 102.22.18.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

200

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.18.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 102.22.18.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Aktorentest Hangausgleich (2/3) @ 279\mod_1405414790716_78.docx @ 2151370 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Sideshift” function.

1

5 6 2

7 8

BM 400 0059_1

B C D

Fig. 153

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2.

Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 102.22.18.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.18.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 102.22.18.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

201

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.18.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 102.22.18.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Aktorentest Hangausgleich (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197632459321_78.docx @ 28856 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Sideshift" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0060

Fig. 154

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 102.22.18.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.18.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-6/Tabelle Aktoren Hangausgleich (3/3) @ 0\mod_1197873505393_78.docx @ 29515 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the sideshift.

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y28 Sideshift left

Y29 Sideshift right

Pos: 102.22.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

202

Pos: 102.22.20.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Menü 4-1-7 Diagnose Frontschutzklappen @ 46\mod_1283348927000_78.docx @ 449807 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.8 Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps (optional)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

CAN

Pic. 155

The "Diagnostics" main menu 4 is called.

• Select menu 4-1-7 “Diagnostics front guard flaps" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

Front guard flaps diagnostics appears.

The diagnostics menu “Front guard flaps” is divided into 3 pages.

Page 1: Sensor test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 3

Pos: 102.22.20.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.20.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.20.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

203

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.20.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Sensortest Frontschutzklappen (2) (Seite 1/3) @ 46\mod_1283348928359_78.docx @ 449833 @ @ 1

Sensor test front guard flaps (2) (page 1/3)

Fig. 156

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the function of the front guard flaps.

Switch Switch activated green

Switch not activated transparent

Description

S8

Pos: 102.22.20.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest @ 462\mod_1465895633693_78.docx @ 3112637 @ @ 1

Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.20.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 102.22.20.8 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altWARNUNG - Aktortest @ 301\mod_1413441650591_78.docx @ 2349581 @ @ 1

Front guard flaps

WARNING!

The functions are directly executed by energizing the actuators.

As a result, machine parts may start to move unexpectedly, persons may be captured and seriously hurt.

• Switch off PTO shaft.

• Deactivate tractor hydraulics.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

• The person performing the test must know the machine parts being actuated by controlling the actuators. If necessary, secure actuated machine components from unintentional lowering.

• Only perform the sensor test from a safe position outside the moving machine parts.

• Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone.

Pos: 102.22.20.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 102.22.20.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 102.22.20.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

204

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.20.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/3) @ 0\mod_1197618444025_78.docx @ 28286 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/3)

Pos: 102.22.20.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Aktorentest Frontschutzklappen (2/3) @ 280\mod_1405424928677_78.docx @ 2152487 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the “Front guard flaps”.

1

5 6 2

7 8

BM 400 0262_1

B C D

Fig. 157

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

2. Shows current flow with the actuator activated.

Pos: 102.22.20.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.20.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Tabelle Aktoren Hauptventile_Zusatsventil1+2 BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197619057915_78.docx @ 28325 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described here apply to all actuators related to valves (main valve, additional valve1 and additional valve2).

Valve Icon Description Switch on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y30 Additional valve 1

Pos: 102.22.20.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y41 Additional valve 2

5 6

205

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.20.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/3) @ 0\mod_1197620396431_78.docx @ 28345 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/3)

Pos: 102.22.20.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Aktorentest Frontschutzklappen (3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348925843_78.docx @ 449781 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the function of the “Front guard flaps”.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0263

Fig. 158

1. Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 102.22.20.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.20.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-7/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Frontschutzklappen (3/3) @ 46\mod_1283348929593_78.docx @ 449859 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the front guard flaps.

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y43 Front guard flaps 1

Y44 Front guard flaps 2

Pos: 102.22.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

206

Pos: 102.22.22.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMenü 4-1-9 ISOBUS Lenksystem @ 175\mod_1372314591267_78.docx @ 1498563 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.9 Menu 4-1-9 ISOBUS Steering System

Pos: 102.22.22.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Menü 4-1-9 „Autopilot“ Bild BM 400 @ 132\mod_1349353845372_78.docx @ 1171516 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

1

Fig. 159

Pos: 102.22.22.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Menü 4-1-9 „ISOBUS Lenksystem“ Text @ 175\mod_1372315598436_78.docx @ 1498592 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up “ISOBUS Steering System” menu.

• Select main menu 4 “Diagnostics” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

• Select menu 4-1-9 “ISOBUS Steering System” with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

ISOBUS steering system diagnostics is displayed.

Pos: 102.22.22.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Menü 4-1-9 ist in 2 Seiten aufgeteilt @ 175\mod_1372316264344_78.docx @ 1498621 @ @ 1

The “ISOBUS Steering System” diagnostics menu is divided into 2 pages

Page 1: Display diagnostics values

Page 2: Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.22.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüsteuerung der Seiten 1 bis 2 @ 132\mod_1349360133802_78.docx @ 1171748 @ @ 1

Menu Control of Pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 102.22.22.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.22.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.22.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

207

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.22.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest @ 462\mod_1465895633693_78.docx @ 3112637 @ @ 1

Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.22.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/WARNUNG - Aktortest @ 301\mod_1413441650591_78.docx @ 2349581 @ @ 1

WARNING!

The functions are directly executed by energizing the actuators.

As a result, machine parts may start to move unexpectedly, persons may be captured and seriously hurt.

• Switch off PTO shaft.

• Deactivate tractor hydraulics.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

• The person performing the test must know the machine parts being actuated by controlling the actuators. If necessary, secure actuated machine components from unintentional lowering.

• Only perform the sensor test from a safe position outside the moving machine parts.

• Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone.

Pos: 102.22.22.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 102.22.22.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

Pos: 102.22.22.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Der Aktortest /Testen, Funktion „Autopilot“ @ 175\mod_1372317573293_78.docx @ 1498650 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been installed on the machine for the

“ISOBUS Steering System” function.

Pos: 102.22.22.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Aktorentest Autopilot Bild BM 420 @ 276\mod_1404740901639_78.docx @ 2073394 @ @ 1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0097_1

Fig. 160

Pos: 102.22.22.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-4/Anzeige Spannung @ 30\mod_1251373725917_78.docx @ 286274 @ @ 1

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 102.22.22.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.22.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

208

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.22.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-9/BM 420 Autopilot / Lenksystem/Tabelle Aktoren Autopilot BM 420 @ 175\mod_1372317907399_78.docx @ 1498679 @ @ 1

Note

The displayed status displays are valid for all actuators that refer to the ISOBUS steering system.

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y54

Lock valve steering rear left

Y53

Lock valve steering rear right

Y52

Steering rear left

5 6

Y51

Steering rear right

7 8

Pos: 102.22.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

209

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.24.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Menü 4-1-10 Diagnose Arbeit BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316094827000_78.docx @ 714803 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.10 Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work

Fig. 161

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-6 "Diagnostics work" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Work diagnostics appears.

The "Work" diagnostics menu is divided into 6 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Sensor Test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Page 5: Actuator test

Page 6: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 6

Pos: 102.22.24.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.24.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.24.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

210

Pos: 102.22.24.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Arbeit (2) (Seite 1/6) BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316095969365_78.docx @ 714888 @ @ 1

Sensor test work (2) (page 1/6)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 162

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the work function.

Sensor Sensor OK green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Description

B10

B33

Pos: 102.22.24.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Arbeit (2) ( Seite 1) Zusatz Sensoren B57/B58 @ 81\mod_1316151350061_78.docx @ 715096 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor OK green

Sensor inactive transparent

Sensor not OK red

Suction return air filter

Hydraulic tank filling level

Description

B57

B58

Pressure filter steering hydraulics

Pressure filter work hydraulics

Pos: 102.22.24.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

211

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.24.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Sensortest Arbeit (2) (Seite 2/6) @ 9\mod_1219915289585_78.docx @ 124432 @ @ 1

Sensor test work (2) (page 2/6)

2 2

5 6

7

BM 400 0063_1

8

B C

Fig. 163

Sensor designation:

D

= Sensor B11 speed – front mowing unit

= Sensor B12 speed – right lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B13 speed – left lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B14 position – right lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B15 position – left lateral mowing unit

= Sensor B28 speed – right auger

= Sensor B29 speed – left auger

= Sensor B49 position transport position mowing unit left

Pos: 102.22.24.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Überschrift Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren (2) @ 0\mod_1197884083518_78.docx @ 29633 @ @ 1

= Sensor B48 position transport position mowing unit right

Status display of general sensors (2)

Pos: 102.22.24.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Statusanzeige der allgemeinen Sensoren @ 0\mod_1197556322007_78.docx @ 26073 @ @ 1

= Broken cable sensor

= Sensor alive

= Sensor not alive

= Sensor short circuit

Pos: 102.22.24.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

212

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.24.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest @ 462\mod_1465895633693_78.docx @ 3112637 @ @ 1

Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.24.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 102.22.24.14 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altWARNUNG - Aktortest @ 301\mod_1413441650591_78.docx @ 2349581 @ @ 1

WARNING!

The functions are directly executed by energizing the actuators.

As a result, machine parts may start to move unexpectedly, persons may be captured and seriously hurt.

• Switch off PTO shaft.

• Deactivate tractor hydraulics.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

• The person performing the test must know the machine parts being actuated by controlling the actuators. If necessary, secure actuated machine components from unintentional lowering.

• Only perform the sensor test from a safe position outside the moving machine parts.

• Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone.

Pos: 102.22.24.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 102.22.24.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 102.22.24.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

213

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.24.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884281565_78.docx @ 29671 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/6)

Pos: 102.22.24.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (3/6) @ 0\mod_1197884924049_78.docx @ 29747 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0064

Fig. 164

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 102.22.24.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.24.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 102.22.24.22 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (3/6) @ 0\mod_1197885546643_78.docx @ 29807 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y19 Main

Y22 Lateral mowing unit right lift

Y23 Lateral mowing unit right lower

5 6

Y27 Lateral mowing unit right fold down

7

Pos: 102.22.24.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

214

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.24.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 4/6) @ 0\mod_1197884308393_78.docx @ 29690 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 4/6)

Pos: 102.22.24.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885483846_78.docx @ 29787 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0065

Fig. 165

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 102.22.24.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.24.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 102.22.24.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (4/6) @ 0\mod_1197885035893_78.docx @ 29767 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y24 Lateral mowing unit left lift

1

Y25 Lateral mowing unit left lower

Y26 Lateral mowing unit left fold down

5 6

Pos: 102.22.24.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

215

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.24.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 5/6) @ 0\mod_1197884337908_78.docx @ 29709 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 5/6)

Pos: 102.22.24.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886146908_78.docx @ 29827 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0066

Fig. 166

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 102.22.24.32 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.24.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 102.22.24.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (5/6) @ 0\mod_1197886205518_78.docx @ 29847 @ @ 1

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y20 Lifting front mowing unit

1

Y21 Lowering front mowing unit

Pos: 102.22.24.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

216

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.24.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 6/6) @ 0\mod_1197884374705_78.docx @ 29728 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 6/6)

Pos: 102.22.24.37 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Aktorentest Arbeit (6/6) BM 420 @ 276\mod_1404743326483_78.docx @ 2074740 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

"Work" function.

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0017_1

Fig. 167

1.

Shows required voltage for the actuators.

Pos: 102.22.24.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.24.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit Hinweis @ 46\mod_1283405898156_78.docx @ 450075 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the work.

Pos: 102.22.24.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-10/Tabelle Aktoren Arbeit (6/6) BM 420 @ 51\mod_1288160770328_78.docx @ 478547 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y8 Front mowing unit drive

Y9 Side mowing unit drive, right

Y10 Side mowing unit drive, left

5 6

Pos: 102.22.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

217

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.26 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-11/Menü 4-1-11 „CAN-Bus“ BM 420_Caterpillar @ 175\mod_1372337098553_78.docx @ 1499665 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.11 Menu 4-1-11 CAN-Bus

CAN

Smart

Drive

DIOM KMC1

BM 420 0108

Fig. 168

Main menu 4 “Diagnostics” is called.

• Select menu 4-1-11 “CAN Bus” with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Diagnostics CAN bus appears.

CAN Bus participant:

Active Inactive or disconnected from CAN bus

Designation

Joystick

Control unit console (CUC)

SmartDrive

DIOM

Terminal

KMC1 (Krone machine controller)

ECM (Electronic Control Module) engine control unit

ISOBUS ECU (steering system)

(ECU = Electronic Control Unit)

Pos: 102.22.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAN = Controller Area Network

• Pressing menu key takes you back one menu level.

218

Pos: 102.22.28.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Menü 4-1-12 Fahrantrieb Überschrift @ 81\mod_1316154190621_78.docx @ 715190 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.12 Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear

Pos: 102.22.28.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Menü 4-1-12 Fahrantrieb Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316157923503_78.docx @ 715359 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 169

Pos: 102.22.28.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Menü 4-1-12 Fahrantrieb Menü aufrufen @ 81\mod_1316154489538_78.docx @ 715218 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-12 "Drive" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Drive diagnostics appears.

The "Travelling Gear" diagnostics menu is divided into 4 pages.

Page 1: Sensor Test

Page 2: Actuator test

Page 3: Actuator test

Page 4: Actuator test

Menu control for pages 1 to 4

Pos: 102.22.28.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.28.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.28.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

219

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.28.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) (Seite 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251718644413_78.docx @ 295583 @ @ 1

Travelling gear switch (1) (page 1/4)

Pos: 102.22.28.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Fig. 170

Pos: 102.22.28.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) BM 400/420/500 @ 0\mod_1197893098455_78.docx @ 30395 @ @ 1

= Road/Field release switch not activated

= Road/Field release switch activated

= Release switch travelling gear not activated.

= Travelling gear release switch activated

= Parking brake release switch not activated.

= Parking brake release switch activated

= Key axle separation not activated.

= Key axle separation activated

Pos: 102.22.28.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

220

Pos: 102.22.28.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb (2) (Seite 1/4) @ 30\mod_1251720587648_78.docx @ 295633 @ @ 1

Travelling gear (2) (page 1/4)

Pos: 102.22.28.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 171

Pos: 102.22.28.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Fahrantrieb (2) BM 400/ BM 500 @ 41\mod_1271236251527_78.docx @ 368967 @ @ 1

• Direction of travel; the number after the symbol is the current travel speed.

= Forward travel

= Neutral (stopped)

= Reverse travel

=

Cruise control active; the number after the icon is the saved speed for Tempomat operation in km/h.

=

Cruise control inactive

Type of drive

=

Axle separation active (only possible in Field mode)

=

=

Parking brake is applied

Emergency mode; allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone even if there are serious drive problems..

Pos: 102.22.28.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

D 025 Downhill mode

221

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.28.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3) (Seite1/4) @ 30\mod_1251716592773_78.docx @ 295533 @ @ 1

Drive sensor test (3) (page1/4)

Pos: 102.22.28.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Fig. 172

Pos: 102.22.28.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest dient zum Testen der Sensoren Fahrantrieb @ 60\mod_1297929188908_78.docx @ 562388 @ @ 1

The sensor test is used to test sensors that have been attached to the machine for the travelling gear function.

Pos: 102.22.28.18 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3_1) Tabellen BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316160005940_78.docx @ 715444 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor

OK gree n

Sensor not OK red

Sensor unknown transparent

Description

B5 Flush valve temperature

B7 High pressure

B22 Braking pressure

B25 Brake tank pressure

B38 Pivoting angle pump front axle

B39 Pivoting angle pump, rear axle

Pos: 102.22.28.19 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3_1) Tabellen Zusatz B56 @ 81\mod_1316160896568_78.docx @ 715474 @ @ 1

B56 Wheel motor return (pressure)

Pos: 102.22.28.20 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3_2 B40/K43) Tabellen BM 500 @ 60\mod_1297928941508_78.docx @ 562304 @ @ 1

Sensor Switch activated green

B40

Switch not activated yellow

Switch unknown transparent

Description

Brake pedal switch

Travelling gear switch K43

Pos: 102.22.28.21 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (3_3 D017) Tabellen BM 500 @ 60\mod_1297928866436_78.docx @ 562217 @ @ 1

Description

D 017

POWER inactive

POWER

Power limitation

Pos: 102.22.28.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

222

Pos: 102.22.28.23 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Sensortest Fahrantrieb (4) (Seite1/4) @ 30\mod_1251721794976_78.docx @ 295683 @ @ 1

Drive sensor test (4) (page1/4)

Pos: 102.22.28.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 420/Fahrantrieb-Schalter (1) Bild BM 420 @ 81\mod_1316158916883_78.docx @ 715416 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 173

Pos: 102.22.28.25 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Beschreibung der Zeile (4) @ 41\mod_1271234519480_78.docx @ 368865 @ @ 1

D018 = SD transmiss. Status (1 OK) (2 not OK)

D019 = drive level (1= drive level 1) (2=drive level 2)

D023 = Safety signal ( OK) ( not OK)

Pos: 102.22.28.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

D700 = Saf. IO Toggle analogue val. to digital

223

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.28.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest @ 462\mod_1465895633693_78.docx @ 3112637 @ @ 1

Actuator test

Pos: 102.22.28.28 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 3 Wartung/Nur für Monteure zugänglich @ 41\mod_1271770571352_78.docx @ 373115 @ @ 1

Access restricted to service engineers

Pos: 102.22.28.29 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/WARNUNG - Aktortest @ 301\mod_1413441650591_78.docx @ 2349581 @ @ 1

WARNING!

The functions are directly executed by energizing the actuators.

As a result, machine parts may start to move unexpectedly, persons may be captured and seriously hurt.

• Switch off PTO shaft.

• Deactivate tractor hydraulics.

• Only persons familiar with the machine are permitted to perform the actuator test.

• The person performing the test must know the machine parts being actuated by controlling the actuators. If necessary, secure actuated machine components from unintentional lowering.

• Only perform the sensor test from a safe position outside the moving machine parts.

• Make sure that there is no one in the danger zone.

Pos: 102.22.28.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Achtung: Vor dem Aktortest Maschine gegen Wegrollen sichern, und die Mähwerke auf den Boden absenken @ 47\mod_1285136923281_78.docx @ 455755 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Secure the machine against rolling and lower the mowing units to the ground prior to the actuator test.

Release conditions which have not been met (display in menu field (1)), but are necessary for the actuator test, need to be realised.

Pos: 102.22.28.31 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hinweis zu Aktoren @ 0\mod_1197611086806_78.docx @ 26722 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 102.22.28.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If an actuator is turned on, the next or previous page cannot be called. (If necessary, turn the actuator off and repeat the process)

224

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.28.33 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 2/4) @ 0\mod_1197622785056_78.docx @ 28464 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 2/4)

Pos: 102.22.28.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb (2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197900763705_78.docx @ 31005 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0069

Fig. 174

Pos: 102.22.28.35 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.28.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Fahrantrieb (2/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901026377_78.docx @ 31025 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Y5 Axle separation

Y6 1/2 absorption volume front axle

Pos: 102.22.28.37 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Y7 1/2 absorption volume rear axle

5 6

225

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.28.38 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 3/4) @ 0\mod_1197622875243_78.docx @ 28484 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 3/4)

Pos: 102.22.28.39 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Aktortest dient zum Testen, für die Funktion „Fahrantrieb“, verbauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.docx @ 295483 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

Pos: 102.22.28.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb (3/3) Bild BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283430681187_78.docx @ 450341 @ @ 1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0070_1

Fig. 175

Pos: 102.22.28.41 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.28.42 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Hinweis Statusanziege Gültigkeit Fahrantrieb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.docx @ 295123 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Pos: 102.22.28.43 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Fahrantrieb (3/3) BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197901795565_78.docx @ 31095 @ @ 1

Valve Icon Description Turn on the actuator

Turn off the actuator

Brake light reversing lights

Y45

Stop valve front axle

5 6

Y46

Stop valve rear axle

7

Pos: 102.22.28.44 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

226

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.28.45 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Aktorentest (Seite 4/4) @ 0\mod_1197622923400_78.docx @ 28504 @ @ 1

Actuator test (page 4/4)

Pos: 102.22.28.46 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Aktortest dient zum Testen, für die Funktion „Fahrantrieb“, verbauten Aktoren @ 30\mod_1251713178148_78.docx @ 295483 @ @ 1

The actuator test is used to test actuators that have been attached to the machine for the

“Travelling gear” function.

Pos: 102.22.28.47 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Aktorentest Fahrantrieb (4/4) BM 400 Bild @ 46\mod_1283433331343_78.docx @ 450396 @ @ 1

Fig. 176

Pos: 102.22.28.48 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mögliche Statusanzeige des angewählten Aktors @ 0\mod_1197611486993_78.docx @ 26760 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the selected actuator

Actuator turned off

Actuator turned on

Pos: 102.22.28.49 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/Hinweis Statusanziege Gültigkeit Fahrantrieb @ 30\mod_1251708457351_78.docx @ 295123 @ @ 1

Note

The status displays described above are valid for all actuators related to the travelling gear.

Pos: 102.22.28.50 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-12/BM 400/Tabelle Aktoren Fahrantrieb (4/4) BM 400 @ 46\mod_1283435088921_78.docx @ 450448 @ @ 1

Valve Symbol Description Switch on the actuator

Switch off the actuator

Y1 Front axle backward

Y2 Front axle forward

Y3 Rear axle backward

5 6

Y4 Rear axle forward

7

Pos: 102.22.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

227

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.30.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 „Elektronik“ Bild BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251724003570_78.docx @ 295789 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.13 Menu 4-1-13 Electronics

Fig. 177

Pos: 102.22.30.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 „Elektronik“ Text @ 0\mod_1197903920096_78.docx @ 31372 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-13 "Electronics" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Electronics diagnostics appears.

Pos: 102.22.30.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Freigabebedingungen nicht erfüllt @ 0\mod_1197561545538_78.docx @ 26549 @ @ 1

Note

For release conditions (1) not met see Section "Display of Release Conditions Not Met for

Diagnostics"

For faults (1) see Section "Display of Possible Faults for Diagnostics"

Pos: 102.22.30.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 Elektronik Bild Seite 1 und 2 BM 400 @ 30\mod_1251722625366_78.docx @ 295708 @ @ 1

Fig. 178

Pos: 102.22.30.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-13/Menü 4-1-13 Elektronik Text blättern @ 0\mod_1197904126361_78.docx @ 31410 @ @ 1

• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that lie within a valid range.

• The symbol identifies diagnostic values that do not lie within a valid range.

• To scroll forward, use the

Pos: 102.22.30.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.docx @ 283963 @ @ 1 key. To scroll backward, use the

B key.

Pos: 102.22.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

228

Pos: 102.22.32.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menü 4-1-14 Dieselmotor (1/3) BM 420 Bild_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358244087772_78.docx @ 1271051 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.14 Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine

Info centre "EasyTouch"

D204 D200

D201

5 6

1 D211

D

7 8

BM 420 0109

B C

Fig.179

Pos: 102.22.32.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menü 4-1-14 Dieselmotor (1/3) BM 400/420/500 Text @ 30\mod_1251727027851_78.docx @ 296193 @ @ 1

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-14 "Diesel engine" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Diesel engine diagnostics" appears.

Pos: 102.22.32.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor (Seite 1/3) BM 420/500 @ 30\mod_1251781350349_78.docx @ 296265 @ @ 1

Diesel engine page 1

= Engine speed

= Engine cooling water temperature

= Engine oil pressure

= Cooling water level

Pos: 102.22.32.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüsteuerung der Seiten 1 bis 3 @ 30\mod_1251782549208_78.docx @ 296311 @ @ 1

Menu control of pages 1 to 3

Pos: 102.22.32.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menüsteuerung (1/2) BM 400/420/500 @ 30\mod_1251781668115_78.docx @ 296290 @ @ 1

• Activating key for causes the next maintenance interval to be displayed.

• Activating key for the C key for the B

B

key for

causes diesel engine diagnostics to be displayed. causes the next page to be displayed. causes the previous page to be displayed.

Pos: 102.22.32.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

229

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.32.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor (Seite 2u3) Bild BM 420_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358244241425_78.docx @ 1271080 @ @ 1

Diesel Engine Pages 2 and 3

D207

14 °C

D210

69 °C

B36

D208 D209

l/h P

2.10

bar

B34

3185 mV

53 %

D203 Auslastung (Drehzahl)

70 %

D202 Auslastung (Volllast)

18 %

5

7

6

8

B C D

BM 420 0110

Fig. 180

Page 2

Pos: 102.22.32.8 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 2 Symbolerklärung BM 420_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358244317966_78.docx @ 1271109 @ @ 1

= Temperature fuel

= Current fuel consumption

= Temperature charge air

P

Pos: 102.22.32.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 2 Motorauslastung @ 51\mod_1288171090031_78.docx @ 478802 @ @ 1

= Charge air pressure

• Engine capacity, speed

• Maximum engine capacity

Pos: 102.22.32.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14Dieselmotor Seite 2 Sensoren B34 B36 BM 400/420 @ 348\mod_1435752536698_78.docx @ 2618644 @ @ 1

Sensor Sensor OK green

B34

Page 3

Sensor not OK red

B36

Pos: 102.22.32.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 3 Symbolerklärung_T2_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358244414282_78.docx @ 1271138 @ @ 1

V

= Fuel pressure

= Electrical voltage

= Degree of contamination of the diesel particle filter

Pos: 102.22.32.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Dieselmotor Seite 3 Symbolerklärung T2 BM 420/500 @ 60\mod_1297924686229_78.docx @ 562090 @ @ 1

= Exhaust gas temperature

Description

Diesel tank filling level

Air filter contamination

Pos: 102.22.32.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

230

Pos: 102.22.32.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-14/Menü Dieselmotor Wartungsintervall_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358246536647_78.docx @ 1271233 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Nächster Service

250 h

5 6

B C D

Fig.181

Pos: 102.22.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Activating key for

7 8

BM 420 0112

causes diesel engine diagnostics to be displayed.

231

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.34 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-15/Menü 4-1-15 Joystick (1/2) Fendt @ 41\mod_1271397831477_78.docx @ 371180 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.15 Menu 4-1-15 Joystick

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 500 136

Fig.182

The key functions of the joystick can be checked in the Joystick Diagnostics menu.

Note

When bringing up the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed when the joystick is activated in the "Joystick" Diagnostics menu.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-15 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Joystick Diagnostics" appears. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 102.22.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

232

Pos: 102.22.36 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-15/Menü 4-1-15 Joystick (2/2) FENDT @ 41\mod_1271397833149_78.docx @ 371205 @ @ 1

Menu control:

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6 5 6

B C D

7 8

BM 500 136

B C D

7 8

BM 500 137

Fig.183

Pos: 102.22.37 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key under the menu. the C key under the

softkey brings up the "Work" menu.

softkey to bring up the next page of the "Joystick" menu. the C key under the softkey to bring up the previous page of the "Joystick"

A representation of the joystick appears in the display. If a function is activated on the joystick, the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.

Possible status display of the activated key

Key not activated

Key activated

Broken cable

Short circuit

233

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.38.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Menü 4-1-16 „Bedieneinheit Konsole“ (1/2) Bild BM 420 @ 338\mod_1430905189915_78.docx @ 2567736 @ 3 @ 1

8.13.16 Menu 4-1-16 Control Unit Console

4-1-16

1

5 6

2

5 6

7 8 7 8

B C D

BM 400 0081

B C D

BM 420 0047_1

Fig. 184

Pos: 102.22.38.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Menü 4-1-16 „Bedieneinheit Konsole“ (1/2) @ 0\mod_1197963604168_78.docx @ 31756 @ @ 1

Both the release switches and the keys on the console can be checked for their functionality in the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu.

Note

When bringing up the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed in the "Control unit console" Diagnostics menu when the release switches or keys are activated.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-16 "Control unit console" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

Control unit console diagnostics appears.

Pos: 102.22.38.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Menüerkärung für Seite 1 bis 2 @ 51\mod_1288100713546_78.docx @ 478278 @ @ 1

Explanation of menu for pages 1 to 2:

Pos: 102.22.38.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/nächste_vorherige Menüebene zurück @ 0\mod_1197561687804_78.docx @ 26587 @ @ 1 the C key to bring up the next page of the menu.

B key to bring up the previous page of the menu.

Pos: 102.22.38.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

234

Pos: 102.22.38.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Menü 4-1-16 Bedienkonsole Freigabeschalter (2/2) BM 420 @ 338\mod_1430906118546_78.docx @ 2567926 @ @ 1

1

2

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0047_1

Fig. 185

Release switch (1) activated inactive Release

Road/field

Autopilot

Parking brake

Foot pedal

Traction drive

Axle separation

Swath hood

Seat switch

Door switch

Front guard flaps (optional)

Pos: 102.22.38.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Anzeige der Spannungen Konsole @ 30\mod_1251791240708_78.docx @ 296666 @ @ 1

Display of voltages (2)

Display (voltage – ignition stage 1)

Display (voltage – ignition stage 2)

Pos: 102.22.38.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Display (voltage – electronics)

Display (fixed voltage regulator)

Info centre "EasyTouch"

235

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.38.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Diagnose Sitzschalter @ 60\mod_1298014175977_78.docx @ 563611 @ @ 1

Diagnostics seat switch

Pos: 102.22.38.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-16/Bedieneinheit Konsole Seite 2 Bild BigM 420 @ 277\mod_1404827971515_78.docx @ 2079543 @ @ 1

KMC1

Smart

Drive mV

1736 mV

1870

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 420 0113_1

Fig. 186

Pos: 102.22.38.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Mögliche Statusanzeige der betätigten Schalter @ 132\mod_1349418754035_78.docx @ 1172189 @ @ 1

Possible status display of the activated key

Switch not activated

Switch activated

Cable break

Short circuit

Pos: 102.22.38.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Mögliche Statusanzeige der betätigten Schalter Diagnose Sitzschalter zeitverzögert @ 277\mod_1404896265122_78.docx @ 2080335 @ @ 1

Seat switch time delay

Pos: 102.22.39 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

236

Pos: 102.22.40 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-1-17 /Menü 4-1-17 „Display“ @ 0\mod_1197973595090_78.docx @ 31795 @ 3 @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

The "Display" diagnostics menu is used to check key functions , the rotary potentiometer and the key next to the rotary potentiometer.

Fig. 187

Note

When bringing up the "Display" Diagnostics menu, the diesel engine must be stopped. No functions are performed when keys are activated in the "Display" Diagnostics menu.

Call the "Diagnostics" main menu 4.

• Select menu 4-1-17 "Display" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Display diagnostics" appears.

A representation of the display appears in the display. If a function is activated on the display, the status of the function that is performed appears in the display.

Possible status display of the activated key

Key not activated

Key activated the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 102.22.41 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

237

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.42.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Menü 4-2 „Fehlerliste“ @ 31\mod_1251804579052_78.docx @ 298124 @ 2 @ 1

8.14 Menu 4-2 Error list

Fig. 188

The main menu level is active.

• Select main menu 4-2 with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Error list" appears.

= Current error

= Fault storage

= Current error, diesel engine

= Error storage, diesel engine

Current errors

The display shows the fault list with the current faults. The time, status, error number and designation are shown.

• Status

C = Error has come (Come)

G = Error has gone (Gone)

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 102.22.42.2 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Durch Drücken der Taste 7 bzw. 8 für Softkey die allgemeinen Infomeldungen aufrufen. @ 31\mod_1251798076490_78.docx @ 297679 @ @ 1

Pos: 102.22.42.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• The general information messages are displayed by pressing the key 7 or softkey

for

238

Pos: 102.22.42.4 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Fehlerspeicher @ 31\mod_1251804762302_78.docx @ 298179 @ @ 1

Error Storage

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 189

• To display error storage, activate the B key under the softkey.

Error storage is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation are shown.

• Status

C = Error has come (Come)

G = Error has gone (Gone)

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 102.22.42.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Menüsteuerung Pfeile erklären @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.docx @ 298009 @ @ 1

Menu control:

= Activating the key allows you to scroll up.

=

=

Pos: 102.22.42.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

=

Activating the key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.

Activating the 6 key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.

Activating the key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.

239

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.42.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/aktuelle Fehler Dieselmotor @ 278\mod_1404910087187_78.docx @ 2082333 @ @ 1

Current diesel engine errors

1

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0089_1

Fig. 190

• To display current errors of the diesel engine, press the C key under the softkey.

The display shows the error list with the current errors of the diesel engine. Error codes are displayed with a sequential number.

Pos: 102.22.42.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.

240

Pos: 102.22.42.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Fehlerspeicher Dieselmotor @ 278\mod_1404973176571_78.docx @ 2083358 @ @ 1

Diesel engine error storage

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Fig. 191

• To display diesel engine error storage, activate the softkey.

D key under the

The display shows error storage for the diesel engine (in chronological order). Error codes, the status, date and time are indicated with a sequential number.

Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.

Status

1 = Error set

2 = Error deleted

• You can use the 7 key down to the end of the list and the key to scroll up.

• To display current errors, use the A key under the softkey.

Pos: 102.22.42.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

241

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.42.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Infomeldungen Allgemein/Service Bild @ 31\mod_1251805475755_78.docx @ 298888 @ @ 1

Fig. 192

General information messages

Pos: 102.22.42.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Status der Allgemeinen-Infomeldungen @ 31\mod_1251808882552_78.docx @ 298912 @ @ 1

Service information messages

General information messages

The general information message is arranged chronologically. The date, time, status, error numbers, and designation are shown.

Status:

C = Error has come

G = Error has gone

A = Error acknowledged

Pos: 102.22.42.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Status der Service-Infomeldungen @ 31\mod_1251809979693_78.docx @ 299120 @ @ 1

Service information messages

Service information messages are arranged chronologically. The date, time, error number and designation are shown.

Pos: 102.22.42.14 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Menüsteuerung Pfeile erklären @ 31\mod_1251803909068_78.docx @ 298009 @ @ 1

Menu control:

=

=

=

Activating the key allows you to scroll up.

Activating the key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.

Activating the 6 key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.

=

Pos: 102.22.42.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-2/Blätern über die Tasten A bis D @ 31\mod_1251809467021_78.docx @ 298956 @ @ 1

Activating the key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.

• Activating the key brings up the basic screen

• By pressing the key B you get back to menu “Error list” key C the next page “Service information message” will be displayed

Pos: 102.22.42.16 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.docx @ 283963 @ @ 1 key D the previous page “General information message” will be displayed

Pos: 102.22.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

242

Pos: 102.22.44 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-3/Menü 4-3 „Serviceebene“ @ 0\mod_1197981326387_78.docx @ 32370 @ 2 @ 1

8.15 Menu 4-3 "Service level"

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 193

The main menu level is active.

• Select main menu 4-3 with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The "Service level" is protected by a password and is accessible only to the Krone service staff. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

243

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.46.1 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4 „Information“ @ 175\mod_1372233541022_78.docx @ 1497183 @ 2 @ 1

8.16 Menu 4-4 Information

The “Information” main menu is divided into up to 4 menus, depending on how the machine is equipped:

4-4-1

Main Menu 4 Information

Designation

Joystick

4-4-2

Software

4-4-3

Machine

4-4-8

Released Software packages

5 6

7 8

B C D

BX500127_1

Fig. 194

Pos: 102.22.46.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press menu key to bring up main menu 4 “Information”.

• Select “Information” main menu with the rotary potentiometer and press the rotary potentiometer.

244

Pos: 102.22.46.3 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-1 „Joystick“ Fendt @ 41\mod_1271398876524_78.docx @ 371280 @ 3 @ 1

8.16.1 Menu 4-4-1 Joystick

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.46.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.195

The main menu "Information" is active.

• Select menu 4-4-1 "Joystick" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

"Joystick information" appears. the key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

245

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.46.5 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4Menü 4-4-2 „Software“ Bild BM 400 @ 456\mod_1464679733494_78.docx @ 3090305 @ 3 @ 1

8.16.2 Menu 4-4-2 Software

Fig. 196

Pos: 102.22.46.6 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-2 „Software“ Text BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251872307697_78.docx @ 299807 @ @ 1

The main menu "Information" is active.

• Select menu 4-4-2 "Software" with the rotary potentiometer

• Press the rotary potentiometer

"Software information" appears. The display shows the software versions of the various controllers.

Pos: 102.22.46.7 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 1 BM 400 @ 31\mod_1251867821525_78.docx @ 299652 @ @ 1

Page 1

= Terminal

Note

If the versions of resources and DLLs do not match for the terminal, the version numbers appear in red.

= SmartDrive

Pos: 102.22.46.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

= KMC1

Note

If the KMC1 software is not designed for your machine type, the version numbers appear in red.

the B key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the second page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer

246

Pos: 102.22.46.9 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-2 Seite (1/2/3/4) Bild BM 420_Caterpillar @ 462\mod_1465908703504_78.docx @ 3113368 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

C13-T4I-IND-P6.0

150200029-14

5 6

1 2 3 4 1 2

B C

3

D

4

7 8

BM 400 0096

Fig. 197

Pos: 102.22.46.10 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 2 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868059010_78.docx @ 299677 @ @ 1

Page 2

= Joystick

= CU the C key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the third page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 102.22.46.11 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 3 ECM/Autopilot BM 420_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358254031899_78.docx @ 1271653 @ @ 1

Page 3

= ECM (Electronic Control Module) / Engine Control Unit

=ISOBUS ECU (ECU = Electronic-Control-Unit)

• The fourth page is displayed by activating the potentiometer.

Pos: 102.22.46.12 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Seite 4 BM 400/500 @ 31\mod_1251868464775_78.docx @ 299727 @ @ 1

Page 4

D key or by turning on the rotary

= DIOM

Pos: 102.22.46.13 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Mit Drehpoti Menüebene zurück @ 29\mod_1251353619073_78.docx @ 283963 @ @ 1 the key or turning the rotary potentiometer causes the first page to be displayed on the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 102.22.46.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Pressing key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

247

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.22.46.15 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4/Menü 4-4-3 Maschine_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358254800456_78.docx @ 1271712 @ 3 @ 1

8.16.3 Menu 4-4-3 Machine

1

Software Part Number

Software Discription

ECM Part Number

ECM Serial Number

123456

4196671-00

C13-T4I-IND-P6.0.2

3278513-00

16586336QY

Fig. 198

Main menu "Information" is called.

• Select menu 4-4-3 “Machine” with the rotary potentiometer.

Pos: 102.22.46.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows machine information as well as engine information.

248

Pos: 102.22.46.17 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Hauptmenü 4 Service/Menü 4-4Menü 4-4-8 Anzeige Software-Pakete @ 456\mod_1464682013854_78.docx @ 3090692 @ 3 @ 1

8.16.4 Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

Pos: 102.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

B B C D

Fig. 199

Main menu “Information” is called.

• Select menu 4-4-8 “Display Software Packages” with the incremental encoder.

• Press incremental encoder.

The display “Software Packages” is shown.

The display shows the software packages of the machine.

Status displays:

Software is activated

Software is not activated

BM 420 0117

249

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.24 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Menü 5 Grundbild/Menü 5 „Grundbild“ BM 420_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358260502180_78.docx @ 1271950 @ 2 @ 1

8.17 Menu 5 Basic Screen

Pos: 102.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 200

The main menu is active.

• Select menu 5 "Machine" with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The “Basic Screen” is shown.

250

Pos: 102.26 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFehlermeldungen @ 39\mod_1268635505910_78.docx @ 360426 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 102.27 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Menü 5 Grundbild/Fehlermeldung @ 39\mod_1268635725222_78.docx @ 360450 @ @ 1

Info centre "EasyTouch"

5 6

7 8

BM 400 0113_1

B C D

Fig. 201

If an error occurs on the machine, the error message appears in the display. The error message and the fault code are displayed.

• The error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .

• The acoustic signal can be turned off with the B key under the softkey .

Note

Pos: 102.28 /BA/Bedienung /Falscher Umgang mit Fehlermeldungen @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.docx @ 358355 @ @ 1

For a list of error messages, error description and possible cause of error and remedy of error, see Appendix A – Error Messages.

Pos: 102.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects on the machine

Effect: serious subsequent damages to the machine

• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, the machine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off

• Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately

251

Info centre "EasyTouch"

Pos: 102.30 /BA/Info-Center/BiG M 400 / 420 / 500/Hauptmenüs/Menü 5 Grundbild/Infomeldung @ 0\mod_1197986377200_78.docx @ 32543 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 103 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 202

If one or several conditions are not met to carry out an action, the information message will be displayed in the information section of settings (IV). The information message and the information code are displayed.

Acknowledging the information message

The error message can be confirmed with the key under softkey .

252

Pos: 104.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Erstinbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196314201498_78.docx @ 5855 @ 1 @ 1

Commissioning

9 Commissioning

Pos: 104.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Fehlende Schutztücher @ 0\mod_1196314289764_78.docx @ 5874 @ @ 1

Danger! - Missing guard cloths

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

Pos: 104.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSchutztücher montieren @ 35\mod_1257494335719_78.docx @ 329260 @ 2 @ 1

• The machine may be taken into operation only after all the safety devices have been installed.

9.1 Fitting the guard cloths

Pos: 104.4 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Schutztücher montieren @ 0\mod_1196314517108_78.docx @ 5913 @ @ 1

The lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the guard cloths.

Pos: 104.5 /Überschriften/Zwischenüberschriften/P-T/Seitliche Mähwerke abklappen @ 510\mod_1501667638239_78.docx @ 3496858 @ @ 1

Folding down lateral mowing units

Pos: 104.6 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358845236367_78.docx @ 1278766 @ @ 1

P

Fig. 203

1)

2)

Main battery switch

Parking brake release switch

3) Traction drive release switch

Pos: 104.7 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Voraussetzung @ 142\mod_1357807642606_78.docx @ 1263205 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Pos: 104.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

253

Commissioning

Pos: 104.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Absenken des Mähwerks in Arbeitsstellung BiGM400 @ 0\mod_1196315401623_78.docx @ 5993 @ @ 1

Danger! - Lowering mowing unit into working position

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Do not lower the mowing units until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing units.

Pos: 104.10 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Mähwerke absenken BM 420 Bild @ 49\mod_1287043334531_78.docx @ 464528 @ @ 1

4

6

12

BM 420 0013

Fig. 204

Pos: 104.11 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Motor Starten / Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld in Position Feldbetrieb schalten @ 145\mod_1359702988639_78.docx @ 1301365 @ @ 1

• Start the engine.

• Move release switch for road/field to field mode position.

Pos: 104.12 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Mähwerke absenken BM 420_Caterpillar/MAN Text @ 143\mod_1358846761095_78.docx @ 1278854 @ @ 1

Pos: 104.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Right lateral mowing unit

• To lower the mowing unit to headland position, press and hold down keys (12 and 6) until the mowing unit has reached the headland position.

• Press key (6) once to lower the mowing unit to working position.

Left lateral mowing unit

• To lower the mowing unit to headland position, press and hold down keys (12 and 4) until the mowing unit has reached the headland position.

• Press key (4) once to lower the mowing unit to working position.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

254

Pos: 104.14 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMontagebeschreibung @ 0\mod_1196317382342_78.docx @ 6137 @ 3 @ 1

9.1.1 Description of Installation

Pos: 104.15 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme (2012-08-13 11:36:55) @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.docx @ 6156 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Pos: 104.16 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Darstellung Schutztuchmontage Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196317641342_78.docx @ 6175 @ 3 @ 1

3

Commissioning

3

1

Fig. 205

1

Side guard cloths

2

Front guard cloths

3

Mowing Unit

2

1 1

2 1

BM 400 0195

255

Commissioning

9.1.2

Fig. 206:

Fit the guard cloths (1) to the mowing unit (5) using the enclosed strip (2), washer (3) and bolt

(4).

Note

The hem of the guard cloths should always face the inside.

Guard cloths (CRI with upper roller drive)

Pos: 104.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Abb. 207

258 622

150

150 232 163

BMII-329_1

256

Pos: 104.18 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Rückstrahler montieren_Überschrift 2 @ 510\mod_1501665889761_78.docx @ 3496826 @ 2 @ 1

9.2 Installing Rear Reflectors

Commissioning

2

2 3 2

BM 420 0155

Fig. 208

The rear reflectors are on the left side of the machine in the storage compartment with the hardware required to mount them.

Pos: 104.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Mount the rear reflectors (2) on the lamp support (3).

257

Commissioning

Pos: 104.20 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/SMV-Kennzeichnungstafel anbringen @ 480\mod_1475052648972_78.docx @ 3236175 @ 3 @ 1

9.2.1 Mounting the SMV Sign (slow moving vehicle)

In the USA, the SMV sign (1) must be mounted when driving on public roads.

1

Fig. 209

For machines being delivered to the USA, the SMV sign is included in the scope of delivery.

2

1

Pos: 104.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 210

• Take the SMV sign (1) out of the tool box on the left-hand machine side and slide it on the premounted holder (2) at the lamp support.

258

Pos: 104.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEinbau der Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1196318620905_78.docx @ 6255 @ 2 @ 1

Commissioning

9.3 Installation of Cutter Blades

Pos: 104.23 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme (2012-08-13 11:36:55) @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.docx @ 6156 @ @ 1

Pos: 104.24 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Einbau der Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1196318744030_78.docx @ 6274 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Pos: 104.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The lateral mowing units must be folded down to be able to install the cutter blades.

See chapter on initial start-up "Folding Down Lateral Mowing Units".

To install cutter blades:

See the chapter on maintenance of mowing units "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with Blade

Screw Connection" and "Blade Changing on Cutting Discs with Quick Blade Release"

259

Commissioning

Pos: 104.26 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/RReifendruck prüfen/einstellen @ 467\mod_1468999993965_78.docx @ 3148829 @ 2 @ 1

9.4 Checking/setting the tyre pressure

Pos: 104.27 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Reifenluftdruck/Reifenluftdruck prüfen / einstellen BM 420 @ 181\mod_1377000810830_78.docx @ 1553183 @ @ 1

The air pressure in the tyres is increased ex works to prevent so called base plates on the machine.

• Measure the tyre pressure with instrument.

If the tyre pressure is higher than the values in the table of technical data:

• Set the tyre pressure with the instrument according to the table, refer to chapter “Technical

Data of the Machine”.

Pos: 105 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

260

Pos: 106.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327075811_78.docx @ 6375 @ 3 @ 1

10 Start-up

Pos: 106.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/PPrüfungen vor Inbetriebnahme @ 0\mod_1196327145451_78.docx @ 6394 @ 3 @ 1

Start-up

10.1 Check before Start-up

Pos: 106.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Einstellarbeiten / Einstellungen/Gefahr - Einstellarbeiten Selbsfahrer @ 0\mod_1196327276045_78.docx @ 6432 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected movement of the machine

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is at a standstill!

• Switching off the engine

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back

Pos: 106.4 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/Tägliche Prüfungen @ 0\mod_1196327023811_78.docx @ 6451 @ 3 @ 1

• Remove the ignition key.

• Switch off the main battery switch.

10.2 Daily checks

Pos: 106.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

To perform daily tests, the lateral mowing units and the front mowing unit must be in working position.

Note - Daily checks

Effect: Ensures the safety of the machine and extends the machine’s service life

Regular performance of daily checks on the machine will ensure its safety and significantly extend the machine’s service life.

261

Start-up

Pos: 106.6 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An der Grundmaschine_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358405039386_78.docx @ 1273434 @ 1 @ 1

10.2.1 On the Basic Machine

• Before starting up the machine, lubricate thoroughly.

• Check the protective equipments and replace them, if necessary.

• Check the fuel level.

• Check the screws for tightness.

• Check the coolant level.

• Clean engine compartment and intake sieve.

• Check tyres visually for cuts and breaks.

• Check the tyre pressure.

• Perform a pilot lamp test.

• Perform a light function test.

• Check the brakes for functionality.

• Check the oil level on all gearboxes.

• Check the hydraulic tank.

• Check the engine.

• Check the transfer gearbox.

For further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter

"Maintenance of Basic Machine" and "Maintenance – Engine".

Pos: 106.7 /BA/Inbetriebnahme/Big M 400/500/An den Mähwerken BM 420 @ 184\mod_1378823722425_78.docx @ 1581410 @ 3 @ 1

10.2.2 On the Mowing Units

Pos: 107 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

• Make certain screws are in place and tight.

• Check safety devices and guard cloths for wear and damage and replace, if necessary.

Checking oil level on:

• Main gearbox lateral mower

• Angular gear/front mower

• Input gearbox/front mower (CV/CRI)

• Shifting gear/front mower (CV)

• Angular gear/front mower (CRI)

• Gearbox for upper roller drive (CRI)

• Cutter bar/front mower (CV / CRI)

• Cutter bar/lateral mower

For further information about how tasks are designed, please refer to chapter

“Maintenance - Mowing Units”

262

Pos: 108.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/F-J/Fahren und Transport @ 0\mod_1196330049217_78.docx @ 6553 @ 1 @ 1

11

Pos: 108.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/TTransport Straßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196330270405_78.docx @ 6572 @ 2 @ 1

Driving and Transport

Driving and Transport

11.1 Transport / Road Travel

Pos: 108.3 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Zum Transport müssen die Mähwerke hochgeklappt sein. @ 0\mod_1196330402389_78.docx @ 6591 @ @ 1

The mowing units must be folded up for transport.

Pos: 108.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Fahren und Transport/Gefahr Straßenfahrt,Mitfahren,Fahrverhalten BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196330503498_78.docx @ 6611 @ @ 1

Danger! - Road travel, passengers and handling

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

The following conditions must be met for road travel:

• The mowing units must be in transport position.

• Move the side guards of the front mowing unit right and left to transport position.

• The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position I (road travel).

• The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position II (travelling gear on).

• Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

• When driving on public roads, the provisions of the Road Traffic Licensing Regulations must be adhered to (lighting, identification).

• To meet the requirements to maintain sufficient distance from overhead power lines the total height of the machine must not exceed 4 m (13 ft).

• When driving on public roads, lower the front axle to achieve a transport height of max. 4 m.

• Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.

• Never drive with an engaged parking brake.

• Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.

Pos: 108.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to prevailing driving conditions.

• Note that the machine swings out when cornering.

263

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.6 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Vorbereitung für die Transport- /Straßenfahrt @ 0\mod_1196330928139_78.docx @ 6630 @ 2 @ 1

11.2 Preparation for transport/road travel

• Fold up the guards on the mowing units.

• Lower the hydraulic axle suspension. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic

Axle Suspension".)

• Fold up the mowing units. (See chapter "Operation – Mowing Units" (Transport Position).)

• Move the front mowing unit to centre position. (with sideshift option)

• Make certain the lock has engaged.

• Close the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

• The "Road / Field" release switch must be in position (I) (road travel).

Pos: 108.7 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Schutze hochklappen @ 0\mod_1196331136248_78.docx @ 6733 @ 3 @ 1

• The "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position (II) (travelling gear on).

11.2.1 Folding Up the Guards

Caution! - Effect: Damage to the machine

Check every time before transport to make certain the outer side guards (2) of the lateral mowing units right/left have automatically folded up into transport position.

If they have not, repeat the process for folding up the lateral mowing units. It may be necessary to move the outer side guards into transport position manually before the lateral mowing units are folded up.

2

2

1

1

BM 400 0196

Pos: 108.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 211

Always move the side guard (1) of the front mowing unit from the right and left sides to the transport position before road travel.

264

Pos: 108.9 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Frontmähwerk in Mittelstellung bringen BM 420 @ 49\mod_1286974134093_78.docx @ 464223 @ 3 @ 1

11.2.2

Driving and Transport

Moving the Front Mowing Unit To Central Position (with Sideshift Option)

24

25

BM 420 0012

Fig.212

Activate the (24,25) keys on the multi-function lever to move the front mowing unit to central position.

Note

Pos: 108.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The front mower is in central position as soon as the arrow (1) is aligned to the centre of the top link (2).

265

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFehlermeldung 1414 bzw. 1415 @ 185\mod_1379514238841_78.docx @ 1597203 @ 3 @ 1

11.2.3 Error Message 1414 or 1415

Pos: 108.12 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Warnung Fehlermeldung 1414 bzw. 1415 mißachtet BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379482583650_78.docx @ 1596185 @ @ 1

WARNING!

If the error message „1414 or 1415“ appears in the display when driving on the road, the lateral mowing units are not locked mechanically in transport position. They may fold down unintentionally. Do not ignore the error message “1414 or 1415” in the display! Danger to life!

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears when driving on the road, stop the machine immediately and correct the error.

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears before starting, then the machine must not be operated. Correct the error.

Pos: 108.13 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Verriegelung prüfen BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379513026864_78.docx @ 1597174 @ @ 1

1

BM 400 0147_3

Fig. 213

Pos: 108.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The sensors (1) on the ratchets detect whether the mechanical lockings of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position, right and left machine side.

The error message „1414 mowing unit right not in transport position” or “1415 mowing unit left not in transport position” appears if the lateral mowing units are not in transport position when driving in road mode.

Correct the error, refer to the error list in the appendix.

266

Pos: 108.15 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Absperrhahn am Frontausleger sperren @ 0\mod_1196333122498_78.docx @ 6832 @ 3 @ 1

11.2.4 Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger

Driving and Transport

B

1

A

BMII-285

Fig. 214:

Pos: 108.16 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFreigabeschalter Straße/Feld @ 0\mod_1196320452967_78.docx @ 6351 @ 3 @ 1

• Set the shut-off valve (1) on the front to the closed position (position B). The shut-off valve is located under the front guard.

11.2.5 Release switch – road/field

Pos: 108.17 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld in Position bringen @ 0\mod_1196333385858_78.doc x @ 6851 @ @ 1

1 II

I

Pos: 108.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 215

• Set the road safety switch to "Road travel" position. (Position I)

BM 400 0007

267

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFreigabeschalter Fahrantrieb @ 0\mod_1196319179092_78.docx @ 6293 @ 3 @ 1

11.2.6 Release switch travelling gear

Pos: 108.20 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Freigabeschalter Fahrantrieb in Position bringen @ 0\mod_1196333615201_78.doc x @ 6870 @ @ 1

1 II

I

BM 400 0010

Pos: 108.21 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 216

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position (II) (travelling gear on).

268

Pos: 108.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMotor anlassen @ 0\mod_1196338713030_78.docx @ 6889 @ 2 @ 1

Driving and Transport

11.3 Starting the engine

Pos: 108.23 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete WarnhinweiseWarnung - Motor nicht in geschlossenen Räumen laufen lassen (GA) @ 451\mod_1462884110769_78.docx @ 3067402 @ @ 1

Warning!

Risk of poisoning from toxic exhaust gases!

If the machine is operated in closed rooms without adequate ventilation, the pollutant load increases in the air.

• Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.

• Provide the room with adequate ventilation.

Pos: 108.24 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358845236367_78.docx @ 1278766 @ @ 1

P

Fig. 217

1)

2)

Main battery switch

Parking brake release switch

3) Traction drive release switch

Pos: 108.25 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Voraussetzung @ 142\mod_1357807642606_78.docx @ 1263205 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Pos: 108.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

269

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.27 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Motor anlassen Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1357745430193_78.docx @ 1262774 @ @ 1

BMII-187

Fig. 218

Starting the engine

• Turn the ignition key to “III” position.

If the engine does not start within 30 seconds:

• Release the ignition key and turn it to “0” position.

• Repeat the starting process after 2 minutes.

If the engine starts:

• Release the ignition key and check the “engine fault” indicator lamp.

If the “engine fault” indicator lamp goes out:

• Operate the engine in idle run until the cooling water temperature display rises.

If the “engine fault” indicator lamp does not go out:

• Switch off the engine and rectify the fault.

Pos: 108.28 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Caterpillar Motor anlassen Betriebs- und Wartungshandbuch beachten @ 142\mod_1357809008723_78.docx @ 1263324 @ @ 1

Pos: 108.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If you need any further information, please refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual chapter Operation „Starting the Engine“.

270

Pos: 108.30 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Abwürgen des Motors @ 122\mod_1344589334650_78.docx @ 1120831 @ 3 @ 1

11.3.1 Killing the Engine

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.31 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SStarten mit einer Hilfsbatterie @ 0\mod_1196345290139_78.docx @ 7052 @ 3 @ 1

CAUTION! - Damage to the engine due to the heat accumulation after killing the engine

If you kill the engine while it is at operating temperature, damages to the engine may occur due to the heat that accumulates as cooling is missing.

• If you kill the engine while it is at operating temperature, start it again immediately.

11.3.2 Starting with an Auxiliary Battery

Pos: 108.32 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Starten mit einer externen Stromquelle: Warnung @ 143\mod_1358836059040_78.docx @ 1278551 @ @ 1

WARNING!

An improper connection of booster cables may lead to an explosion or damages in the electronic system.

• Do only start the engine externally with 24 V (batteries (G1/G2) in the upper compartment.

Observe correct sequence and polarity:

• Connect the negative cable to the negative pole of the external voltage source first, then connect it to the negative pole of the front battery (G2) on machine side.

• Then connect the positive cable to the positive pole of the external voltage source.

Connect it after that to the positive pole of the rear battery (G1) on machine side.

Pos: 108.33 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Starten mit einer externen Stromquelle: Einführtext @ 143\mod_1358835806930_78.docx @ 1278522 @ @ 1

The machine is equipped with two circuits. Two 12 V batteries (G1 and G2) are connected in series and supply the engine electronics with 24 V. The third 12 V battery (G3) supplies the onboard electrical system.

During the winter season, the engine can be started with booster cables and an external voltage source (24 V), if necessary.

The voltage of the external voltage source must correspond to the voltage of the engine electronics (24 V). The engine electronics is damaged by using an external voltage source with higher or lower voltage.

Pos: 108.34 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Starten mit einer externen Stromquelle: Bild mit Legende @ 143\mod_1358766644250_78.docx @ 1277754 @ @ 1

4 2 2

1

3 1

G1

12V

24 Volt

4

24 V

G2

12V

3

G3

12V

Fig. 219

Pos: 108.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

2) 2 batteries (G1 and G2) which are connected in series. Engine electronics

(24 V)

3) 12 V battery (G3) (machine electronics

12 V)

4) External current source

271

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.36 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Starten mit einer externen Stromquelle: Um die Überbrückungskabel sicher anzuschließen @ 143\mod_1358835759834_78.docx @ 1278493 @ @ 1

The electrical power circuit of the machine must be interrupted to safely connect the booster cable.

• To interrupt the electrical power circuit, turn the main battery switch to “0” position

(interrupted).

• Connect the negative cable to the negative pole of the external voltage source, then connect it to the negative pole of the front battery (G2) on machine side.

• Connect the positive cable to the positive pole of the external voltage source, then connect it to the positive pole of the rear battery (G1) on machine side.

Pos: 108.37 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Starten mit einer externen Stromquelle: Um den Motor starten zu können @ 143\mod_1358835695814_78.docx @ 1278464 @ @ 1

The electrical power circuit must be closed to start the engine.

• Turn the main battery switch to “I” position to interrupt the electrical power circuit.

• Start the engine.

Pos: 108.38 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Starten mit einer externen Stromquelle: nach dem der Motor gestartet ist @ 143\mod_1358835620927_78.docx @ 1278435 @ @ 1

After the engine has been started:

• Disconnect the positive cable from the positive pole of the rear battery (G1).

• Disconnect the positive cable from the positive pole of the external voltage source.

• Disconnect the negative cable from the negative pole of the front battery (G2).

• Disconnect the negative cable from the negative pole of the external voltage source.

Pos: 108.39.1 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Anfahren (2012-08-15 11:44:06) @ 0\mod_1196345912842_78.docx @ 7109 @ 2 @ 1

Danger! - Starting to Drive

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Do not ride as a passenger on the ladders or platform.

• Never drive with an engaged parking brake.

• Always adapt the travelling speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.

Pos: 108.39.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to prevailing driving conditions.

• Note that the machine swings out when cornering.

272

Pos: 108.39.3 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Beschleunigungsverhalten einstellen Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271309857175_78.docx @ 369255 @ 3 @ 1

11.4.1 Setting the Acceleration Behaviour

Driving and Transport

Fig.220

Four different acceleration stages can be selected while driving with the selector switch acceleration ramp (2) attached to the multi-function lever (1).

With constant operation of the multi-function lever (1) in a direction and at a constant engine speed, the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in acceleration stage IV.

Pos: 108.39.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Allgemeines zum Fahren @ 8\mod_1219066297300_78.docx @ 109057 @ 3 @ 1

• Move the selector switch (2) to the desired acceleration stage.

11.4.2 General on Driving

Pos: 108.39.5 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Allgemeines zum Fahren Hecklenkung BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320312716900_78.docx @ 744545 @ @ 1

BM 420 068

Fig. 221:

Observe the following instructions when driving:

• Handling the machine requires a certain amount of practice because of the rear steering

• The machine handles differently in level I and II

• In the case of an error message in the Info centre immediately stop and remove the error. If you cannot rectify the fault inform the customer service or your KRONE dealer

Pos: 108.39.6 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Allgemeines zum Fahren Notlenkkräfte @ 87\mod_1320313253096_78.docx @ 744601 @ @ 1

Emergency steering forces

Pos: 108.39.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The steering also operates when the engine has stopped. However, considerably more force must be applied.

273

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.39.8 /BA/Fahren und Transport/SelbstfahrerÜberhitzen des Hydrostatsystems @ 349\mod_1436257074042_78.docx @ 2623886 @ 3 @ 1

11.4.3 Overheating of Hydrostatic System

The hydraulic system may overheat, e.g. due to overload of traction drive (steep hill ascent, getting stuck on the field).

If the hydraulic system overheats an acoustic warning signal sounds and a warning message appears in the display.

When hydraulic system is overheated:

• Stop all work functions.

• Allow the diesel engine to continue running.

• Determine the cause of overheating. Depending on the reason of overheating, possible measures to solve the problem are as follows: e.g. tow the machine or move it to flatter ground.

• Then continue to drive at lower speed. Thus oil temperature declines.

Pos: 108.39.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

If the traction drive has been killed, never wait longer than 5 seconds to reset the control lever to “neutral”; subsequently select a lower speed.

The drive torque which acts on the drive wheels depends on the oil pressure in the hydrostatic drive system. If the pressure requirement becomes higher than the pressure in the hydrostatic system, the overpressure valve will open and the self-propelled high performance mowerconditioner will reduce speed or not move.

As soon as the required drive torque decreases (this is reached by selecting a lower speed), the machine will drive on again.

274

Pos: 108.39.10 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Vorwärtsfahren Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271311435596_78.docx @ 369305 @ 3 @ 1

Driving and Transport

Fig.222

Starting forwards from standstill

After the engine is started and the travelling gear is released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.

• Press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed.

• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the front, the machine starts to move forwards and accelerates.

• If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position (0); the speed remains constant.

Pos: 108.39.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear while travelling, the machine decelerates; it is braked until is comes to a stop by friction.

275

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.39.12 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Rückwärtsfahren Fahrhebel @ 126\mod_1345795799487_78.docx @ 1144704 @ 3 @ 1

11.4.5 Reversing

Fig. 223

Starting in reverse from standstill

After the engine is started and the traction drive is released, the gearbox is in the neutral position.

• Press and hold down the activation key for the traction drive (2).

• Move the control lever (1) to the rear; the machine starts to move in reverse and accelerates.

• If you release the control lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position (0); the speed remains constant.

• If you move the control lever (1) forward during travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until it comes to a stop by friction.

NOTE

An acoustic warning signal sounds when reversing.

Pos: 108.39.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

276

Pos: 108.39.14 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Tempomat Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271312183893_78.docx @ 369410 @ 2333 @ 1

11.5.1

Driving and Transport

The cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards. When the cruise control is activated, the machine is accelerated or decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the speed stored for the cruise control mode.

Saving the Speed for Cruise Control Mode

The speed is saved for the operating mode (road/field) the machine is currently in. One speed can be saved for road and field mode each.

Fig.224

• Accelerate the machine to the desired speed.

• While travelling press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the multi-function lever (1) to the right and back to the middle position.

The momentary travelling speed is stored.

The stored speed (1) is displayed in the display of the Info centre in the travelling gear data Info area.

277

Driving and Transport

11.5.2 Activating Cruise Control

Fig.225

• While driving, move the multi-function lever (2) to the right without the activation key. The saved speed is reached and the

Centre display.

icon for cruise control becomes active in the Info

11.5.3 Deactivating Cruise Control

Pos: 108.39.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cruise control is deactivated by overriding the multi-function lever, operating the operating brake and switching off the travelling gear.

If you switch into "Road/field" mode, the display switches to the value that is saved for the currently selected operating mode (field or road speed).

278

Pos: 108.39.16 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Anhalten Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271312895643_78.docx @ 369460 @ 23 @ 1

11.6.1 Stopping with the Multi-Function Lever

Driving and Transport

11.6 Stopping

The machine can be brought to a stop either with the multi-function lever or with the foot brake.

Fig.226

Stopping from forward travel:

If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the rear during forward travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.

Note - Alternative

If you move the multi-function lever (1) to the left during forward travel, the machine decelerates. It is braked until is comes to a stop.

Stopping from reverse travel:

Pos: 108.39.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.227

If you move the multi-function lever (1) forward during reverse travel, the machine decelerates.

It is braked until is comes to a stop.

279

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.39.18 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Anhalten mit Fußbremsen (2012-08-15 13:21:18) @ 0\mod_1196350380076_78.docx @ 7512 @ 3 @ 1

11.6.2 Stopping with Foot Brakes

Danger!

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.

• The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.

• Check the brake linings regularly

BM 400 0228

Fig. 228:

Brake the machine slightly:

• Depress the foot brake slightly

• When you release the brake pedal, the machine accelerates and returns to its original driving speed.

Brake the machine strongly (braking to avoid accident):

Pos: 108.39.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press the foot brake forcefully downwards.The machine immedialety comes to a complete stop.

280

Pos: 108.39.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/FFeststellbremse @ 6\mod_1214898864996_78.docx @ 96776 @ 2 @ 1

11.7

Pos: 108.39.21 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Feststellbremse @ 0\mod_1196350787826_78.docx @ 7531 @ @ 1

Parking Brake

Danger! - Leaving the Cab

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Before leaving the cab, always apply the parking brake.

• Release the parking brake each time before starting to drive.

Driving and Transport

Fig. 229:

Note - Parking brake engaged

Effect: Brake overheating

• Do not drive with the parking brake engaged.

I - Parking brake released

Pos: 108.39.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

II - Parking brake engaged

281

Driving and Transport

Pos: 108.39.23 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Motor abstellen Caterpillar/MAN @ 142\mod_1357814095362_78.docx @ 1263522 @ 2 @ 1

11.8 Switching Off the Engine

Note

To protect the engine from overheating after operation under load, the engine must run for at least three minutes in lower idle before the engine is switched off.

Fig. 230

• Bring the machine to a complete stop.

• Let the engine run at lower idle for three minutes to cool off the engine.

• Turn the ignition key (1) to “0” position.

• Activate the parking brake release switch in “II” position (engaged).

• Activate the traction drive release switch in “I” position (off).

Pos: 108.39.24 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Caterpillar Motor abstellen Betriebs- und Wartungshandbuch beachten @ 142\mod_1357819301090_78.docx @ 1263551 @ @ 1

If you need any further information, please refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual chapter Operation „Parking the Engine“.

Pos: 108.39.25 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Maschine abstellen @ 0\mod_1196352108780_78.docx @ 7590 @ 2 @ 1

11.9 Switch off the machine

Danger! - Leaving the machine

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Move the mowing units into transport position.

• Move the "Road/Field" release switch to the road position.

• Apply the holding brake.

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position I (off).

• Switch off the engine.

• Remove the ignition key.

• If necessary, fit wheel chocks in place.

Pos: 108.39.26 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Maschine abstellen Hinweis Caterpillar @ 148\mod_1361357251980_78.docx @ 1326005 @ @ 1

Note

Close the shut-off valve on the fuel pre-filter to prevent that diesel flows into the engine when parking the machine on slopes.

Pos: 108.39.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

282

Pos: 108.39.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/AAbschleppen der Maschine @ 35\mod_1256130365838_78.docx @ 326611 @ 2 @ 1

Driving and Transport

11.10 Towing

Pos: 108.39.29 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Abschleppen @ 0\mod_1196352293795_78.docx @ 7609 @ @ 1

Caution!

Only move machine out of the danger zone. Never tow over longer distances.

If the machine no longer builds up the oil pressure for releasing the parking brake, then the parking brake must be released manually.

Pos: 108.39.30 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFeststellbremse manuell lösen @ 0\mod_1196352596201_78.docx @ 7628 @ 3 @ 1

11.10.1 Releasing the holding brake manually

Pos: 108.39.31 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme (2012-08-13 11:36:55) @ 0\mod_1196317459889_78.docx @ 6156 @ @ 1

Pos: 108.39.32 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Unterlegkeile anbringen @ 0\mod_1196352858998_78.docx @ 7647 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of machine and rolling.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

Fitting wheel chocks

• Place wheel chocks (1) on both sides in front of or behind (according to slope) the driving wheels (front axle).

• Always place the wheel chocks (1) so that the machine cannot roll away.

• Fold the wheel chocks (1) open completely and place then close up against the drive wheels.

Pos: 108.39.33 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Feststellbremse lösen Bild BM 420 @ 58\mod_1297059948584_78.docx @ 554750 @ @ 1

2 2

1

BM 420 0039

Fig.231

Pos: 108.39.34 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Feststellbremse lösen @ 0\mod_1196353036858_78.docx @ 7666 @ @ 1

The spring (1) must be set on a block to release the parking brake.

To do this:

• Loosen the nuts (2)

• Set the spring (1) to block.

• Tighten the nuts (2) and counter.

Pos: 109 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Towing

• Switch on the ignition, so that the indicator (hazard warning flasher) and brake lights function.

• Switch the road/field release switch into the road travel position.

• Increased steering and braking forces must be applied with the engine switched off.

283

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Bedienung Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196403531183_78.docx @ 7808 @ 1 @ 1

12 Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.2.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBestimmungsgemäße Verwendung @ 103\mod_1332169199326_78.docx @ 940071 @ 2 @ 1

Ver

12.1 Intended use

Pos: 110.2.2 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch Big M 400/420/500 @ 103\mod_1332169761803_78.docx @ 940157 @ @ 1

The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is a self-propelled work machine with three disc mowers and integrated mower conditioners. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is intended for use in agriculture. The self-propelled high-performance mower conditioner is used to mow various living grasses and legumes (from the initial stage to the end of the photosynthetic process).

The three mowing units can be used individually or together, thereby making it possible to adjust the working width as required. The integrated mower conditioners accelerate the drying process of the mowed crop.

Pos: 110.2.3 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Zur bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung gehört auch @ 103\mod_1332171944900_78.docx @ 940301 @ @ 1

Intended use also includes compliance with the operating, cleaning, maintenance and repair conditions set by the manufacturer.

Pos: 110.2.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/VVernüftigerweise vorhersehbare Fehlanwendung @ 103\mod_1332169519322_78.docx @ 940100 @ 2 @ 1

12.2 Reasonably foreseeable misuse

Pos: 110.2.5 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Vernünftigerweise vorhersehbare Fehlanwendung T1 @ 103\mod_1332170020800_78.docx @ 940186 @ @ 1

Any usage outside of intended use (as described above) constitutes non-intended use and therefore represents misuse as defined by the Machinery Directive. The manufacturer shall not be held liable for any resulting damages. The user alone shall be liable.

Pos: 110.2.6 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Selbstfahrer/Auflistung von Fehlanwendungen @ 103\mod_1332171361892_78.docx @ 940244 @ @ 1

Examples of such misuse are:

• Mowing undergrowth and bushes

• Mowing non-living plants such as straw or maize stalks

• Mowing woody or highly fibrous plants such as trees, cotton stalks or sugar cane

Pos: 110.2.7 /BA/Einleitung/Bestimmungsgemäßer Gebrauch/Nicht bestimmungsgemäß @ 103\mod_1332171672294_78.docx @ 940272 @ @ 1

Pos: 110.3 /BA/Bedienung /Falscher Umgang mit Fehlermeldungen @ 39\mod_1268149789980_78.docx @ 358355 @ @ 1

Unauthorised modifications to the machine may have a negative effect on the machine characteristics or safe and reliable use of the machine or may interfere with proper operation.

Unauthorised modifications shall therefore release the manufacturer of any liability for consequential damage.

Pos: 110.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAUTION! –Wrong handling with error messages, identification of faults and defects on the machine

Effect: serious subsequent damages to the machine

• If an error message occurs or if a fault or a defect is recognized on the machine, the machine has to be stopped and gears and motor have to be switched off

• Before continuing with work, eliminate the cause of the problem immediately

284

Pos: 110.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBedienung der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196404785480_78.docx @ 7850 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.3 Operation of Mowing Units

Pos: 110.6 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 110.7 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Bedienung der Mähwerke Bild BM 420_Caterpillar @ 148\mod_1361275846668_78.docx @ 1322625 @ @ 1

3

1

2

BM 420 146

Pos: 110.8 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Bedienung der Mähwerke Text @ 0\mod_1196406980386_78.docx @ 7910 @ @ 1

Fig.232

Operation of mowing units is divided into three areas.

The operating panel contains switches that are needed to operate the mowing units. (for example "Road/Field" release switch)

The multi-function lever combines all functions needed to operate the mowing units. (this includes lifting, lowering, folding up, switching to working position, transport position or headland position and turning on the mowing unit drives)

Pos: 110.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

All settings/specifications for automatic sequences are stored in the Info Centre. (for example time/path control, overcut, automatic cleaning time)

For further information, please refer to the Chapter "Info Centre".

285

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMähwerke abklappen @ 31\mod_1252577545091_78.docx @ 306348 @ 2 @ 1

12.4 Folding Down the Mowing Units

Pos: 110.11 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 110.12 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358845236367_78.docx @ 1278766 @ @ 1

P

Fig. 233

1) Main battery switch

2) Parking brake release switch

3) Traction drive release switch

Pos: 110.13 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Voraussetzung @ 142\mod_1357807642606_78.docx @ 1263205 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met to start the machine:

• The main battery switch must be in position I (closed).

• "Parking brake" release switch must be in position II (engaged).

• "Travelling gear" release switch must be in position I (off).

Pos: 110.14 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Um das Frontmähwerk anzuheben bzw. abzusenken muss der Absperrhahn am Frontausleger geöffnet sein. @ 185\mod_1379577347672_78.docx @ 1598041 @ @ 1

The shut-off valve on the front outrigger must be opened to lift or lower the front mowing unit.

Pos: 110.15 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Motor Starten / Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld in Position Feldbetrieb schalten @ 145\mod_1359702988639_78.docx @ 1301365 @ @ 1

• Start the engine.

• Move release switch for road/field to field mode position.

Pos: 110.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

286

Pos: 110.17.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerke einzeln von Transport- in Vorgewendestellung abklappen @ 184\mod_1378965588422_78.docx @ 1583436 @ 3 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.4.1 Folding down Each Lateral Mowing Unit from Transport Position to Headland Position

Pos: 110.17.2 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Transport- in die Vorgewendestellung abklappen @ 184\mod_1378975780492_78.docx @ 1586544 @ @ 1

Fig. 234

Lateral mowing unit left

• Press the key (12) and hold it down.

• Press the key (4).

Lateral mowing unit right

• Press the key (12) and hold it down.

• Press the key (6).

Pos: 110.17.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerke gleichzeitig von Transport- in Vorgewendestellung abklappen @ 184\mod_1378976607099_78.docx @ 1586573 @ 3 @ 1

12.4.2 Folding down Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Transport Position to Headland

Position

Pos: 110.17.4 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Gleichzeitig von Transport- in Vorgewendestellung abklappen BM 420/500 @ 184\mod_1378964225850_78.docx @ 1583408 @ @ 1

Pos: 110.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 235

• Press the key (12) and hold it down.

• Press the key (10).

287

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.19.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMähwerke absenken @ 184\mod_1378976759848_78.docx @ 1586601 @ 2 @ 1

12.5 Lowering Mowing Units

Pos: 110.19.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 110.19.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk von Transport- / in Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378977108393_78.docx @ 1586659 @ 3 @ 1

12.5.1 Lowering Front Mowing Unit from Headland Position to Working Position

Pos: 110.19.4 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Frontmähwerk in Arbeitsstellung absenken BM 420/500 @ 184\mod_1378903895858_78.docx @ 1582742 @ @ 1

Fig. 236

• Press the key (11) briefly.

The front mowing unit is in float position.

Pos: 110.19.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerke einzeln von Vorgewende- in Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378978650013_78.docx @ 1586715 @ 3 @ 1

12.5.2 Lowering Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Working

Position

Pos: 110.19.6 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Vorgewende- in Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378978862252_78.docx @ 1586744 @ @ 1

Pos: 110.19.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 237

Lateral mowing unit left

• Press the key (4) briefly.

The lateral mowing unit is in float position.

Lateral mowing unit right

• Press the key (6) briefly.

The lateral mowing unit is in float position.

288

Pos: 110.19.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Alle Mähwerke von Vorgewende- in Arbeitsstellung senken @ 184\mod_1378978192744_78.docx @ 1586687 @ 3 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.5.3 Lowering All Mowing Units from Headland Position to Working Position

Pos: 110.19.9 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Alle Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwerke von Vorgewendestellung in die Arbeitsstellung senken BM 400/500 @ 184\mod_1378979949854_78.docx @ 1586773 @ @ 1

Fig. 238

• Press the key (10) briefly.

All mowing units are in float position.

To this end, the lateral mowing units are lowered according to the set mode (time / distance control) into working position.

The mowing units are lowered in the following order.

– Front mowing unit: Always immediately (without delay)

Pos: 110.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

– Lateral mowing units: Delayed according to the setting in the Info Centre, refer to chapter

Info Centre “Setting of the Machine”

289

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.21.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMähwerksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196415953651_78.docx @ 8154 @ 2 @ 1

12.6 Mowing Unit Drive

Pos: 110.21.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 110.21.3 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Vorraussetzung Bild_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358845236367_78.docx @ 1278766 @ @ 1

P

Fig. 239

1) Main battery switch

2) Parking brake release switch

3) Traction drive release switch

Pos: 110.21.4 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Big M 400 / 420 / 500/Motor anlassen: Motor Starten / Freigabeschalter Straße/Feld in Position Feldbetrieb schalten @ 145\mod_1359702988639_78.docx @ 1301365 @ @ 1

• Start the engine.

• Move release switch for road/field to field mode position.

Pos: 110.21.5 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Vorraussetzungen Teil 2_Mähwerksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196416105979_78.docx @ 8173 @ @ 1

• Move the mowing units at least to the headland position.

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch (4) to position (II) "Travelling gear on".

Pos: 110.21.6 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Hinweis Mähen_Mähwerksantrieb @ 0\mod_1196416325666_78.docx @ 8192 @ @ 1

Note - Mowing

Pos: 110.21.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

To be able to switch on the mowing unit drives, the mowing units must be in at least the headland position or lower.

290

Pos: 110.21.8 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Mähwerksantriebe ein- bzw. ausschalten @ 151\mod_1362490438725_78.docx @ 1350655 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.1 Switching On Or Switching Off Mowing Unit Drives

Operation – Mowing Units

Note

The cross switch lever is used to switch on or switch off the mowing unit drives.

Always actuate the cross switch lever beyond the second resistor when switching on and switching off.

To switch on the mowing unit drives, press key (17) additionally and hold it down. Only return the cross switch back to central position when the mowing unit drives are started.

Pos: 110.21.9 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Mähwerksantrieb links ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362650623161_78.docx @ 1355181 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.2 Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

Fig. 240

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the left (G) beyond the second resistor until the left mowing unit drive switches on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after the mowing unit drive is switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the left (G) beyond the second resistor to switch off the left mowing unit drive.

Pos: 110.21.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

291

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.21.11 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Mähwerksantrieb rechts ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362651402841_78.docx @ 1355387 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.3 Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

Fig. 241

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the right (J) beyond the second resistor until the right mowing unit drive switches on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after the mowing unit drive is switched on.

To switch off:

Pos: 110.21.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the right (J) beyond the second resistor to switch off the right mowing unit drive.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

292

Pos: 110.21.13 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Mähwerksantrieb front ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362651275097_78.docx @ 1355358 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.4 Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive Front

Operation – Mowing Units

Fig. 242

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) to the front (K) beyond the second resistor until the mowing unit drive front switches on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after the mowing unit drive is switched on.

To switch off:

Pos: 110.21.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the front (K) beyond the second resistor to switch off the mowing unit drive front.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

293

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.21.15 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwerksantriebe ein-/ ausschalten @ 152\mod_1362651081570_78.docx @ 1355270 @ 3 @ 1

12.6.5 Switching On / Switching Off All Mowing Unit Drives

Fig. 243

To switch on:

Hold the key (17) down during the entire switching process.

• With the key (17) pressed, move the cross switch lever (23) back (M) beyond the second resistor until all mowing unit drives are switched on.

• With the key (17) pressed, guide the cross switch lever (23) back to the central position (0) after all mowing unit drives are switched on.

To switch off:

• Move the cross switch lever (23) to the rear (M) beyond the second resistor to switch off all mowing unit drives.

• Release the cross switch, the cross switch lever automatically returns to the central position

(0).

Pos: 110.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note - Switch off all mowing unit drives

• Pressing the key (1) on the multi-function lever also switches off all mowing unit drives.

294

Pos: 110.23.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMähwerke anheben @ 184\mod_1378980436932_78.docx @ 1586831 @ 2 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.7 Lifting the Mowing Units

Pos: 110.23.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Abklappen, Senken, Heben, Abklappen der Mähwerke @ 184\mod_1379050625464_78.docx @ 1587645 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life due to folding down, lowering, lifting and folding up the mowing units.

• Do not fold down, lower, lift or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

Pos: 110.23.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378994644037_78.docx @ 1587527 @ 3 @ 1

12.7.1 Lifting Front Mowing Unit from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 110.23.4 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Frontmähwerk/Neuer Fahrhebel/Frontmähwerk von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung BM 420/500 @ 184\mod_1378904181676_78.docx @ 1582801 @ @ 1

Pos: 110.23.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 244

Inching

• Press the key (8) to the first gear.

The function is executed as long as the key is held.

Automatically

• Press the key (8) briefly into the second gear and release it.

295

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.23.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerke einzeln von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378984035421_78.docx @ 1587008 @ 3 @ 1

12.7.2 Lifting Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 110.23.7 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben Big M 500 @ 184\mod_1378985126507_78.docx @ 1587124 @ @ 1

Fig. 245

Lateral mowing unit left

Inching

• Press the key (5) to the first gear.

The function is executed as long as the key is held.

Automatically

• Press the key (5) briefly to the second gear and release it.

Lateral mowing unit right

Inching

• Press the key (7) to the first gear.

The function is executed as long as the key is held.

Automatically

Pos: 110.23.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Press the key (7) briefly to the second gear and release it.

296

Pos: 110.23.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Alle Mähwerke von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378994442717_78.docx @ 1587434 @ 3 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.7.3 Lifting All Mowing Units from Working Position to Headland Position

Pos: 110.23.10 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Alle Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Alle Mähwerke gleichzeitig von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung heben @ 184\mod_1378965937846_78.docx @ 1583494 @ @ 1

Fig. 246

• Press the key (9) briefly.

All mowing units are lifted to the headland position according to the set mode (time / distance control).

Lift the mowing units in the following order:

– Front mowing unit: Always immediately (without delay).

– Lateral mowing units: Delayed according to the setting in the Info Centre, refer to chapter

Info Centre “Setting Machine”.

Pos: 110.24 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Optinal tastend von Arbeitsstellung in VGStellung heben @ 346\mod_1434955237353_78.docx @ 2610989 @ @ 1

Pos: 110.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Inching (option)

• Press the key (9) to the first shift step.

The function is executed as long as the key is held down.

Automatically

• Press the key (9) briefly to the second shift key and release it.

According to the set mode, all mowers are raised from working position to headland position.

297

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.26.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMähwerke anklappen @ 31\mod_1252561666154_78.docx @ 305965 @ 2 @ 1

12.8 Folding up the Mowing Units

Pos: 110.26.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Ausheben_Senken_Anklappen der Mähwerke Stillstand abwarten @ 0\mod_1196420841213_78.docx @ 8665 @ @ 1

Danger! - No one is permitted in the danger zone when lifting, lowering or folding up mowing units, or when turning on drives.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or serious damage to the machine.

• Lateral mowing units may only be folded up when the mowing units have come to a complete stop.

• Do not lift, lower or fold up the mowing unit until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the swivel range of the mowing unit.

• After the mowing units are folded up, move the safety switch "Road/Field" to position I

(Road travel).

Pos: 110.26.3 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Warnung Fehlermeldung 1414 bzw. 1415 mißachtet BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379482583650_78.docx @ 1596185 @ @ 1

WARNING!

If the error message „1414 or 1415“ appears in the display when driving on the road, the lateral mowing units are not locked mechanically in transport position. They may fold down unintentionally. Do not ignore the error message “1414 or 1415” in the display! Danger to life!

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears when driving on the road, stop the machine immediately and correct the error.

• If the error message “1414 or 1415” appears before starting, then the machine must not be operated. Correct the error.

Pos: 110.26.4 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Selbstfahrer/Verriegelung prüfen BM 420 @ 185\mod_1379513026864_78.docx @ 1597174 @ @ 1

1

BM 400 0147_3

Fig. 247

Pos: 110.26.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The sensors (1) on the ratchets detect whether the mechanical lockings of the lateral mowing units are properly engaged in transport position, right and left machine side.

The error message „1414 mowing unit right not in transport position” or “1415 mowing unit left not in transport position” appears if the lateral mowing units are not in transport position when driving in road mode.

Correct the error, refer to the error list in the appendix.

298

Pos: 110.26.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerke einzeln von Vorgewende - in Transportstellung anklappen @ 184\mod_1378984034421_78.docx @ 1586979 @ 3 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

12.8.1 Folding up Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually from Headland Position to Transport

Position

Pos: 110.26.7 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Arbeits- in Vorgewendestellung anklappen Bild @ 41\mod_1271326036815_78.docx @ 370665 @ @ 1

Fig.248

Pos: 110.26.8 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke einzeln von Vorgewende- in Transportstellung anklappen @ 184\mod_1378990006653_78.docx @ 1587409 @ @ 1

A pre-condition is that:

– The mower drives must be turned off.

– The mowing units are no longer in motion.

Lateral mowing unit left

• Press and hold the key (12).

• Press the key (5).

Lateral mowing unit right

• Press and hold the key (12).

• Press the key (7).

Pos: 110.26.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerke gleichzeitig von Vorgewende- in Transportstellung anklappen @ 184\mod_1378984036264_78.docx @ 1587037 @ 3 @ 1

12.8.2 Folding up the Lateral Mowing Units Simultaneously from Headland Position to

Transport Position

Pos: 110.26.10 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Seitliche Mähwerke/Neuer Fahrhebel/Seitenmähwerke gleichzeitig von Vorgewende- in Transportstellung anklappen BM 420 @ 184\mod_1378965937127_78.docx @ 1583465 @ @ 1

Pos: 110.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 249

A pre-condition is that:

– The mower drives must be turned off.

– The mowing units are no longer in motion.

• Press the key (12) and hold it.

• Press the key (9).

299

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMähen @ 0\mod_1196426120010_78.docx @ 8839 @ 2 @ 1

12.9 Mowing

Pos: 110.29 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise altGefahr - Unerwartete Bewegung fortschleudern von Steinen @ 452\mod_1463475621444_78.docx @ 3073142 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Risk of injury from unexpected movement of cutting tools or mowers or forcibly ejected stones during operation.

• To prevent any of the mowers from overloading, when operating a single mower do not drive faster than you would if you were operating all mowers simultaneously.

• The sliding skids must rest on the ground before start-up and during work!

• Before using the machine, always check the safety devices for damage. Replace damaged safety devices immediately.

• Move the safety devices into their protective positions.

• Do not use the machine until you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the danger zone of the mowers.

Pos: 110.30 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Reparatur_Wartung_Reinigungs @ 0\mod_1196426193026_78.docx @ 8858 @ @ 1

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Work on the cutter blades or their fastenings must only be performed with the drive stopped and the cutting discs and drums stopped.

• Switch off the mowing unit drives

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Wait until the cutting discs and/or drums have come to a complete stop

• Remove the ignition key!

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• Support the lifted mower bed! Never step under suspended loads!

• Safe operation is only guaranteed if the blades have been fitted according to the instructions!

• Always check the mowing unit for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

Pos: 110.31 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Hinweis abschalten der Schwimmstellung während des Mähens @ 49\mod_1287055607937_78.docx @ 464739 @ @ 1

Pos: 110.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note!

During mowing the mowing units are in “float position” so they can adapt to the ground contours during mowing process. If the machine is switched off when the mowing units are in working position, the float position will be deactivated. When starting again in working position the float position will stay deactivated. Only after the key for the function “lower all mowers” is shortly actuated, the mowing units will be in float position again (alternately the float position can be individually activated with the accordant key for each mowing unit).

300

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.33 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/MähwerkeWarnung - Einheit Zetterprallblech bzw. Einheit Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 453\mod_1463998298539_78.docx @ 3078738 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life or serious injuries if the conditioning sheet unit or the auger conveyor unit is not mounted.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the conditioning sheet unit or the auger conveyor unit has been properly installed.

Pos: 110.34 /BA/Bedienung /Wildschutz Selbstfahrer @ 46\mod_1283864895734_78.docx @ 451321 @ 2 @ 1

12.10 Game animal protection

5 6

7 8

B C D

BM 400 0266

Pic. 250

After the first switching on of the mowing unit drive an information picture with the correct mowing performance appears temporarily on the display.

When mowing from “outside to inside”, the animals are slowly forced from the safe boundary area into the centre of the area, which makes the possibility for a life-saving escape for the animal more difficult or takes it away.

A remedy for this issue is the mowing method from “inside to outside” of the area.

In doing so, you drive directly into the centre of the parcel without mowing the boundary area and mow anticlockwise from “inside to outside”. Therefore the animal can leave the field in compliance with its flight behaviour without any harm.

Pos: 110.35 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Voraussetzung zum Mähen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196427018838_78.docx @ 8878 @ @ 1

Precondition for mowing:

• Open the shut-off valve on the front outrigger.

• Starting the engine

• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode).

• Move the mowing units to the working position.

• The guard cloths must be in the working position.

• Move the "Travelling gear" release switch to position II (on).

• Switch on the mowing unit drives.

• Move the "Parking brake" release switch to position I (released).

• Increase rpms to working speed.

Pos: 110.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Drive into the crop.

• The travel speed during mowing is determined by usage conditions (soil conditions, height, density and nature of the crop)

Note - Reverse travel in Field mode!

The disc mowers are designed to travel forwards. If the road safety switch is in field position, the mowing units are automatically lifted out when the machine is reversed.

301

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.37 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSchutze in Arbeitsstellung bringen @ 35\mod_1258461422738_78.docx @ 335195 @ 3 @ 1

12.10.1 Moving the guards into the working position

Pos: 110.38 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Schutze in Arbeitsposition bringen BM 400 @ 83\mod_1317286459496_78.docx @ 728207 @ @ 1

2

1

1

BM 400 0197_1

Fig. 251

• Switch off the engine. Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling

• Check the guard cloths (1,3) regularly

• Replace worn or damaged guard cloths

• The guard cloth (3) must be tightened each time before using the mower so that it cannot be caught by the conditioner auger

Note

The protective equipment on the mowing units, e.g. cloths and hoods, protects against flying stones and similar objects and also prevents access to dangerous parts.

Fold down the side plates (1) before operation and secure with the rotary tops (2).

Pos: 110.39 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Mähwerksantireb/Mähen mit einzelnen Mähwerken @ 0\mod_1196428174510_78.docx @ 8956 @ 3 @ 1

12.10.2 Mowing with Individual Mowing Units

Pos: 110.40 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The following options are available for mowing remaining pieces.

• Lift the mowing units that are no longer required for mowing into headland position. To do this, activate the appropriate keys on the multi-function lever.

• The front mowing unit alone can be used to mow small parcels of crop or narrow sections in open fields. The lateral mowing units then remain in transport position.

302

Pos: 110.41 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Schnellstopp Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271329582862_78.docx @ 370790 @ 3 @ 1

Operation – Mowing Units

Fig.252

Activating quick stop

• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the left while driving.

The machine decelerates to a complete stop.

Pos: 110.42 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG M /Schneller Fahrtrichtungswechsel (Schnellreversierung) Fahrhebel NEU @ 41\mod_1271329848065_78.docx @ 370815 @ 3 @ 1

12.10.4 Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing)

Fig.253

Activating fast reversing

• While travelling press the activation button for the travelling gear (2) and keep it pressed, move the multi-function lever (1) to the left and back to the middle position.

The machine decelerates down to standstill and accelerates in the opposite direction to approx.

70% of the previous travelling speed.

Note

Pos: 110.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fast reversing is possible only in the field mode.

303

Operation – Mowing Units

Pos: 110.44 /BA/Bedienung /Mähwerke BiG MAchstrennung ein- /ausschalten @ 349\mod_1436258212824_78.docx @ 2623917 @ 3 @ 1

12.10.5 Switching On/Off Axle Separation

Switch on axle separation to prevent the wheels from spinning on slippery surfaces. Axle separation is only available in field mode.

Note

The temperature in the hydrostat may increase if axle separation is permanently switched on.

Therefore axle separation must not be used over an extended period of time.

Prerequisites for activation of axle separation:

• The road/field release switch must be in the field mode.

• Traction drive release switch must be switched on.

• The driving speed must not exceed 14 km/h.

Pos: 111 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 254

Switching on axle separation

Actuate the axle separation button (1) - axle separation is switched on.

The icon (axle separation active) appears in the display of the info centre.

Switching off axle separation

• Actuate axle separation key (1) again.

The icon (axle separation active) appears in the display of info centre.

304

Pos: 112.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Einstellungen der Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196660315463_78.docx @ 9095 @ 1 @ 1

13

Pos: 112.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSpezielle Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.docx @ 9134 @ 2 @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Adjusting the mowing units

13.1 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 112.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Reparatur_Wartung_Reinigungs_3 @ 0\mod_1196660613260_78.docx @ 9153 @ @ 1

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• The cutter blades can continue to rotate after the drive has been switched off. Only approach the machine once the work tools have come to a complete standstill!

Pos: 112.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• After completing maintenance work reattach all safety devices properly.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

305

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 112.5.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEinstellen der Schnitthöhe @ 0\mod_1196660879619_78.docx @ 9191 @ 2 @ 1

13.2 Adjusting the cutting height

Pos: 112.5.2 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Allgemein Schnitthöhe Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196661001853_78.docx @ 9210 @ @ 1

The cutting height can be adjusted to different soil conditions. Each of the mowing units is adjusted individually for height.

Before making settings for cutting height, the hydraulic axle suspension must be in the mowing position. (See Info Centre chapter "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension".)

Pos: 112.5.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

Note - Good cutting pattern

For a good cutting pattern, adjust the cutting height to the same height on all mowing units

13.2.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 112.5.4 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Schnitthöhe am Frontmähwerk Bild @ 0\mod_1196661320135_78.docx @ 9250 @ @ 1

1

BM 400 0175

Fig. 255:

Pos: 112.5.5 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Schnitthöhe größer_geringer @ 0\mod_1196661562478_78.docx @ 9269 @ @ 1

The cutting height is adjusted via the top link (1).

To do this:

• Lower the front mowing unit into working position

• Rotate the top suspension arm (1)

Pos: 112.5.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Top suspension arm longer = smaller cutting height

Top suspension arm shorter = bigger cutting height

306

Pos: 112.5.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Aushubhöhe einstellen @ 0\mod_1196675396916_78.docx @ 10668 @ 3 @ 1

13.2.2

Pos: 112.5.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196674467494_78.docx @ 10628 @ 4 @ 1

Adjusting the Lifting Height

13.2.2.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 112.5.9 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Aushubhöhe des Frontmähwerks einstellen @ 0\mod_1196661830291_78.docx @ 9309 @ @ 1

Pos.1

Pos.2

Pos.3

Adjusting the mowing units

BM 400 0176

Pos: 112.5.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 256:

The front mowing unit can be suspended in several positions by means of the ‘Weiste’ triangle.

This causes the front mower to lift up to a higher or lower position.

• In the upper position (1), the front mower lifts to a higher position

• At mid position (2) the mower is in the normal position

• In the lower position (3), the front mower lifts to a lower position

By linking the upper rod into the lower positions (2, 3) on the ‘Weiste’ triangle, it is possible to obtain a smaller adjustment to the front mower inclination. This keeps the cutting height constant when making ground adjustments on very uneven land

307

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 112.5.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/E/Einstellen der Schnitthöhe @ 0\mod_1196674202135_78.docx @ 10608 @ 3 @ 1

13.2.3

Pos: 112.5.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 4/Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675520994_78.docx @ 10687 @ 4 @ 1

Adjusting the cutting height

13.2.3.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 112.5.13 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Einstellung der Schnitthöhe am Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196664319228_78.docx @ 10095 @ @ 1

Fig. 257

• Lower the lateral mowing unit into working position.

• Remove the linch pin (1).

• Put the locking clip (2) to one side.

• Set the direction of rotation for the setting ratchet (4) on the lever (3).

Lengthen threaded spindle = smaller cutting height

Shorten threaded spindle = bigger cutting height

• Twist the threaded spindle (3), until the locking clip (2) can be inserted.

• Secure the locking clip (2) with the linch pin (1).

Pos: 112.5.14 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schnitthöhe/Hinweis Ratsche Verlängerung @ 348\mod_1435826551180_78.docx @ 2620505 @ @ 1

Pos: 112.5.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If necessary, the lever ratchet can be extended. To do this, you can find an extension with cotter pin in the storage compartment.

308

Pos: 112.5.16 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Wasserwaage @ 348\mod_1435827049713_78.docx @ 2620536 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 258

Display (e.g.) Theoretical cutting height

+6°

+3°

+0°

-3° approx.

11 cm approx.

8cm approx.

6cm approx. 4 cm

Suitable for operating conditions

High cut field crops: dry ground moist ground field crops dry conditions normal conditions

-5° approx.

3 cm increasing low cut risk of sward damage

The desired cutting height can be set and read off by means of spirit level.

• Loosen wing screw (1).

• Set indicator (2) to the required angle on the angle scale (3).

Pos: 112.5.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Change the mower setting on the setting ratchet until the bubble (4) is in the centre.

Note

One revolution of the top suspension link sleeves on the side mounted mowers (12 ratchet settings) corresponds to approx. 4 revolutions of the top link sleeve on the front mounted mower.

Additional high-cut skids must be mounted.

309

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 112.5.18 /BA/Sonderausstatung/EasyCut / AM Mähwerke/Hochschnittkufen EasyCut @ 3\mod_1204783761105_78.docx @ 72974 @ 2 @ 1

13.3 Adjusting Skids

1

2

3

EC-192-1

Fig. 259

Adjusting skids can be used to increase the cutting height (see chapter entitled "Adjusting the cutting height")

To do this, insert the adjusting skids (3) into the glide skids (2) and screw them in place. The adjusting skids must always be mounted underneath the mowing discs that run next to the mower drum.

Pos: 112.6.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEntlastungsfedern einstellen @ 387\mod_1445259926661_78.docx @ 2774908 @ 2 @ 1

13.4 Setting the Relief Springs

Pos: 112.6.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Einstellarbeiten / Einstellungen/Gefahr - Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern nur in Transportstellung Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196666898416_78.docx @ 10171 @ @ 1

DANFER! – Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs should be adjusted only while the front mower is in the transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Pos: 112.6.3 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/EasyCut/Bodendruck/Bodendruck allgemeiner Text alle EC @ 0\mod_1196667271181_78.docx @ 10190 @ @ 1

Pos: 112.6.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The ground pressure for the cutter bar is adjusted to local conditions by means of the compensation springs. In order to protect the sward the load on the mowing spar must be relieved so that it does not jump when mowing, yet does not leave any skid marks on the ground.

310

Pos: 112.6.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

13.4.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 112.6.6 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Entlastungsfedern am Frontmähwerk BM 420 @ 87\mod_1320318060758_78.docx @ 744886 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 260

• Move the hydraulic axle suspension to the mowing position (see Info Centre Chapter entitled "Quick Access to Hydraulic Axle Suspension")

• With the sideshift option, the front mowing unit must be in the central position (see Chapter entitled Driving and Transport “Move the mowing unit to the central position”).

• The front mowing unit must be put into the transport position before you adjust the adjusting piece (1)

• Unscrew linch pin (3)

• Unhook the spring assemblies (2)

• Insert the adjustment piece (1) into the required hole

• Insert the spring assemblies (2) and secure with linch pin (3)

Pos: 112.6.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• The spring assemblies (2) are fitted on the side of the mower into the fourth hole (6) from the top

If the adjusting piece (1) is in the upper position (4), this means there is less spring tension, and thus, increased ground pressure

If the adjusting piece (1) is in the lower position (5), this means there is greater spring tension, and thus, reduced ground pressure

311

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 112.6.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

13.4.2 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 112.6.9 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung der Entlastungsfedern an den seitlichen Mähwerken @ 0\mod_1196667911275_78.docx @ 10228 @ @ 1

Fig. 261:

The load on the lateral mowing units is compensated by means of the four tension springs (1) on the left and right outriggers. The ground pressure can be adjusted by reinstalling the bolts

(2).

• Lift the lateral mowing units over the headland position, so that the compensation springs are not under tension.

• Support the lateral mowing unit

• Pull out the bolts (2) after you have removed the linch pin.

• If the bolts are moved further to the left: lower ground pressure

• If the bolts are moved further to the right: the ground pressure is increased

• Insert the bolts (2) and secure with the linch pin.

Pos: 112.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

When driving on the road fit the maximum spring compensation bolts at level 3 (centre hole)

312

Pos: 112.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEinstellung der Zetterdrehzahl @ 0\mod_1196668564463_78.docx @ 10266 @ 2 @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

13.5 Adjusting the Tedder Speed

Pos: 112.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Einstellarbeiten / Einstellungen/Gefahr - Einstellungen an der Maschine @ 0\mod_1196668628056_78.docx @ 10285 @ @ 1

Danger! - Settings on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

Pos: 112.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

• Setting tasks must only be performed when the drive is switched off and the engine is at a standstill! Remove the ignition key!

13.5.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 112.11 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/An den seitlichen Mähwerken BiG M 420 @ 348\mod_1435827291681_78.docx @ 2620597 @ @ 1

Fig. 262

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the main gearbox. This influences the efficiency of the conditioner and power consumption.

Minimum operation: 700 rpm

Maximum operation: 1000 rpm

• Screw out the screw (2) on the actuating lever (1).

• Twist actuating lever by 180°.

• Secure actuating lever again using the screw (2).

To synchronize the gearwheels during switching operation, loosen the screws (3), open the flap

(4) and turn the gear shaft using a suitable tool.

Pos: 112.12 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/Hinweis Verschleiß an der Zetterwalze minimieren @ 348\mod_1435827443295_78.docx @ 2620628 @ @ 1

Note

The wear on conditioner auger is minimized at a speed of 1000 rpm.

Pos: 112.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

313

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 112.14 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk (CV) @ 0\mod_1196670225510_78.docx @ 10342 @ 3 @ 1

13.5.2 Front mowing unit (CV)

Pos: 112.15 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/Zetterdrehzahl Bild Big M 420/500 @ 88\mod_1321523259351_78.docx @ 754238 @ @ 1

1000

700

BM 420 0076

Fig. 263

Pos: 112.16 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/Zetterdrehzahl einstellen 700/1000 @ 0\mod_1196670462416_78.docx @ 10380 @ @ 1

Two conditioner speeds can be set on the speed gearbox. This affects the conditioning effect and the power consumption.

Minimum speed: 700 rpm.

Maximum speed: 1000 rpm.

• Unscrew the wing screw (1) from the actuating lever (2).

• Turn the actuating lever (2) 180 degrees. (in doing so turn the mower drum (3) so that the complete actuating lever can be turned.

• Secure the actuating lever (2) with the wing screw (1).

Pos: 112.17 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Zetterdrehzahl/Hinweis Verschleiß an der Zetterwalze minimieren @ 348\mod_1435827443295_78.docx @ 2620628 @ @ 1

Note

The wear on conditioner auger is minimized at a speed of 1000 rpm.

Pos: 112.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

314

Pos: 112.19.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEinstellen des Aufbereitungsblechs @ 0\mod_1196670615681_78.docx @ 10399 @ 2 @ 1

13.6 Adjusting the conditioner plate

Pos: 112.19.2 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung des Aufbereitungsblech Bild (BiG M CV)_1 @ 186\mod_1379926689284_78.docx @ 1601595 @ @ 1

(BiG M CV)

Adjusting the mowing units

Fig. 264

Pos: 112.19.3 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung des Aufbereitungsbleches Text EasyCut @ 3\mod_1204713282555_78.docx @ 72125 @ @ 1

The conditioning of the mowed crop can be influenced by adjusting the conditioning plate through the crank (1). The adjustment depends on the desired degree of conditioning of the crop.

+: Degree of conditioning is increased

-: Degree of conditioning is decreased

Always check the tedder for damaged tines before the machine is used:

Pos: 112.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Straighten any bent tines.

Replace any broken tines.

315

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 112.21 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Rollen-Conditioners/Rollen-Conditioners @ 0\mod_1196673043650_78.docx @ 10513 @ 2 @ 1

13.7 Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra/BiG M CRI)

CRI-0-001

Fig. 265

General

The roller conditioner is supplied for use with leguminous vegetation or other leaf crops.

The conditioning intensity is adjusted by the setting spindle (1). The setting spindle (1) is used to change the distance or contact pressure of the rollers. The minimum distance (x) between the rollers must always be at least 4 mm.

Pos: 112.22 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Rollen-Conditioners/Einstellen des Rollenabstandes @ 0\mod_1196673207822_78.docx @ 10532 @ 3 @ 1

13.7.1 Adjusting the roller distance

2 1 3

4

BMII-372

Pos: 112.23 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 266:

• Loosen the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).

• Turn the adjusting nut (2) on the threaded spindle with a hex key (W/F 46).

Clockwise rotation: Roller distance is reduced.

Anticlockwise rotation: Roller distance is increased.

• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 24).

316

Pos: 112.24 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Rollen-Conditioners/Einstellen des Rollendruckes Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196673373025_78.docx @ 10551 @ 3 @ 1

13.7.2 Adjusting the roller pressure

Adjusting the mowing units

2

1

BM 400 0154

Pos: 112.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 267

• Loosen the locknut (2) with a hex key (W/F 41).

• Turn the spindle on the screw head (1) with a hex key (W/F 55).

Clockwise rotation: Greater insertion force

Anticlockwise rotation: Less insertion force

• Retighten the locknut (1) with a hex key (W/F 41).

Note - Optimising crop flow

• Dimension "a" must be within the range 60 - 75 mm. If the distance is set to less than 60 mm, the upper roller will not be able to swing out far enough, which will impede crop flow.

• Reset the roller distance each time you make an adjustment.

317

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 112.26 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Abstreiferblech am Querförderer optional (BM 500) @ 0\mod_1196673648681_78.docx @ 10570 @ 2 @ 1

13.8 Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor (Optional)

Pos: 112.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 268

The scraper (1) on the cross conveyor (right and left) are used to scrape off crop and prevent the cross conveyor from becoming clogged.

To achieve optimum working results, a dimension of X= 0-2 mm must be maintained.

To adjust the scraper:

• Loosen the screw (1)

• Push the scraper into the oblong hole until a dimension of X= 0-2 mm is reached.

• Tighten the screw (1) again.

318

Pos: 112.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEinstellen Schwadbreite @ 0\mod_1196673972744_78.docx @ 10589 @ 2 @ 1

13.9 Adjusting the swath width

Pos: 112.29 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Allgemeiner Text @ 0\mod_1196676313885_78.docx @ 10726 @ @ 1

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 112.30 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

Fig. 269:

The swath width is adjusted by means of the swath plates at the rear of the disc mowers.

13.9.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 112.31 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Achtung: Falsch eingestellte Schwadbleche @ 186\mod_1379930719612_78.docx @ 1602505 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

With the sideshift version, incorrectly set swath plates may damage the front wheels of the machine.

• With the sideshift version, the swath plates must always be moved to the position which is marked by the label.

Pos: 112.32 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Einstellen Schwadbreite Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196676466135_78.docx @ 10745 @ @ 1

Set the swath width so that the mower track is kept free.

• Unscrew the ring nut (1).

• Adjust the swath width.

• Tighten the ring nut (1) again.

Note

Swath width setting: with the swath grouping option (BSS), the swath width of the front mowing unit must be set as narrow as possible. This ensures that there is enough free space available to hold the crop of the lateral mowing units.

Pos: 112.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

319

Adjusting the mowing units

Pos: 112.34 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

13.9.2 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 112.35 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Einstellen Schwadbreite Seitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196676735025_78.docx @ 10764 @ @ 1

Fig. 270:

Adjust the swath width.

• Unscrew the ring nut (1).

• Adjust the swath width.

• Tighten the ring nut (1) again.

Note

Pos: 112.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Set more free space for overcut.

The narrower the swath width setting on the outer swath boards (2) of the lateral mowing units, the more free space for overcut is achieved.

320

Pos: 112.37.1 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/An-/Abbau der Verlängerung BSS Schwadbreite @ 348\mod_1436170787680_78.docx @ 2622445 @ 23 @ 1

13.10 Mounting/Dismounting BSS Swath Width for BiG M CV

Adjusting the mowing units

The following work steps must be performed for the right and left cross conveyor each.

13.10.1 Removing Extension on Cross Conveyor Left/Right

1 2

3

2

BM 420 0178

Fig. 271

3

2

Fig. 272

2 1

2 1

BM 420 0179

2

BM 420 0180

Fig. 273

• Remove the linch pins (1) on the three quick release fasteners (2) of the extension on the cross conveyor.

• Open quick locks.

• Pull the both spring cotter pins (3) out of the locking bolts at the underside of the cross conveyor.

321

Adjusting the mowing units

1

BM 420 0183

Fig. 274

• Remove extension (1) from cross conveyor.

Pos: 112.37.2 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Zusatzräumer demontieren @ 349\mod_1436187933892_78.docx @ 2623062 @ 3 @ 1

13.10.2 Dismounting Additional Scraper on Left/Right

1 2

BM 420 01081

Fig. 275

• Remove the linch pin (1) from the profile shaft of the auger.

• Remove additional scraper to the front from the shaft.

1

2

BM 420 0182

Pos: 112.37.3 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 276

• Slide shaft guard (1) over the profile shaft and screw with hexagon head screws M10 x 20

A3G (2).

322

Pos: 112.37.4 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Verlängerung BSS Schwadbreite anbauen @ 349\mod_1436189108802_78.docx @ 2623183 @ 3 @ 1

13.10.3 Mounting Extension on Cross Conveyor Left/Right

2

1

Adjusting the mowing units

BM 420 0186

Fig. 277

• Push extension (1) over the auger tray. To do this, insert the locking bolts (2) into the existing boreholes.

1 2

3

2

BM 420 0178

Fig. 278

3

2

2 1

BM 420 0179

Fig. 279

323

Adjusting the mowing units

2 1

2

BM 420 0180

Fig. 280

• Tighten the extension by means of three tensioning devices (2) and secure using linch pins

(1).

• Fill the locking bolts by means of discs d = 10 and secure by means of spring cotter pins (3).

Pos: 112.37.5 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Schwadbreite / Breitablage/Zusatzräumer montieren @ 349\mod_1436191091206_78.docx @ 2623335 @ 3 @ 1

13.10.4 Mounting Additional Scraper on Left/Right

1

2

BM 420 0182

Fig. 281

• Unscrew hexagon head screws (2) and remove shaft guard (1) from profile shaft.

1 2

BM 420 01081

Pos: 112.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 282

• Slide additional scraper (2) onto profile shaft and secure using the linch pin (1).

324

Pos: 112.39 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Einstellung der Querlenker an den Seitenmähwerken @ 348\mod_1435827993573_78.docx @ 2620659 @ 2 @ 1

13.11

Adjusting the mowing units

Setting the Transverse Links on the Side Mounted Mowers

Caution!

If the cutting height is 0°, the distance dimension “a” between side sheet (4) and outrigger arm

(5) must not be less than 70 mm.

3

1 a

Pos: 112.40 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/LLeitbleche @ 0\mod_1196677535025_78.docx @ 10802 @ 2 @ 1

2

4 5

BM 400 0155

Fig. 283

The side mounted mowers (3) are aligned by means of transverse links (1).

• Loosen counter nut (2) on transverse link (1).

• Adjust the transverse links (1) until dimension a is 70 mm between side mounted mower (4) and outrigger arm (5).

• Tighten counter nut (2) on transverse link (1).

Pos: 112.41 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

13.12.1

Pos: 112.42 /BA/Einstellungen/Mähwerke/Leitbleche Frontmähwerk BM 400/420 @ 0\mod_1196677613072_78.docx @ 10821 @ @ 1

Front mowing unit

1

3

4

2

BM 400 0156

Pos: 113 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 284

Deflector plates are located on the front mowing unit (3) in the swath former area (2); these are fitted to the housing with fastening screws (1).

• If the swathing is uneven examine the deflector plates (4) for deformation, and straighten them if necessary.

325

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.1.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/P-T/Sonderausstattung- Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196678406869_78.docx @ 10859 @ 1 @ 1

Pos: 114.1.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/UUmbau der Einheit Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer @ 0\mod_1196679637806_78.docx @ 10918 @ 2 @ 1

14.1 Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an Auger-Type Cross Conveyor

Pos: 114.1.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Es können Antriebselemente in Bewegung geraten @ 0\mod_1196679836822_78.docx @ 10937 @ @ 1

Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine, or in the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for the installation and removal of the auger-type cross conveyor (total weight of the conveyors = approx. 300 kg).

Pos: 114.1.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/MähwerkeWarnung - Einheit Zetterprallblech bzw. Einheit Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 453\mod_1463998298539_78.docx @ 3078738 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life or serious injuries if the conditioning sheet unit or the auger conveyor unit is not mounted.

The machine must not be placed in operation until the conditioning sheet unit or the auger conveyor unit has been properly installed.

Pos: 114.1.5 /BA/Erstinbetriebnahme/Vorsätze/Zugelassene Hebezeuge verwenden @ 15\mod_1233070508790_78.docx @ 177993 @ @ 1

DANGER! – Detaching!

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• Use only suitable and approved lifting gear to assemble and disassemble the parts..

Pos: 114.1.6 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer @ 0\mod_1196678706338_78.docx @ 10879 @ @ 1

Note

The following description shows the installation of the auger-type cross conveyor on the right hand mower side. The installation on the left-hand mower side has to be carried out in an analogous way.

Depending on how the machine is equipped, the "tedder deflector plate" can optionally be converted to an "auger-type cross conveyor" or vice versa.

Pos: 114.1.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The process for converting the "tedder deflector plate" to an auger-type cross conveyor is described below.

Prerequisite:

• Lower all lateral mowing units (1) on to a firm subsoil.

• Switching off the engine

• Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

326

Pos: 114.1.8 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zetterprallblech in Hebezeug hängen @ 349\mod_1436335137323_78.docx @ 2624945 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.1 Hooking Conditioner Baffle Sheet into Hoist

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 285

• Hook the fastening chains (2) of a suitable hoist into the ring screws (3) and (4) of conditioner baffle sheet (1).

Pos: 114.1.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Spannschlösser lösen @ 0\mod_1196684641931_78.docx @ 11036 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.2 Releasing the tension jacks

3

1

3

4

2

5

BM 400 0216

Pos: 114.1.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 286

Release the tension jacks (1) and (2) located at the outer side of the mower (3).

Release the inner tension jacks (3) and (4) of the mowing unit (3).

327

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.1.11 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zetterprallblech entfernen @ 0\mod_1196686072900_78.docx @ 11055 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.3 Removing the tedder deflector plate

Fig. 287

• Slightly raise the tedder deflector plate (1) and remove it sideways from the mowing unit (2).

Note - Removed tedder deflector plate

Pos: 114.1.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Zinken prüfen @ 0\mod_1196686894088_78.docx @ 11074 @ 3 @ 1

Store the tedder deflector plate (1) in a secure and dry place.

14.1.4 Checking the Tines

Pos: 114.1.13 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Achtung - gebrochene Zinken @ 0\mod_1196670786291_78.docx @ 10437 @ @ 1

Caution! - Damaged or missing tines

Effect: Damages to the machine.

• Bent and broken prongs cause an imbalance.

• Straighten any bent tines.

• Replace any broken tines.

Pos: 114.1.14 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Zinken prüfen @ 349\mod_1436255930667_78.docx @ 2623824 @ @ 1

3

2

1

BM 420 0187

Pos: 114.1.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 288

• Check V-shaped tines (1) and retaining bolts (2) on mower (3) for damage.

328

Pos: 114.1.16 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Zetterprallblech auf Schneckenquerförderer/Schutzblech demontieren @ 0\mod_1196688190822_78.docx @ 11112 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.5 Removing the guard

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 289:

• Remove the hexagon head cap screws (1).

• Remove the guard (2) and store it in a secure place.

329

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.3.1 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schneckenquerförderer anbauen @ 349\mod_1436345329814_78.docx @ 2625242 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.6 Mounting Auger-type Cross Conveyor

3

1

1

5

2

4

BM 400 0157

Fig. 290

• Mount securing chains (1) of hoist on the ring screws (2) and (3) of auger-type cross conveyor (4).

• Slowly lower the auger-type cross conveyor (4) onto the mower (5).

Fig. 291

• Lower auger-type cross conveyor into guide pins (1) and (2).

Note

Pos: 114.3.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The surfaces (3) and (4) have to be flat against either side of the mower.

330

Pos: 114.3.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Spannschlösser schließen @ 0\mod_1196689498291_78.docx @ 11209 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.7 Locking the tension jacks

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 292

• Lock the tension jacks (1) and (2) located on the inner side of the mowing unit (3).

• Also lock the outer tension jacks (4) and (5).

Note

Pos: 114.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/KKeilriemen spannen @ 349\mod_1436278111352_78.docx @ 2624872 @ 3 @ 1

Be sure the tension jacks (1) and (2) are under tension when locked; retighten as required.

14.1.8

Pos: 114.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Keilriemen spannen @ 0\mod_1196690564916_78.docx @ 11266 @ @ 1

Tensioning the V-belt

1

3

4

2

Fig. 293

• Use the mounting lever (1) to raise the idler pulley (2).

• Place the V-belt (3) on to the pulley (4).

• Lower the idler pulley (2) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (1).

Use the mounting lever (1) supplied in the on-board tool box.

Pos: 114.6 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schutzblech montieren @ 0\mod_1196690733244_78.docx @ 11285 @ 3 @ 1

With the V-belt under tension, dimension X has to be equal to approx. 80 mm.

BM 400 0159

331

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

14.1.9 Installing the guard

Fig. 294

Pos: 114.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Drehzahlsensor anschließen @ 186\mod_1379935617862_78.docx @ 1603133 @ 3 @ 1

• Install the guard (1) on to the mowing unit (3) using the hexagon head cap screws (2).

14.1.10 Connecting Speed Sensor and Hydraulics

Pos: 114.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 295

• Connect speed sensor cable (1) with speed sensor cable (2) of the auger-type cross conveyor.

• Insert the hydraulic plug of the auger-type cross conveyor into the hydraulic bushing of the lateral mowing unit.

332

Pos: 114.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schmierleitungen umlegen @ 0\mod_1196695905681_78.docx @ 11909 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.11 Relaying the Lubrication Lines

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 296

When the machine is converted from a "Tedder deflector plate unit" to an "Auger-type cross conveyor", the lubrication lines must be relaid as described below.

• Loosen lubrication line (1) at the T-screw connection (2).

• Loosen the sealing screw (3) on the lubricating point connection.

• Unto the lubrication connection (1) to the auger bearing (BSS).

• Install the sealing screw (2) on the T-screw connection

Pos: 114.10 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Montageanleitung der Pralltücher für Big M 400 mit BSS @ 0\mod_1196746211375_78.docx @ 11935 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.12 Installation Instructions – Bulge Bags for BiG M 400 / BiG M 420 with BSS

5

2 4

2

6

3

1

BM 400 0160

Pos: 114.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 297

Placing bulge bags on the right and left auger hoods reduces the amount of dirt in the cooling air.

Installation instructions:

• Screw bulge bags securely onto the auger hoods (1). (Install coach bolts from below.)

• Pull the rod (2) through the eyes of the bulge bag (3)

• Insert the rod (2) from behind into the hole on the frame (4). Insert the rod (2) into the hole on the mowing unit support from above in front (5) and secure it with the spring cotter pin

(6).

333

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.12.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSchneckenkontrolle einschalten @ 0\mod_1196746530468_78.docx @ 11954 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.13 Switching on the auger monitoring mode

Pos: 114.12.2 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete WarnhinweiseWarnung - Motor nicht in geschlossenen Räumen laufen lassen (GA) @ 451\mod_1462884110769_78.docx @ 3067402 @ @ 1

Warning!

Risk of poisoning from toxic exhaust gases!

If the machine is operated in closed rooms without adequate ventilation, the pollutant load increases in the air.

• Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction unit.

• Provide the room with adequate ventilation.

Pos: 114.12.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Schneckenkontrolle einschalten @ 349\mod_1436422425815_78.docx @ 2626296 @ @ 1

Auger control must be activated as follows in the info centre:

• Move ignition key to position I or II

• Wait for the self test to run down

Note

After the ignition has been switched on, the start screen “Road Travel or Field Mode” appears in the display

CV

50 cm

Semi

Fig. 298

• Use key to bring up menu level on rotary potentiometer

• Use rotary potentiometer to choose main menu 1

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

“Settings”.

• Select menu 1-2 “Machine Setting” with the rotary potentiometer.

• Press the rotary potentiometer.

The display shows menu level “Machine Setting”.

• The basic screen is called by actuating the D key.

• Use rotary potentiometer to choose the desired setting, the selection box is highlighted in colour.

• Press rotary potentiometer to jump into the selection box (5).

• Set the desired value in the selection box (5) by using the rotary potentiometer.

Both augers on

Right auger on

Left auger on

Both augers off

334

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

• Pressing the rotary potentiometer causes the setting to be applied and returns you from the selection box.

key on the rotary potentiometer takes you one menu level back.

Pos: 114.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Umbau Schneckenquerförderer auf "Einheit Zetterprallblech" @ 453\mod_1464001523412_78.docx @ 3078827 @ 3 @ 1

14.1.14 Converting Auger Conveyor to “Conditioning Sheet Unit”

Conversion is in reverse order.

WARNING!

Danger to life or serious injuries by forcibly ejected stones during operation.

• After the auger conveyor has been removed, the conditioning sheets must be remounted!

(refer to chapter “Mounting Auger Conveyor”). However, they must be remounted in reverse order, otherwise the operating licence becomes void.

3

2

1

BM 420 0187

Fig. 299

Pos: 114.14 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Warnung - Einheit Zetterprallblech bzw. Einheit Schneckenquerförderer nicht angebaut. @ 453\mod_1463998298539_78.docx @ 3078738 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Danger to life or serious injuries if the conditioning sheet unit or the auger conveyor unit is not mounted.

Pos: 114.15 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Zusatzausrüstung- Mulchgerät @ 0\mod_1196750242750_78.docx @ 12454 @ 2 @ 1

The machine must not be placed in operation until the conditioning sheet unit or the auger conveyor unit has been properly installed.

14.2 Additional Equipment – Mulching Device

Mulching devices can be used as additional equipment. For further information, please ask the mulching device dealer

Address:

Van Wamel BV

Energieweg 1

NL-6658 AE Beneden-Leeuwen

Pos: 114.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

Only attachment and detachment of mowing units is described below.

For information on operation, service, attaching, and detaching mulching devices, please consult the mulching device manufacturer.

335

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.17.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/AAbbau der Mäheinheiten @ 0\mod_1196750875734_78.docx @ 12492 @ 2 @ 1

14.3 Removing Mowing Units

Pos: 114.17.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Umbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.docx @ 12473 @ @ 1

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

Pos: 114.17.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

14.3.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 114.17.4 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Vorraussetzung am Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196751006250_78.docx @ 12530 @ @ 1

The following conditions must be met in advance on the BiG M:

• The front mowing unit is in transport position

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away

• Move the "Travelling Gear" release switch to position I (off)

• Move release switch for "Road/field" to position II (field mode)

• Close the shut-off valve for the front outrigger

Pos: 114.17.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau Schutztuch @ 0\mod_1196751259531_78.docx @ 12549 @ @ 1

Removing the Guard Cloth

Pos: 114.17.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 300

• Detach the guard cloth (1) with the expander band (2)

336

Pos: 114.17.7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/D/Demontage der Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751819984_78.docx @ 12594 @ 3 @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

14.3.2 Removing of the compensation springs

Pos: 114.17.7.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.docx @ 12575 @ @ 1

Danger! - Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Pos: 114.17.7.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Demontage Entlastungsfedern BM 420 @ 86\mod_1319617657714_78.docx @ 739404 @ @ 1

2 2 3

3 1

1

Fig. 301

Note

Detach the compensation spring (1) only in transport position.

To do this:

• Release the cotter pin (2)

• Detach the compensation springs (1) and set down the front mowing unit

With hydraulic front guard flap option:

Pos: 114.17.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (3) and put them down on front mowing unit

BM 420 0053

337

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.17.9 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau der Gelenkwelle: @ 0\mod_1196752140328_78.docx @ 12651 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.3 To remove the PTO shaft:

Fig. 302

• Open the shut-off valve for the front outrigger.

• Lower the front mowing unit into working position

• Detach the support chain (1)

• Remove the screw (2) from the PTO shaft

• Pull the PTO shaft (3) off the front mower

• Connect the PTO shaft (3) with support chain (1) to the "Weiste" triangle (4).

Pos: 114.17.10 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Schmierleitung am Verteiler trennen @ 149\mod_1361518645841_78.docx @ 1332151 @ @ 1

Fig. 303

• Disconnect the lubrication line (1) to the distributor (2).

Pos: 114.17.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

If the pressure on the lubrication lines is too high, loosen a lubrication point first to reduce the pressure. Do not close the line (1)! (Grease under high pressure)

338

Pos: 114.17.12 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Abbau des Weistedreiecks BM 420 @ 86\mod_1320145370002_78.docx @ 741555 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.4 Remove the Weiste Triangle

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 304

• Raise the front lifting gear slightly inching with the (8) key (first gear) on the multi-function lever

This will relieve the locking bolts (1) on the Weiste triangle.

• Dismount the locking bolt (1) and remove it

• Adjust the top suspension arm (2) until it is free of tension

CAUTION! - Do not lower the front mowing unit too far

Effect: Damage to the machine

In the following work step, make certain not to lower the front lifting gear too far. Doing so will damage the front mowing unit.

• You can use the (11) key on the multi-function lever to lower the front lifting gear until the front lifting gear is under the Weiste triangle

• Press the (8) key on the multi-function lever briefly (up to the first gear) to stop the lowering process

339

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Caution! - The front lifting gear is raised in reverse travel.

Effect: Damage to the machine

The (Road/Field) release switch must be in "Road Travel" position.

Fig. 305

Switch the (Road/Field) release switch into "Road Travel" position.

Note

This prevents the front lifting gear from automatically being raised during reverse travel.

Move the machine in reverse in Road mode.

Pos: 114.17.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der Mäheinheiten/Anbau des Frontmähwerks BM 420 @ 52\mod_1289230198187_78.docx @ 502516 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.5 Attaching the Front Mowing Unit

2 1

BMII-313

Fig.306

The front mowing unit is attached in the reverse order.

Pos: 114.17.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The lifting gear can be raised by inching operation (first step) with the (8) key on the multifunction lever.

Connect the cardan shaft (1) high on the Weiste triangle (2) to avoid a collision with the front mower plate

340

Pos: 114.17.15.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196757669828_78.docx @ 12767 @ 3 @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

14.3.6 Removing the Side Mowing Unit

Pos: 114.17.15.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Umbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.docx @ 12473 @ @ 1

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 114.17.15.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 1 Vorraussetzung @ 186\mod_1379945215196_78.docx @ 1605173 @ @ 1

Step 1:

The following prerequisites must be met:

– The traction drive release switch must be in position I, switched off.

– The road/field release switch must be in position II, field mode.

• The hydraulic axle suspension must be in mowing position, refer to chapter Info Centre

“Quick Access Hydraulic Axle Suspension”.

Pos: 114.17.15.4 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 2 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196758043531_78.docx @ 12805 @ @ 1

Step 2: for standard equipment:

Fig. 307

Set spring compensation to minimum.

To do this:

• Lift the lateral mowing units out through the headland position.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Move the socket pin (1) to pos. I and secure it with a linch pin.

Pos: 114.17.15.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position.

341

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.17.15.6 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen MäheinheitenSchritt 3 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 504\mod_1498199081265_78.docx @ 3471814 @ @ 1

Step 3:

Fig. 308

With hydraulic spring compensation design (optional):

• Lower the lateral mowing units into working position. the 5 compensation. or

6

6 key brings up hydraulically adjustable lateral spring

• Pressing keys and the to "zero bar". key reduces the pressure of the lateral mowing units

• Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Pos: 114.17.15.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 4 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196758874468_78.docx @ 12843 @ @ 1

Step 4:

Fig. 309

• Insert the clamping plate (1) (Item No. 233 505 0) from above into the right and left spring assemblies (2)

Note

Pos: 114.17.15.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Both clamping plates on the right and left sides are also required for dismantling just one mowing unit to make the outrigger arm free of tension.

342

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.17.15.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Einstellung an den Entlastungsfedern @ 0\mod_1196751594562_78.docx @ 12575 @ @ 1

Danger! - Setting on the compensation springs

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The compensation springs must only be removed in transport position. In the working position the compensation springs are subject to high tensile stress.

• Severe injury can be caused if the compensation springs are removed while in the working position.

• The lower threaded blocks on the compensation springs must be fully screwed in.

Pos: 114.17.15.10 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 5 Abbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196759083031_78.docx @ 12862 @ @ 1

Step 5:

Fig. 310

The spring assembly can be fitted to the outrigger arm instead of clamping plates.

To do this:

• Lift the lateral mowing unit (1) out through the headland position.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Drive the clamping sleeve out of the attachment bolt (2) and remove the fastening bolt (2).

• Use a suitable and reliable tool to secure the spring assemblies.

Note

Pos: 114.17.15.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The weight of a spring assembly is about 100 kg.

343

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.17.15.12 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Gewicht der Mäheinheit ca. 1500 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.docx @ 12976 @ @ 1

Danger!

Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of the mowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 114.17.15.13 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau Seitenmähwerke T1 @ 186\mod_1379943341269_78.docx @ 1605055 @ @ 1

Step 6:

Fig. 311

The mowing unit must be in the working position to be removed.

• Move the opposite mower unit into headland position and support it there.

• Connect the retaining chains (1) on the mowing unit (2).

Pos: 114.17.15.14 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau Seitenmähwerke T2 @ 186\mod_1379941554180_78.docx @ 1604958 @ @ 1

5 4 1 V

III

II

I

2

IV 6 IV

3

BM 400 0168

Fig. 312

• Detach the spring (1), only for the right lateral mowing unit.

Detaching the top link (2)

• Drive the clamping sleeve out of the lower attachment bolts (3) and remove the attachment bolt with disc.

• Remove the cube plug (I).

• Remove the lubrication line (II and (III).

• Expose all lines (lubrication lines; electrical lines; hydraulic lines) in the universal joint mount area. To do this, cut the relevant cable ties.

For cross conveyor design

• Disconnect the plug connection (V), speed sensor auger.

• Remove the hydraulic plug (V) from the hydraulic bushing.

Detaching the top link (4)

• Screw out fastening screws (5) and press the top link off the bolts.

Pos: 114.17.15.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Screw out fastening screw (6).

344

Pos: 114.17.15.16 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 6 Abbau Seitenmähwerke T3 @ 186\mod_1379939898882_78.docx @ 1604759 @ @ 1

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Fig. 313

• Align the double joint (2). To do this, turn the mowing unit manually on the outer blade drum until the attachment bolt (1) of the double joint is positioned vertically.

• Raise the mowing unit slightly with lifting equipment until the bolts of the universal joint mount have come out of the universal joint bracket.

• Move the mowing unit back to guide the double joint down from the shaft.

• Move the mowing unit away from the machine with lifting equipment and set it down securely.

Pos: 114.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Caution! - Lift the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.

Effect: Damages to the machine

• Never raise the outrigger arms higher than the headland position.

345

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.19.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196760080906_78.docx @ 12900 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.7 Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 114.19.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Umbau_Wartungsarbeiten @ 0\mod_1196750571265_78.docx @ 12473 @ @ 1

Danger! - Drive elements may be placed in motion during conversion and installation work on the machine.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.

• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure occur.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

• After conversion and installation work is complete, mount all safety devices properly again.

• Only use appropriate and authorised lifting gear for installation and removal of the mowing units (weight approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 114.19.3 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Abbau der seitlichen Mäheinheiten/Schritt 1 Vorraussetzung @ 186\mod_1379945215196_78.docx @ 1605173 @ @ 1

Step 1:

The following prerequisites must be met:

– The traction drive release switch must be in position I, switched off.

– The road/field release switch must be in position II, field mode.

• The hydraulic axle suspension must be in mowing position, refer to chapter Info Centre

“Quick Access Hydraulic Axle Suspension”.

Pos: 114.19.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Gewicht der Mäheinheit ca. 1500 kg @ 0\mod_1196762216406_78.docx @ 12976 @ @ 1

Danger!

Remove the ignition key and secure the vehicle and machine against rolling.

Only use appropriate and authorised lifting equipment for the installation and removal of the mowing units (total weight of mowing unit = approx. 1500 kg).

Pos: 114.19.5 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit/Schritt 2 Anbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196763875859_78.docx @ 13000 @ @ 1

Step2:

Pos: 114.19.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 314

• Remove the belt guard (1) on the outrigger arm

• Connect the mowing unit to the retaining chains and guide up to the outrigger arm

• Align the universal joint bracket (2) of the mowing unit to the universal joint mount (3) of the outrigger arm.

346

Special Equipment – Mowing Units

Pos: 114.19.7 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit/Schritt 3 Anbau seitl. Mäheinheit @ 0\mod_1196764155312_78.docx @ 13019 @ @ 1

Step 3:

Caution! - Attaching the double joint

Effect: Elevated danger of crushing hands

• Make certain when guiding in the double joint that the lifting equipment is not adjusted or moved. Only the technician is permitted to move the mowing unit manually on the front guard tube.

Fig. 315

• Align the double joint (2) until the attachment bolts (1) of the double joint are positioned vertically.

• Guide the double joint onto the drive PTO shaft

Note

To make it possible to lock in the profile toothing, the drive shaft can be turned by moving the power belt (4) on the outrigger arm.

• Installation of the Belt Guard on the Outrigger Arm

Pos: 114.19.8 /BA/Sonderausstatung/Umbau/Anbau der seitlichen Mäheinheit/Die weitere Montage erfolgt in umgekehrter Reihenfolge wie der Abbau @ 0\mod_1196764466359_78.docx @ 13038 @ 3 @ 1

14.3.8 The remainder of the installation is in reverse order to the removal procedure.

Caution!

Clamping plates not removed. (When using clamping plates)

Effect: Damages to the machine

• After attaching the mowing units, make certain the clamping plates have been removed

Pos: 115 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

After the mowing unit has been attached, lower the mowing unit down to the ground and remove the two clamping plates on the right and left side.

347

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 116.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Motor @ 0\mod_1196765008937_78.docx @ 13058 @ 1 @ 1

15 Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 116.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_1 @ 0\mod_1196765298062_78.docx @ 13096 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

• When working on the engine, always switch off the main battery switch!

• Store lubricants and fuels in suitable containers and make certain they are disposed of properly.

Pos: 116.3 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motor Übersicht Caterpillar C13 BM 420 @ 140\mod_1355223020134_78.docx @ 1246561 @ 3 @ 1

• Exercise caution when draining hot oil or fluid - danger of burns!

1

7

2 3

11

8

9

6

5

Fig. 316

1 Three-phase generator 24V

4

Pos: 116.4 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungsübersicht (Caterpillar) Auszug @ 142\mod_1358436411233_78.docx @ 1274715 @ 2 @ 1

5 Oil dip stick

7 Oil filling pipe

9 Three-phase generator 12V

11 Fuel pre-filter

10

2 ECM (engine control)

4 Starter

6 Work pump / steering pump

8 Refrigerant compressor

10 Oil filter

BM 420 0118

Pos: 116.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Only operating materials mentioned in the enclosed Caterpillar operating and maintenance manual may be used.

Engine Maintenance

All maintenance work on the engine must be carried out according to the intervals of the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual chapter Maintenance “Maintenance

Intervals”.

Oil change intervals

For information about oil change intervals, please refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual chapter Maintenance „Maintenance Intervals“.

348

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 116.6 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Allgemein Kühlflüssigkeit_Keilriemen_Sauberkeit @ 0\mod_1196765525515_78.docx @ 13115 @ @ 1

Cooling water and air intake hoses

Check the condition and fastening of cooling water and air intake hoses every 50 operating hours. Replace cooling water hoses and non-metallic parts on the air intake system every 2 years.

Check the engine, water cooler and exhaust system daily to ensure it is clean. Clean it if necessary.

Coolant

The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture of corrosion protection fluid and antifreeze in the factory. The coolant consists of 50 % anti-corrosion antifreeze and 50 % water.

Protection against freezing is ensured to approximately -37° C. See also the engine manufacturer's specifications.

Belts

All belts must be kept continuously under the proper tension.

For new belts, check the tension after the first 2 to 3 operating hours. If necessary, retighten.

Cleanliness

To protect against the danger of fire, clean the engine area and especially the exhaust system as well as the areas surrounding the brakes and gearbox, etc.

If the crop is very dry and there is a lot of dust, check the spots listed above more frequently for accumulations of dirt and clean if necessary.

Pos: 116.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

349

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 116.8 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle Motor Teil 1 von 2 BM 420_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358494036974_78.docx @ 1274805 @ 2 @ 1

15.3 Maintenance Table – Engine

Maintenance Work Maintenance Interval

Engine

Clean the engine compartment, radiator and radiator screen

Engine oil level check

Engine oil change

Engine oil filter change

Evaporator filter - Replace the element

Check/tighten/replace the V-belt of the three-phase generator

Inspection of seal and general condition

Check valve play, adjust as needed

X

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

X

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

X X Drain water separator

Exhaust aftertreatment device

Replace ignition plugs

Clean diesel particle filters

Fuel pre-filter change

Fuel filter insert

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

X Fuel level

Add fuel

Pos: 116.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Vent the fuel system

X

X

350

Pos: 116.10 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle Motor Teil 2 von 2 BM 420_Caterpillar @ 147\mod_1360825063231_78.docx @ 1315605 @ @ 1

Maintenance Work

Maintenance – Engine

Maintenance Interval

Cooling system

Engine coolant control

Change engine coolant

X

Refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual

X Air filter - main cartridge

Air filter - safety cartridge

Check the anti-freeze in the cooling system; top up with anti-freeze, if and when necessary.

Check hose connections

Check hoses and hose clamps of the air suction and cooling system for tight fit.

Check the fuel injection pipes for loose connections.

Check the turbo charger screw connections and hose connections for tight fit.

Pos: 116.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Have the starter checked X

Have the three-phase generator checked X

X

X

X

X

X

351

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 116.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSchmutzablagerung im Motorraum @ 0\mod_1196766936875_78.docx @ 13173 @ 2 @ 1

15.4 Contamination in the engine compartment

Pos: 116.13 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung Schmutzablagerung im Motorraum (2012-08-10 08:26:39) @ 0\mod_1196769316921_78.docx @ 13154 @ @ 1

Pos: 116.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Bild Motorraum Big M 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359633408648_78.docx @ 1300485 @ @ 1

Caution! - Contamination in the engine compartment

Effect: Danger of fire

• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard .

• Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

Fig. 317

Pos: 116.15 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMotorraum mit Druckluft säubern @ 0\mod_1196769980062_78.docx @ 13192 @ 2 @ 1

15.5 Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air

Pos: 116.16 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Warnung - Reinigung mit Druckluft_alt @ 0\mod_1196770018125_78.docx @ 13211 @ @ 1

Warning! - Cleaning with compressed air!

Effect: Loss of eyesight!

• Keep people well away from the working area.

• Wear suitable work clothes to perform cleaning jobs with compressed air (for example eye protection).

Pos: 116.17 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Verschmutzungen mit Druckluft wegblasen @ 0\mod_1196770153625_78.docx @ 13230 @ @ 1

When necessary, blow away the dirt and contamination and wipe off oil deposits.

Pos: 116.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

352

Pos: 116.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMotorölstand @ 41\mod_1272372368436_78.docx @ 376890 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

15.6 Engine oil level

Pos: 116.20 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Motorölstand Achtung! - Ölstand zu niedrig (2012-08-22 09:27:58) @ 41\mod_1272372487467_78.docx @ 376965 @ @ 1

Pos: 116.21 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMotorölstand prüfen @ 143\mod_1358504326125_78.docx @ 1275191 @ 3 @ 1

Caution! - The oil level is too low.

Effect: Engine damage

• It is absolutely essential for the life of the engine that you observe this oil level.

• Check the oil level when the machine in at a horizontal position.

• Do not start the engine if the level is below the bottom mark of the oil dipstick.

15.6.1 Checking Engine Oil Level

Pos: 116.22 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motoröl/Motorölstand Bild BM 420_Caterpillar @ 142\mod_1358499501091_78.docx @ 1274924 @ @ 1

2

1

Fig. 318

1) Oil dip stick 2) Cover

Pos: 116.23 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motoröl/Motorölstand prüfen Text_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358502949694_78.docx @ 1275043 @ @ 1

Carry out engine oil level check 5 minutes after switching off the engine.

Use a non-fibrous cloth for cleaning the oil dip stick.

• Clean the environment of the oil dip stick thoroughly.

• Pull out the oil dip stick, clean it and insert it completely.

• Pull out the oil dip stick and check the engine oil level.

The engine oil level is OK if it is displayed between the markings „ADD (Y)“ and „FULL (X)”.

• Push in the oil dip stick.

If the engine oil level is displayed under the marking „ADD (Y)“:

Pos: 116.24 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMotoröl auffüllen @ 138\mod_1354181404514_78.docx @ 1230837 @ 3 @ 1

• Top up engine oil (refer to chapter “Topping up Engine Oil”).

15.6.2 Topping up Engine Oil

Pos: 116.25 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motoröl/Motoröl auffüllen Text_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358503893017_78.docx @ 1275102 @ @ 1

Do not top up engine oil is the engine is hot.

• Top up the engine oil via oil filling pipe until the marking „FULL (X)“ is reached.

• Screw on the cover.

Pos: 116.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Allow the engine to run at low idle for a short time and switch off the engine.

• Check engine oil level after approx. 5 minutes (see chapter “Checking Engine Oil Level”).

353

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 116.27 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Motoröl und Filterwechsel (2012-08-22 08:27:22) @ 40\mod_1270034903316_78.docx @ 365711 @ 3 @ 1

15.6.3 Engine oil and filter replacement

Note

For further information please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instruction included with delivery (chapter on Engine oil and Filter replacement)

Pos: 116.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/KKraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider @ 41\mod_1272367873905_78.docx @ 376586 @ 2 @ 1

15.7 Fuel filter/water separator

Pos: 116.29 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter/Kraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider Bild BM 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359967242136_78.docx @ 1302430 @ @ 1

1

2

3

Fig. 319

Pos: 116.30 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter/Kraftstoffvorfilter / Wasserabscheider Text_Cateroillar @ 145\mod_1359968202096_78.docx @ 1302519 @ 33 @ 1

15.7.1 Replacing the Fuel Pre-Filter

• Close the shut-off valve (1).

• Unscrew the filter pan (2).

• Clean filter pan and filter insert.

Replace the filter insert if it is heavily soiled or damaged.

• Check the seal ring for the filter pan and replace it, if necessary.

• Wet the seal ring with diesel fuel and set it in place.

• Place the filter insert in the filter pan and screw the filter pan (1) on the filter housing.

• Open the shut-off valve (1).

15.7.2 Emptying the Water Separator

Pos: 116.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The water which is present in the fuel is collected in the inspection glass (3). Check every day if water has accumulated in the viewing glass (3). Drain the accumulated water and collect it in a suitable container.

• Open the drain plug (4).

Collect draining water in a suitable container.

• Close the drain plug (4).

Dispose of the water according to the applicable provisions.

354

Pos: 116.32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/KKraftstoff-Filtereinsatz ersetzen @ 57\mod_1295937605015_78.docx @ 547945 @ 2 @ 1

15.8 Replacing the fuel filter insert

Pos: 116.33 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter/Kraftstoff-Filtereinsatz ersetzen Bild BM 420_Caterpillar mit Legende @ 148\mod_1361348591560_78.docx @ 1324336 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

1

2

3

Fig. 320

1) Shut-off valve 2) Fuel filter

Pos: 116.34 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffvorfilter/Kraftstoff-Filtereinsatz ersetzen Text allgemein_Caterpillar @ 148\mod_1361354678392_78.docx @ 1325665 @ @ 1

• Open the filler cap to prevent excess pressure in the fuel tank.

• Close the shut-off valve on the fuel pre-filter.

• Unscrew the fuel filter by using a strap wrench.

• Clean the sealing surface of the filter socket.

• Wet the seal of the new fuel filter with diesel and screw on the fuel filter.

• Tighten the fuel filter according to the imprinted instructions.

• Open the shut-off valve on the fuel pre-filter.

• Vent the fuel system.

Pos: 116.35 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Hinweis Nähere Information siehe BA des Motorherstellers @ 57\mod_1295937787078_78.docx @ 547997 @ @ 1

Pos: 116.36 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on maintenance).

355

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 116.37 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoff @ 0\mod_1196779500703_78.docx @ 14656 @ 2 @ 1

15.9 Fuel

Warning! - Danger of explosion!

• Never fill tank while the engine is running.

Handle fuel carefully. It is readily flammable. Do not smoke when adding fuel to the machine and make certain there are no open flames or sources of sparks in the vicinity.

Fuel must only be added outdoors. Prevent fires by keeping the machine free of dirt and grease residue. Always dispose of spilled fuel.

Quality and purity of fuel are very important for consistent performance and a long engine service life.

For temperatures under 10°C (50°F), always use winter fuel.

Pos: 116.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

For further information please refer to:

• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on fuels)

• The engine manufacturer’s fuel specification, included with delivery

356

Pos: 116.39 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/TTanken @ 41\mod_1271676291625_78.docx @ 372060 @ 2 @ 1

15.10 Tanks

Pos: 116.40 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Kraftstoff tanken Bild BM 400 @ 0\mod_1196779964656_78.docx @ 14675 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

Fig. 321

Pos: 116.41 /BA/Fahren und Transport/Modulgruppe/Big M 400/500/Tanken Text (2012-08-09 14:45:20) @ 41\mod_1271676476609_78.docx @ 372085 @ @ 1

Pos: 116.42 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Tanken/Fassungsvermögen 700 Liter @ 41\mod_1271832241976_78.docx @ 373233 @ @ 1

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key, and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Clean grass and dust from the area around the filler neck (1).

• Open the tank cover.

• Fill the fuel tank. (Use only clean fuel in the tank. If necessary, filter the fuel before adding it to the tank.)

• Monitor tank filling on the fuel gauge in the Info Centre display.

• Seal the tank cover tightly.

• Dispose of spilled fuel.

Note

Fill the fuel tank daily after finishing operation to prevent condensation water from forming and freezing in cold weather.

Pos: 116.43 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Capacity: about 700 litres

357

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 116.44 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Kraftstoffanlage entlüften @ 0\mod_1196780180531_78.docx @ 14694 @ 2 @ 1

15.11 Venting the fuel system

Note

For further information please refer to :

• Engine manufacturer’s operating instructions, included with delivery (chapter on venting the fuel system).

The fuel system must be vented if necessary after a lengthy standstill.

Pos: 116.45 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel/Motorkühlmittel- Allgemein @ 186\mod_1380000935141_78.docx @ 1605955 @ 2 @ 1

Warning!

Cooling system density additives may not be used.

Pos: 116.46 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cooling system is filled ex works with a special coolant. This coolant protects against corrosion and provides frost protection up to –37° C. The cooling system must always be filled with engine coolant, independently of the season.

If no coolant is available, then - depending on the season -, you should use a mixture of 50 % ethylene glycol antifreeze/anticorrosion agent and 50 % clear, soft water. This mixture also provides corrosion and freezing protection up to –37 ° C.

Note

Follow the engine coolant regulations of the engine manufacturer. For further information please refer to:

• The engine manufacturer’s fuel specification.

358

Pos: 116.47 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMotorkühlmittel – Kontrolle @ 57\mod_1295938314140_78.docx @ 548023 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Engine

15.13 Engine coolant – checks and controls

Pos: 116.48 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Warnung! - Heißer Verschlussdeckel (2012-08-10 07:46:51) @ 57\mod_1295938377734_78.docx @ 548049 @ @ 1

Warning! - Hot cover

Effect: Hand burns

• Never open the cover (1) while the engine is hot. Switch off the engine and wait until the engine has cooled down.

Pos: 116.49 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel/Motorkühlmittel Kontrolle Bild BM 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359970942896_78.doc x @ 1302698 @ @ 1

1

2

BM 420 0136

Fig. 322

Pos: 116.50 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Motorkühlmittel/Motorkühlmittel - Kontrolle Text allgemein @ 57\mod_1295882421968_78.docx @ 547854 @ @ 1

Pos: 116.51 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Check:

• Check the level of engine coolant every day.

• The engine coolant level must reach up to the middle of the control eye (2)

• If necessary, top up the engine coolant

Fill:

• Turn the cover (1) to the first notch and wait until the overpressure reduces

• Open the cover (1) completely and fill with engine coolant up to the middle of the viewing pane (2).

• Close the cover (1) again.

359

Maintenance – Engine

Pos: 116.52 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/LLuftfilter @ 41\mod_1271407012930_78.docx @ 371355 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 116.53 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Luftfilter Bild BM 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359550912421_78.docx @ 1297084 @ @ 1

3 3

1

2

BM 420 130

Pos: 116.54 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Luftfilter Text mit Klammern @ 86\mod_1320066913243_78.docx @ 741164 @ @ 1

Fig. 323

Pos: 116.55 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Perform air filter maintenance regularly, but at least when the error message filter appears in the Info Centre Display. for a dirty air

Clean the air filter

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and secure the machine from rolling away

• Unlock the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1)

• Pull out the filter insert (3) carefully with slight rotary movements

• Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing

• Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside

• Replace filter inserts that are excessively dirty or damaged Filter inserts that were installed more than 4 years ago must also be replaced.

• Install the filter insert again

• Reinstall cover (1) and secure with clamps

360

Pos: 116.56 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSicherheitspatrone @ 0\mod_1196781597406_78.docx @ 14812 @ 3 @ 1

15.14.1 Safety cartridge

Pos: 116.57 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Sicherheitspatrone Bild BM 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359552739846_78.docx @ 1297232 @ @ 1

1

2

Pos: 116.58 /BA/Wartung/Luftfilter/Sicherheitspatrone Text BM 420 @ 145\mod_1359552426105_78.docx @ 1297203 @ @ 1

Fig. 324

Pos: 117 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Replace safety cartridge

Safety cartridges must not be cleaned and used again!

• Remove the filter insert (3)

• Pull out the safety cartridge (4) with slight rotary movements

• Clean the interior area and the seal surfaces of the filter housing

• Install the new safety cartridge

• Install the cleaned or new filter insert (3)

• Reinstall cover (1) and secure with clamps (2)

Maintenance – Engine

3 3

4

4

BM 420 131

361

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung- Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196781956937_78.docx @ 14832 @ 1 @ 1

16

Pos: 118.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSpezielle Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.docx @ 9134 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

16.1 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 118.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_1 @ 0\mod_1196782315875_78.docx @ 14851 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning.

• The cutting discs continue to run!

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!

Pos: 118.4 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Bei unregelmäßiger Kontrolle der Messerklingen und Haltebolzen @ 0\mod_1196782406281_78.docx @ 14870 @ @ 1

Danger! - When checking the cutter blades and retaining bolts only sporadically

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always check the mowing units for damaged, missing or worn blades, retaining bolts, leaf springs and cutting discs/blade drum before starting operation; replace any parts that are damaged, missing or worn!

• Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!

Pos: 118.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!

• Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!

362

Pos: 118.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/PProbelauf @ 0\mod_1196833698843_78.docx @ 15023 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

16.1.1 Test run

Pos: 118.7 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Probelauf Mehrzahl @ 0\mod_1196782825187_78.docx @ 14889 @ @ 1

Pos: 118.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EErsatzteile @ 0\mod_1196782991234_78.docx @ 14927 @ 2 @ 1

Danger! - Testing the machine after repair, maintenance or cleaning work and after technical intervention.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries

• The mowing unit must be in working position

• Do not switch on the drives until the mowing units are resting on the ground and you are absolutely sure that neither persons, animals nor objects are in the danger zone.

• Start a trial run of the machine only from the driver’s seat.

16.2 Spare Parts

Pos: 118.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/MähwerkeWARNUNG - Verwendung von nicht zugelassenen Ersatzteilen @ 308\mod_1417011577394_78.docx @ 2392925 @ @ 1

Warning! - Using non-approved spare parts.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or loss of warranty claims as well as exclusion of liability

• Use only authentic KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer.

The use of spare parts, accessories or additional equipment not manufactured, tested or approved by KRONE will exclude any liability for consequential damage.

Pos: 118.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/WWerkzeugkasten @ 0\mod_1196832731327_78.docx @ 14985 @ 2 @ 1

16.3 Tool box

Pos: 118.11 /BA/Wartung/Werkzeugkasten/Werkzeugkasten Bild Big M 420_Caterpillar @ 148\mod_1361344143921_78.docx @ 1323986 @ @ 1

BM 420 0147

Fig.325

Pos: 118.12 /BA/Wartung/Werkzeugkasten/Werkzeugkasten Text @ 87\mod_1320314730733_78.docx @ 744686 @ @ 1

Pos: 118.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Each one tool box is located behind the flaps (1) on the right and left machine side.

The on-board tool as well as the mounting parts for the first installation are located in the left tool box.

363

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.14 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle- Mähwerke BIG M 420 @ 86\mod_1320145802321_78.docx @ 741583 @ 2 @ 1

16.4 Maintenance Table – Mowing Units

Maintenance interval

1

Main gearbox – CV lateral mowing units

Oil level check

2

Angular gearbox for front mower CV+CRi

Oil level check

3

4

Input gearbox for front mower CV+CRi

Oil level check

Front mower speed gearbox (CV)

Oil level check

5

Angular gearbox for front mower CR

Oil level check

6 Gearbox for top roller drive CRi (optional)

Oil level check

7

Front mower cutter bar CV + CRi

Oil level check

8

Cutter bar for lateral mowing units

Oil level check

Pos: 118.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

9

Cutter blades

Check screw

10

Mowing discs / mower drum

Check

Screw

11

Rotary hub

Check

Screw

12

Conditioner belt drive

13

Clean

Screw

V-shaped tines and retaining bolts

Check

Screw

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

364

Pos: 118.16.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/AAnziehdrehmomente @ 202\mod_1385711894606_78.docx @ 1693123 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.16.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMetrische Gewindeschrauben mit Regelgewinde @ 322\mod_1424945442462_78.docx @ 2483466 @ 3 @ 1

16.5.1 Metric Thread Screws with Control Thread

Pos: 118.16.3 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anziehdrehmomente/Anziehdrehmomente Metrische Gewindeschrauben mit Regelgewinde Tabelle @ 321\mod_1424760222607_78.docx @ 2477725 @ @ 1

NOTICE

The table does not apply to countersunk screws with hexagonal socket in case the countersunk screw is tightened via hexagonal socket.

A = thread size

Tightening torque in Nm (unless otherwise stated)

(stability class can be seen on screw head)

A

Stability class

5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9

Tightening torque (Nm)

Pos: 118.16.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

M6 10 15 18

M8 25 36 43

M10 29 49 72 84

M12 42 85 125 145

M14 135 200 235

M16 210 310 365

M20 425 610 710

M22 571 832 972

M24

M27

M30

730 1050 1220

1100 1550 1800

1450 2100 2450

365

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.16.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMetrische Gewindeschrauben mit Feingewinde @ 322\mod_1424945855944_78.docx @ 2484627 @ 3 @ 1

16.5.2 Metric Thread Screws with Fine Thread

Pos: 118.16.6 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anziehdrehmomente/Anziehdrehmomente Metrische Gewindeschrauben mit Feingewinde Tabelle @ 321\mod_1424845229172_78.docx @ 2480186 @ @ 1

Tightening torque in Nm (unless otherwise stated)

A

Stability class

5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9

A = thread size

(stability class can be seen on screw head)

M12 x 1.5

M14 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5

M18 x 1.5

M20 x 1.5

M24 x 2

Tightening torque (Nm)

88 130 152

145 213 249

222 327 382

368

465 662 775

787

525

1121

614

1312

1148 1635 1914 M27 x 2

M30 x 1.5

Pos: 118.16.7 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMetrische Gewindeschrauben mit Senkkopf und Innensechskant @ 323\mod_1424945970760_78.docx @ 2484818 @ 3 @ 1

800 2100 2650

16.5.3 Metric Thread Screws with Countersunk Head and Hexagonal Socket

Pos: 118.16.8 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anziehdrehmomente/Anziehdrehmomente Metrische Gewindeschrauben mit Senkkopf und Innensechskant Tabelle @ 321\mod_1424843938347_78.docx @ 2480155 @ @ 1

NOTICE

The table applies only to countersunk screws with hexagonal socket and metric thread which are tightened via hexagonal socket.

Tightening torque in Nm (unless otherwise stated)

A = thread size

(stability class can be seen on screw head)

A

Stability class

5.6 8.8 10.9 12.9

M4

Tightening torque (Nm)

2.5 3.5 4.1

A

M8 20 29 35

M10 23 39 58 67

Pos: 118.16.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

M14 108 160 188

M16 168 248 292

M20 340 488 568

BM 400 0234

366

Pos: 118.16.10 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Anziehdrehmomente für Verschlussschrauben und Entlüftungsventile an Getrieben @ 440\mod_1458044570208_78.docx @ 3012098 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

16.5.4 Tightening Torques for Locking Screws and Bleed Valves on the Gearboxes

Pos: 118.16.11 /BA/Wartung/Hinweis Anziehdrehmomente für Verschlussschrauben und Entlüftungsventile @ 454\mod_1464167982332_78.docx @ 3083076 @ @ 1

NOTE

The tightening torques only apply to assembly of locking screws, viewing glasses, ventilation and breather filters and bleed valves in gearboxes with cast housings or aluminium or steel housings. The term “locking screw” includes the drain plug, the inspection screw as well as the ventilation and breather filters.

Pos: 118.16.12 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anziehdrehmomente/Anziehdrehmomente Verschlussschrauben an Getrieben_Tabelle @ 454\mod_1464167170747_78.docx @ 3083045 @ @ 1

This table applies only to locking screws with external hex in connection with copper seal ring for bleed valves made of brass with shaped seal ring.

Thread Locking screw and viewing glass with copper ring*)

Ventilation/breather filter made of steel

Bleed valve made of brass

Ventilation and breather filter made of brass

Aluminium Steel and cast Aluminium Steel and cast

Maximum tightening torque (Nm) (±10%)

M10x1

M12 x 1.5

8

14

G1/4“

M14 x 1.5

M16 x 1.5 45

M18 x 1.5 50

M20 x 1.5

G1/2“

40

45

14

16

24

30

32

32

24

30

M22X1.5

M24x1.5

G3/4“

M33x2

G1“

M42x1.5

G1 1/4“

Pos: 118.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

*) Always replace copper rings

35

60

60

80

80

100

100

367

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.18 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/A/Abweichende Anziehdrehmomente @ 369\mod_1441722353234_78.docx @ 2702740 @ 3 @ 1

16.5.5 Deviating Tightening Torques

Pos: 118.19 /BA/Wartung/Drehmomente / Anziehdrehmomente/Abweichendes Drehmoment Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1196949184374_78.docx @ 15274 @ @ 1

Screws / nuts

Nut for shear protection (rotary hub)

Bearing housing for cutting disc

MA [Nm]

300

42

Bearing housing for blade drum 42

Pos: 118.20 /BA/Wartung/Muttern und Schrauben (50h) anziehen @ 0\mod_1196949864530_78.docx @ 15293 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 118.21 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/FFrontschutz öffnen @ 40\mod_1270558849981_78.docx @ 367142 @ 2 @ 1

Regularly check that nuts and bolts are tightly in place (approx. every 50 hours) and tighten them if necessary.

16.6 Opening the Front Guard

Pos: 118.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerk links / rechts @ 14\mod_1231774559868_78.docx @ 172537 @ 3 @ 1

16.6.1 Lateral mowing unit left / right

Pos: 118.23 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Frontschutz öffnen an den Seitenmähwerken BiG M 420 @ 87\mod_1320316791589_78.docx @ 744802 @ @ 1

4

1

2

3

2

BM 400 0229

Pos: 118.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 326

The front guard (2) on the cutter bar can be folded up for maintenance and repair work.

To do this:

• Use the special tool (1) (located in the tool box) to release the lock of the front guard (2).

• Push the front guard (2) as far forward as it will go and the swivel it up.

• Secure the front guard (2) against folding down with a tension spring (3).

Note

After maintenance and repair work, fold down the front guard (2) and push it in until the interlocks (4) have engaged (right and left).

368

Pos: 118.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

16.6.2

Pos: 118.26 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Frontschutz öffnen Frontmähwerk @ 87\mod_1320315334038_78.docx @ 744714 @ @ 1

Front mowing unit

1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

BM 420 069

Fig. 327

The front guard (1) on the front mowing unit can be folded up for maintenance and repair work.

A screw driver is used to open the front guard. Use the screw driver to push in the ratchet mechanism.

Note

Pos: 118.27 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

After maintenance and repair work, fold down the front guard (1) again.

369

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.28 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/ZZettergehäuse reinigen @ 182\mod_1377502069378_78.docx @ 1562430 @ 2 @ 1

16.7

Pos: 118.29 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Zettergehäuse reinigen Bild @ 182\mod_1377502729488_78.docx @ 1562518 @ @ 1

Cleaning the Tedder Housing

2

1

1

2

Pos: 118.30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Zettergehäuse reinigen @ 182\mod_1377499400184_78.docx @ 1562402 @ @ 1

Fig. 328

For cleaning work in the inside of the tedder, folding ground flaps (1) are mounted on the lateral mowing units.

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Loosen the screw connections (2).

• Open the ground flap.

• Clean the inside of the tedder (a).

• Close the ground flaps and tighten the screw connections (2).

Pos: 118.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

370

Pos: 118.32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/VVerstopfungen am Querförderer beseitigen @ 13\mod_1226557103071_78.docx @ 166210 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

16.8 Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor

Pos: 118.33 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Inbetriebnahme/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Inbetriebnahme_2 @ 13\mod_1226501654990_78.docx @ 166160 @ @ 1

Danger! - Accidental start-up of the machine, moving parts of the machine and / or unexpected movement of the machine.

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.

• Wait until machine parts that are still in motion have coasted down to a stop.

Pos: 118.34 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Verstopfungen am Querförderer beseitigen @ 13\mod_1226500830396_78.docx @ 166140 @ @ 1

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back by means of wheel chocks.

1

Pos.I

Pos.II

1

2 2

BM 400 0233

Pos: 118.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 329

The hydraulic auger hood (1) must be secured against folding down during maintenance, cleaning and repair work on the augers by means of the spring cotter pins (2).

To do this:

• Lower all mowing units to the ground.

• Open the hydraulic auger hoods (1).

• Secure the hydraulic auger hood (1) by moving the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left) from pos. I to pos. II.

• After the fault is eliminated, move the spring cotter pins (2) (right and left) back to their original positions (from pos. II to pos. I).

• Close the hydraulic auger hood.

371

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.36 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SScherbolzen am Aufbereiter @ 37\mod_1264082884090_78.docx @ 341094 @ 2 @ 1

16.9

Pos: 118.37 /BA/Wartung/Scherbolzen/Scherbolzen am Aufbereiter @ 37\mod_1264062362856_78.docx @ 340785 @ @ 1

Shear pins on the conditioner

BM 400 0257

Pos: 118.38 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 330

The conditioners of the front mowing units and lateral mowing units (right / left) on

BiG M 400 CRI / BiG M 420 CRI are each secured with a shear pin (1). The shear pin shears off as soon as an overload occurs.

The shear pin is located on the flange (2) between the gearbox tower and the conditioner rollers. The spare shear pins (3) and spare shear bushings (4) are located on the conditioner housing.

Replacement of shear pins

• Front mowing unit and lateral mowing units right / left must be placed on the ground

• Switch machine off, apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key; wait until the machine parts which keep on rotating stopped completely; secure the machine with wheel chocks against rolling.

• If necessary, turn the cutter bar manually until the grooves of the flanges are positioned next to each other

• Take the spare shear pin (3) with the two bushings (4) and preassemble the bushings with a distance of 5mm

• Place the preassembled shear pins with bushings (3, 4) into the grooves of the flange

• Tighten the shear pins

372

Pos: 118.39 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/FFüllmengen und Schmiermittelbezeichnungen der Getriebe @ 0\mod_1196951094046_78.docx @ 15335 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

16.10 Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for Gearboxes

Pos: 118.40 /Abkürzungen /CV-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 118.41 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen_Füllmengen/Mähwerke/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Füllmengen Frontmähwerk BiG M 420 CV @ 95\mod_1328526745348_78.docx @ 799072 @ @ 1

Filling

Quantity

Filtered oils

[Litres] Brand name

Angular gear*

Input gearbox * (CRI)

Shifting gear *

Main gearbox **

Cutter bar *

Cutter bar **

* = front mowing unit

Pos: 118.42 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 118.43 /BA/Wartung/Tabellen_Füllmengen/Mähwerke/Technische Daten Betriebsstoffe Füllmengen Frontmähwerk BiG M 420 CRi @ 95\mod_1328526778343_78.docx @ 799100 @ @ 1

1.7 l

0.9 l

6.8 l

2 x 1.7 l

1 x 7.0 l

2 x 8.0 l

Filling

Quantity

SAE 90

Filtered oils

Bio-degradable lubricants

On request

** = lateral mowing units

Brand name

Bio-degradable lubricants

Brand name Brand name

Pos: 118.44 /BA/Wartung/Zeitintervalle an den Getrieben 200 h @ 0\mod_1196951919921_78.docx @ 15373 @ 3 @ 1

Angular gearbox

Input gearbox

Angular gearbox

Gearbox for top roller drive

(optional)

Cutter bar

[Litres]

3 x 1.7 l

3 x 0.7 l

3 x 0.9 l

3 x 0.3 l

3 x 7.0 l

SAE 90 On request

16.10.1 Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals (Gearboxes)

Note - Oil level check and oil change (gearboxes) and lubricating the machine

Effect: Long expected service life of machine

• First oil change on all gearboxes after 50 operating hours, then every 200 operating hours

(but at least once a year).

• Before using the machine always check the oil level.

Pos: 118.45 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• With bio-degradable oils the changing intervals must be complied with absolutely because of ageing of the oils.

373

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.46.1.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/HHauptgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005740033_78.docx @ 15416 @ 2 @ 1

16.11

Pos: 118.46.1.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

Main gearbox

16.11.1

Pos: 118.46.1.3 /Abkürzungen /CV-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

Lateral Mowing Unit

CV-Design

Pos: 118.46.1.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Hauptgetriebe seit. Mähwerke @ 272\mod_1403246305250_78.docx @ 2049365 @ @ 1

2

2 4

3

1

BM 420 0174

Fig. 331

Pos: 118.46.1.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle Hauptgetriebe seitl. Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1197006270283_78.docx @ 15473 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw the measuring rod (2) out of the main gearbox (1).

• Clean the measuring rod (2) with absorbent paper or cloth.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) completely back into the main gearbox (1).

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back out of the main gearbox (1).

• Check the oil level and check for abrasion. The oil level must be between the marks (3). If necessary, add more oil (SAE 90) through the measuring rod opening.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back into the main gearbox (1).

Pos: 118.46.1.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle_ALT/Ölwechsel Hauptgetriebe seitl. Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1196952482749_78.docx @ 15393 @ @ 1

Changing the oil:

• Unscrew the measuring rod (2).

• Unscrew the oil drain plug (4).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan.

• Fit the oil screw plug with a new seal.

Pos: 118.46.1.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Top up the oil from above (the dip stick hole); screw the dip stick (2) back in.

374

Pos: 118.46.1.8 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 118.46.1.9 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Hauptgetriebe seit. Mähwerke CRi @ 347\mod_1435231232372_78.docx @ 2614560 @ @ 1

1 2

Maintenance – Mowing Units

3

BM 420 0177

Fig. 332

Pos: 118.46.1.10 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle Hauptgetriebe seitl. Mähwerke @ 0\mod_1197006270283_78.docx @ 15473 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Screw the measuring rod (2) out of the main gearbox (1).

• Clean the measuring rod (2) with absorbent paper or cloth.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) completely back into the main gearbox (1).

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back out of the main gearbox (1).

• Check the oil level and check for abrasion. The oil level must be between the marks (3). If necessary, add more oil (SAE 90) through the measuring rod opening.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) back into the main gearbox (1).

Pos: 118.46.1.11 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Ölwechsel CRi Öl absaugen @ 348\mod_1435738140372_78.docx @ 2617755 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• For information on time intervals, see chapter entitled “Time Intervals for Oil Level Check and Oil Change on the Gearboxes”.

• Screw measuring rod (2) out of the main gearbox and clean it by using absorbent paper or cloth.

• Extract waste oil through the opening and collect it in a suitable container.

• Top up new oil.

• Screw the measuring rod (2) completely back into the main gearbox (1).

• Screw out measuring rod and check whether the oil level is between the markings (3), top up oil (SAE 90) or withdraw it by suction, if necessary.

Pos: 118.46.1.12 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 118.46.1.13 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 118.46.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

375

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.46.3.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/WWinkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.docx @ 15435 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 118.46.3.2 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Winkelgetriebe Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1197008732315_78.docx @ 15629 @ @ 1

3

1

EC-152-0

Fig. 333:

Pos: 118.46.3.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle_ALTÖlkontrolle SAE 90 @ 493\mod_1487175787204_78.docx @ 3313116 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 118.46.3.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_WechselÖlwechsel Belüftungsfilter Öl absaugen @ 493\mod_1487180584266_78.docx @ 3313671 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• Unscrew venting filter (3) and extract the oil

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Top up oil from above (oil level up to bore hole (1)).

• Screw in the ventilation filter (3).

Pos: 118.46.3.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 118.46.3.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 118.46.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

376

Pos: 118.46.5.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/EEingangsgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005979596_78.docx @ 15454 @ 2 @ 1

16.13

Pos: 118.46.5.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk (CV+CRI) @ 0\mod_1197008615440_78.docx @ 15609 @ 3 @ 1

Input gearbox

16.13.1 Front Mowing Unit (CV+CRI)

Pos: 118.46.5.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Eingangsgetriebe Frontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1197009824221_78.docx @ 15727 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

EC-0-040

Fig. 334:

Pos: 118.46.5.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle_ALTÖlkontrolle SAE 90 @ 493\mod_1487175787204_78.docx @ 3313116 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 118.46.5.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel_ALTÖlwechsel Version1 (Belüftungsfilter) @ 493\mod_1487179797179_78.docx @ 3313640 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• Screw out the screw plug (2).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Screw in the screw plug (2)

• Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))

• Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.

Pos: 118.46.5.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 118.46.5.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 118.46.6 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

377

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.46.7.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSchaltgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197010889455_78.docx @ 15766 @ 2 @ 1

16.14

Pos: 118.46.7.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk (CV) @ 0\mod_1196670225510_78.docx @ 10342 @ 3 @ 1

Speed gearbox

16.14.1 Front mowing unit (CV)

Pos: 118.46.7.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Schaltgetriebe CV-Frontmähwerk @ 452\mod_1463487602317_78.docx @ 3074087 @ @ 1

1

3

2

EC-1-040

Fig. 335:

Pos: 118.46.7.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle_ALTÖlkontrolle SAE 90 @ 493\mod_1487175787204_78.docx @ 3313116 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Unscrew the inspection screw (1)

• Oil level up to bore hole (1)

• If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

• Screw the check screw (1) back in.

Pos: 118.46.7.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel_ALTÖlwechsel Version1 (Belüftungsfilter) @ 493\mod_1487179797179_78.docx @ 3313640 @ @ 1

Oil change:

• Screw out the screw plug (2).

• Collect the used oil in a suitable drip pan

• Screw in the screw plug (2)

• Fill oil (3) (oil level up to hole (1))

• Screw the inspection screw (1) and ventilation filter (3) back in.

Pos: 118.46.7.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 118.46.7.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 118.46.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

378

Pos: 118.46.9.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/WWinkelgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197005918299_78.docx @ 15435 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 118.46.9.2 /Abkürzungen /CR-Ausführung @ 194\mod_1383299073254_78.docx @ 1647987 @ @ 1

Pos: 118.46.9.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/U-Z/Unterteil @ 10\mod_1221640227712_78.docx @ 135712 @ 3 @ 1

CR design

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.46.9.4 /BA/Wartung/Hinweis Ölstandskontrolle in Arbeitsstellung und in waagerechter Stellung der Maschine vornehmen @ 194\mod_1383554973754_78.docx @ 1649577 @ @ 1

Note

Perform oil level check and oil change while the machine is in a horizontal position!

Pos: 118.46.9.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Winkelgetriebe CRI @ 0\mod_1197013688111_78.docx @ 15844 @ @ 1

2

1

EC-189-0

Fig. 336:

Pos: 118.46.9.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel / Ölkontrolle:Legende zu Grafik Kontrollschraube / Ablassschraube @ 194\mod_1383299451132_78.docx @ 1648045 @ @ 1

1) Inspection screw / control hole 2) Drain plug

Pos: 118.46.9.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_WechselÖlqualität/Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel Technische Daten der Maschine @ 371\mod_1441958324612_78.docx @ 2710777 @ @ 1

Oil quality/amount of oil: refer to chapter entitled Technical Data of Machine “Operating

Materials”

Pos: 118.46.9.8 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle / Ölwechsel Intervall: siehe Kapitel Wartung „Wartungstabelle“ @ 134\mod_1350483605921_78.docx @ 1188115 @ @ 1

Interval for oil level check and oil change: refer to chapter Maintenance “Maintenance Table”

Pos: 118.46.9.9 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_WechselÖlkontrolle NEU über Kontrollschraube ohne Einfüllschraube @ 464\mod_1466689280560_78.docx @ 3128127 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Unscrew the inspection screw.

• Oil level up to inspection hole.

If the oil reaches the inspection hole:

• Mount the inspection screw, tightening torque see chapter Maintenance, “Tightening

Torques for Locking Screws and Bleed Valves on Gearboxes”.

If the oil does not reach the inspection hole:

• Top up oil up to the inspection hole via the inspection hole.

• Mount the inspection screw, tightening torque see chapter Maintenance, “Tightening

Torques for Locking Screws and Bleed Valves on Gearboxes”.

Pos: 118.46.9.10 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_WechselÖlwechsel NEU ohne Einfüllschraube @ 158\mod_1364483760090_78.docx @ 1391770 @ @ 1

Oil change:

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out oil drain plug and drain the oil.

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Screw in oil drain plug and tighten it securely.

• Top up new oil via control hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Pos: 118.46.9.11 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 118.46.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

379

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.46.11.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/GGetriebe für oberen Walzenantrieb @ 11\mod_1223618840051_78.docx @ 148283 @ 2 @ 1

16.16 Gearbox for Top Roller Drive

Pos: 118.46.11.2 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Mähwerke/Bild Getriebe für oberen Walzenantrieb @ 0\mod_1197016558018_78.docx @ 15923 @ @ 1

1

EC-186-0

Fig. 337:

Pos: 118.46.11.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel / Ölkontrolle:Legende zu Grafik Kontrollschraube / Ablassschraube @ 194\mod_1383299451132_78.docx @ 1648045 @ @ 1

1) Inspection screw / control hole 2) Drain plug

Pos: 118.46.11.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_WechselÖlqualität/Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel Technische Daten der Maschine @ 371\mod_1441958324612_78.docx @ 2710777 @ @ 1

Oil quality/amount of oil: refer to chapter entitled Technical Data of Machine “Operating

Materials”

Pos: 118.46.11.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle / Ölwechsel Intervall: siehe Kapitel Wartung „Wartungstabelle“ @ 134\mod_1350483605921_78.docx @ 1188115 @ @ 1

Interval for oil level check and oil change: refer to chapter Maintenance “Maintenance Table”

Pos: 118.46.11.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_WechselÖlkontrolle NEU über Kontrollschraube ohne Einfüllschraube @ 464\mod_1466689280560_78.docx @ 3128127 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Unscrew the inspection screw.

• Oil level up to inspection hole.

If the oil reaches the inspection hole:

• Mount the inspection screw, tightening torque see chapter Maintenance, “Tightening

Torques for Locking Screws and Bleed Valves on Gearboxes”.

If the oil does not reach the inspection hole:

• Top up oil up to the inspection hole via the inspection hole.

• Mount the inspection screw, tightening torque see chapter Maintenance, “Tightening

Torques for Locking Screws and Bleed Valves on Gearboxes”.

Pos: 118.46.11.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölwechsel NEU ohne Einfüllschraube @ 158\mod_1364483760090_78.docx @ 1391770 @ @ 1

Oil change:

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out oil drain plug and drain the oil.

• Screw out inspection screw.

• Screw in oil drain plug and tighten it securely.

• Top up new oil via control hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Pos: 118.46.11.8 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Pos: 118.46.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

380

Pos: 118.46.13.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/OÖlstandskontrolle und Ölwechsel am Mähholm @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.docx @ 15963 @ 2 @ 1

16.17

Pos: 118.46.13.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrontmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675077463_78.docx @ 10648 @ 3 @ 1

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

Maintenance – Mowing Units

16.17.1 Front mowing unit

Pos: 118.46.13.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 118.46.13.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMähholm ausrichten @ 0\mod_1197017956815_78.docx @ 16042 @ 3 @ 1

16.17.2 Aligning the Cutter Bar

Pos: 118.46.13.5 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Vorraussetzung Ausrichten Mähholm Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197018894471_78.docx @ 16061 @ @ 1

Prerequisite:

• Switch off the travelling gear release switch

Pos: 118.46.13.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Mähholm ausrichten Big M 400 @ 348\mod_1435845703917_78.docx @ 2621777 @ @ 1

• Use the multi-function lever to move the 3 mowing units into working position (float setting).

Fig. 338

Aligning the mowers in transverse direction

• Place a manual spirit level centred on the cutter bars.

Standard version:

• Align cutterbars horizontally (refer to chapter “Setting the Cutting Height on Front Mounted

Mower” or “Setting the Cutting Height on Side Mounted Mower”).

With hydraulic cutting height adjustment version:

• Align cutterbars horizontally (refer to chapter info centre “Aligning the Cutterbars”).

Lengthwise

• Place manual spirit level (1) on two cutting discs.

Pos: 118.46.13.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Use wedges to align the cutterbar horizontally.

381

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.46.13.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/OÖlkontrolle @ 0\mod_1197021908190_78.docx @ 16120 @ 3 @ 1

16.17.3 Checking the oil level

Pos: 118.46.13.9 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommel_2 @ 0\mod_1197022569252_78.docx @ 16165 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.

Pos: 118.46.13.10 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 118.46.13.11 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle Mähholm Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197026101830_78.docx @ 16184 @ @ 1

Allow the machine to run briefly. Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

2

BMII-362

Fig. 339:

• Unscrew one of the two oil level inspection screws (2) on the cutter bar.

• The oil level must be up to the bore hole. If necessary, top up the oil (SAE 90)

Pos: 118.46.13.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw (2) again and tighten in securely.

382

Pos: 118.46.13.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/OÖlwechsel @ 0\mod_1197021941955_78.docx @ 16139 @ 3 @ 1

Pos: 118.46.13.14 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölwechsel Mähholm Big M 420 @ 186\mod_1379669854604_78.docx @ 1600701 @ @ 1

2

Maintenance – Mowing Units

1

BMII-363

Fig. 340

1) Inspection screw / oil filling hole 2) Cover

• To lower the cutter bar to the cover, slightly raise the front mowing unit and set a wood beam underneath on the opposite side of the cover.

• Lower the front mowing unit until the cutter bar rests on the wood beam and is lower in the direction of the cover.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and secure the machine from rolling away.

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Unscrew the cover and drain the oil.

• Screw on the cover with new seal.

• Screw out one of the both inspection screws on the cutter bar and top up oil via oil filling hole.

• Screw in the inspection screw and tighten it securely.

• To check the oil level, align the cutter bar crosswise and lengthwise (refer to chapter

“Aligning the Cutter Bar”).

Note

Pos: 118.46.13.15 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Always check the oil level after repair work on the cutter bar.

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 118.46.13.16 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 118.46.13.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

383

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.46.13.18 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/OÖlstandskontrolle und Ölwechsel am Mähholm @ 0\mod_1197017549815_78.docx @ 15963 @ 2 @ 1

16.18

Pos: 118.46.13.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/SSeitenmähwerk @ 0\mod_1196675974056_78.docx @ 10706 @ 3 @ 1

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

16.18.1 Lateral Mowing Unit

Pos: 118.46.13.20 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommel_2 @ 0\mod_1197022569252_78.docx @ 16165 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Lower guards. Nobody should be in the danger zone around the machine.

Pos: 118.46.13.21 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 118.46.13.22 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/OÖlkontrolle @ 0\mod_1197021908190_78.docx @ 16120 @ 3 @ 1

16.18.2 Checking the oil level

Pos: 118.46.13.23 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle / Ölwechsel Seitenmähwerke Big M 420 Bild + Legende @ 186\mod_1379669608790_78.docx @ 1600652 @ @ 1

Fig. 341

1) Ground flap, for cross conveyor design 2) Oil level inspection screw / oil filling hole

3) Cover

Pos: 118.46.13.24 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle Seitenmähwerke Big M 400 @ 186\mod_1379669908986_78.docx @ 1600730 @ @ 1

• Allow the lateral mowing units to run briefly in working position.

• Wait until cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

• Fold up the lateral mowing units.

• Switch off the machine and secure it against rolling.

• Open the ground flap, for cross conveyor design.

• Loosen the lower oil level inspection screw on the cutter bar slightly.

The oil level is OK if oil emerges from the hole.

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw and tighten it securely.

If no oil leaks:

• Screw out the oil level inspection screw.

• Top up oil via oil filling hole until oil emerges.

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw and tighten it securely.

• Close the ground flap, for cross conveyor design.

Pos: 118.46.13.25 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Pos: 118.46.13.26 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Gearboxes"

384

Pos: 118.46.13.27 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/OÖlwechsel @ 0\mod_1197021941955_78.docx @ 16139 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.46.13.28 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 118.46.13.29 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölkontrolle / Ölwechsel Seitenmähwerke Big M 420 Bild + Legende @ 186\mod_1379669608790_78.docx @ 1600652 @ @ 1

Fig. 342

1) Ground flap, for cross conveyor design 2) Oil level inspection screw / oil filling hole

3) Cover

Pos: 118.46.13.30 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Ölwechsel Seitenmähwerke Big M 420 @ 186\mod_1379669463327_78.docx @ 1600563 @ @ 1

A pre-condition is that:

– The lateral mowing units are folded up.

– The machine is turned off and secured against rolling away.

– The ground flap is opened, for the cross conveyor design

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out the oil level inspection screw.

• Unscrew the cover and drain the oil.

• Screw on the cover with new seal.

• Top up oil via oil filling hole until oil emerges.

• Screw in the oil level inspection screw and tighten it securely.

Note

Pos: 118.46.13.31 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel @ 0\mod_1197007859486_78.docx @ 15531 @ @ 1

Check the oil after repair work on the cutter bar.

Oil quality / oil quantity: see Chapter "Filling Quantities and Lubricant Designations for

Gearboxes"

Pos: 118.46.13.32 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 118.47 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

385

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.48.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/KKontrolle der Mähklingen und Messerhalterung @ 0\mod_1197265641329_78.docx @ 16323 @ 2 @ 1

16.19 Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder

Pos: 118.48.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Fehlende und beschädigte Mähklingen und Mähklingenhalterungen @ 0\mod_1197265722813_78.docx @ 16342 @ @ 1

Pos: 118.48.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMähklingen @ 0\mod_1197265959110_78.docx @ 16361 @ 3 @ 1

Warning! - Missing and damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers.

Effect: Danger to life, serious injuries or damage to the machine

• Check cutter blades at least once per day and check retaining bolts every time you change the blades or after contact with foreign objects.

• Immediately replace missing or damaged cutter blades and cutter blade retainers

Pos: 118.48.4 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Die Bohrung der Mähklingen kann sich durch Verschleiß aufweiten. @ 10\mod_1221048982715_78.docx @ 131675 @ @ 1

The borehole on the cutter blades may spread due to wear.

Pos: 118.48.5 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/MähwerkeWarnung - Zu geringe Materialstärke an den Mähklingen_neu @ 312\mod_1418983956660_78.docx @ 2409555 @ @ 1

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the cutter blades.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

Pos: 118.48.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Mähklingen beidseitig verwenbar_neu @ 3\mod_1204728012601_78.docx @ 72608 @ @ 1

• The cutter blades must be replaced at the latest when the wear limit is reached (see mark

(1) on the cutter blade; dimension a less than or equal to 13 mm). a

1

EC 253 0

Pos: 118.48.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 343

Note - The cutter blades can be turned around and used on both sides.

• When cutter blades are missing or damaged, they must be replaced as a complete set.

This prevents dangerous unbalanced rotation

386

Pos: 118.48.8 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschraub / Messerschnellverschluss/Messerschraubverschluss Haltebolzen 14 mm @ 0\mod_1197267907375_78.docx @ 16425 @ 3 @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.

• Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cutting disc/blade drum!

• The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakest point.

Pos: 118.48.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 344 min. 14 mm EC-240-0

387

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.48.10 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschraub / Messerschnellverschluss/Messerschnellverschluss Haltebolzen 14mm @ 0\mod_1197268087875_78.docx @ 16444 @ 3 @ 1

16.19.3 Blade Quick-Fit Device

Danger! - Insufficient thickness of material on the retaining bolts.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• At every blade changing check the thickness of the holding bolts material.

• Damage or worn retaining bolts must always be replaced by sets on each cutting disc/blade drum!

• The material thickness of the retaining bolts must not be less than 14 mm at the weakest point.

• The material thickness of the leaf spring must not be less than 3 mm at the weakest point.

min. 14 mm EC-239-0

Fig. 345

Pos: 118.48.11 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/PPrüfen der Materialstärke der Haltebolzen US @ 8\mod_1219048913565_78.docx @ 108655 @ 3 @ 1

16.19.4 Checking the Material Thickness of the Retaining Bolts

Pos: 118.48.12 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Prüfen der Materialstärke der Haltebolzen/Blattfedern_US @ 8\mod_1219047827550_78.docx @ 108614 @ @ 1

2 1 a b

EC-241-0

Fig. 346

The material thickness of the retaining bolts and the leaf springs is checked using the supplied gauge (1). The gauge (1) is located on the special tool (2) {blade key}.

Section (a) of the gauge is used to check the material thickness of the retaining bolts.

Section (b) of the gauge is used to check the contour of the leaf springs.

Pos: 118.48.13 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Materialstärke der Haltebolzen überprüfen US @ 8\mod_1219048235081_78.docx @ 108634 @ 4 @ 1

388

16.19.4.1 Checking the material thickness of the retaining bolts

Maintenance – Mowing Units

2

1

EC-242-0

Fig. 347

• Clean the area to be checked

• Place the gauge (1) with section (a) against the retaining bolt (2).

• Rotate the gauge (1) by 90 degrees.

• If it is not possible to slide the gauge over the retaining bolt during the rotation, then the retaining bolt is still in working order.

Pos: 118.48.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• If it is possible to slide the gauge (2) over the retaining bolt during the rotation, the retaining bolt must be replaced immediately.

389

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.48.15 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Regelmäßige Kontrolle der Blattfedern US @ 8\mod_1219049253925_78.docx @ 108717 @ 3 @ 1

16.19.5 Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs

Danger! - Worn application seam on the leaf springs.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Check the leaf springs for damage at least once a day or after contact with foreign objects.

• The wear limit of the leaf springs is reached when the application seam (1) is worn away at one point. The wear limit must be checked with the gauge (2).

1 1

EC 225 0

Fig. 348

Note

Use only original Krone spare parts to replace the leaf springs.

Pos: 118.48.16 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/PPrüfen der Materialstärke der Blattfedern US @ 8\mod_1219048953143_78.docx @ 108676 @ 3 @ 1

16.19.6 Checking the Material Thickness of the Leaf Springs

Pos: 118.48.17 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Prüfen der Materialstärke der Haltebolzen/Blattfedern_US @ 8\mod_1219047827550_78.docx @ 108614 @ @ 1

2 1 a b

EC-241-0

Fig. 349

The material thickness of the retaining bolts and the leaf springs is checked using the supplied gauge (1). The gauge (1) is located on the special tool (2) {blade key}.

Section (a) of the gauge is used to check the material thickness of the retaining bolts.

Section (b) of the gauge is used to check the contour of the leaf springs.

Pos: 118.48.18 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Materialstärke der Blattfedern überprüfen US @ 8\mod_1219049061425_78.docx @ 108698 @ 4 @ 1

390

16.19.6.1 Checking the material thickness of the leaf springs

Maintenance – Mowing Units

2

1

EC-243-0

Fig. 350

• Clean the area to be checked

Pos: 118.48.19 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Blattfeder Kontur prüfen US @ 8\mod_1219049656846_78.docx @ 108739 @ @ 1

• Push the gauge (1) with section (b) over the retaining bolt of the leaf spring (2), as far as it will go.

1

IC

1

2 IIC

2

EC-244-0

Fig. 351

• If the contour of the leaf spring (2) in section (IC) aligns completely with the contour of the gauge (1), the leaf spring has not yet reached its wear limit.

Pos: 118.48.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• If the contour of the leaf spring disappears at any point in section (IIc) behind the contour of the gauge, the leaf spring has reached its wear limit. The leaf spring must be replaced.

391

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.48.21 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Regelmäßige Kontrolle der Messerteller bzw. -trommeln @ 0\mod_1197268487390_78.docx @ 16483 @ 3 @ 1

16.19.7 Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade Drums

Danger! - Deformed Cutting Discs / Blade Drums

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Check the cutting discs or blade drums for damages at least once per day or after contact with foreign objects.

• In case of deformed cuttings discs or drums, the dimension of A = 48 mm must never be exceeded.

1

A

EC-0-211

Fig. 352

Note

Pos: 118.48.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The cutting discs or drums must be replaced by Original Krone spare parts only.

392

Pos: 118.48.23 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Verschleissgrenze für Auswaschungen @ 0\mod_1197268738875_78.docx @ 16502 @ 3 @ 1

16.19.8 Abrasion Limit

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Danger! - Abrasion on the cutting discs / blade drums

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• The abrasion limit (2) will be achieved if the min. material thickness of 3 mm is no longer given.

2

2

EC-226-0

Pos: 118.48.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 353

Note

If cutting discs or blade drums show deformations or wear in form of abrasions (2) or similar, these components have to be replaced by Original Krone spare parts .

393

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.48.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMesserwechsel an Messertellern @ 0\mod_1197269068562_78.docx @ 16521 @ 2 @ 1

16.20 Blade Changing on Cutting Discs

Pos: 118.48.26 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 118.48.27 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Sich lösende Mähklingen @ 0\mod_1197269483265_78.docx @ 16540 @ @ 1

Danger! - Cutter blades coming loose

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• After changing the blades check that they fit perfectly and that they can move freely.

• Whenever a blade is changed, also inspect the fasteners and replace them, if necessary!

• Always replace missing and damaged blades in sets to prevent unbalanced rotation!

• Never mount unevenly worn blades on a drum/disc!

Pos: 118.48.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

394

Pos: 118.48.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMesserschraubverschluss @ 0\mod_1197270941296_78.docx @ 16578 @ 3 @ 1

16.20.1 Blade Screw Connection

Pos: 118.48.30 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschraub / Messerschnellverschluss/Beschreibung Messerwechsel Messerschraubverschluss @ 47\mod_1285661949953_78.docx @ 456898 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Mowing Units

EC-0-250

Pic. 354

• Fold up safety device

• Clean the area

• Remove damaged or worn blades

• To fit the blades, insert the blade (5) between the wear skid (2) and the cutting disc (1)

• Insert the retaining bolt (3) from below through the wear skid, the blade and the cutting disc

• Place the locknut (4) on the retaining bolt from above and tighten it firmly (tightening torque refer to chapter “Torques”)

• Repeat the process for all blades

• After fitting the blades, fold the safety device down again

Note

• The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different to those of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct when installing!

• The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting discs / blade drums

• The locknut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than once

Order No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889

Pos: 118.48.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888

395

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.48.32 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/K-O/MMesserschnellverschluss @ 0\mod_1197271019859_78.docx @ 16597 @ 3 @ 1

16.20.2 Blade Quick-Fit Device

Pos: 118.48.33 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Messerschraub / Messerschnellverschluss/Beschreibung Messerwechsel Messerschnellverschluss @ 0\mod_1197271100500_78.docx @ 16616 @ @ 1

2 3 4

5

EC-251-0

Fig. 355

• Clean the area.

• Remove damaged or worn blades.

• Push the special tool (1) {blade key} between the cutter disc (4) and leaf spring (3) and press down with one hand.

• Guide a new blade (2) onto the retaining bolt and allow the blade key to return upwards.

• After fitting the blades, fold the protective device down again.

Note

• The cutter blades of anticlockwise rotating cutting discs / blade drums are different than those of clockwise rotating ones. Make certain the direction of rotation is correct when installing!

• The arrow on the cutter blades must match the direction of rotation of the corresponding cutting discs / blade drums.

• The hex nut (4) used to secure the retaining bolts must not be used more than once.

Order No. for clockwise rotating blade: 139-889

Order No. for anticlockwise rotating blade: 139-888

Pos: 118.48.34 /BA/Wartung/Werkzeugkasten/Hinweis - Das Spezialwerkzeug befindet sich im Werkzeugkasten der Maschine. @ 186\mod_1380003705205_78.docx @ 1606083 @ @ 1

Pos: 118.48.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Note

The special tool is located in the left tool box of the machine.

396

Pos: 118.48.36 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Stoßkanten erneuern @ 0\mod_1197271320468_78.docx @ 16636 @ 2 @ 1

16.21 Replacing the linings

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Caution! - If the linings are checked irregularly.

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Always check the mowing unit for damaged linings prior to start-up and replace linings, if necessary!

• Adjust the welding current and the welding material to the cutter bar material and to the lining or carry out a trial welding if necessary.•

EC-0-012

Fig. 356

• Open the welding seams of the old lining.

• Remove the lining

• Deburr the contact surface.

EC-252-0

Pos: 118.49 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 357

• Adapt the new lining (3).

• Weld short I seams on the upper surface of the cutter bar in the areas marked (1) (each should be approx. 30 mm).

• Do not weld the edges (2).

• On lower surface of the cutter bar, weld the lining (3) to the cutter bar along the whole length in area (5).

• Do not weld the edges (4).

397

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.50.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/KKreiselnabe mit Schersicherung @ 0\mod_1197272352468_78.docx @ 16655 @ 2 @ 1

16.22 Rotary hub with shear protection

Pos: 118.50.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Schnell rotierende Messerteller/Messertrommeln_1 @ 0\mod_1197017696736_78.docx @ 16001 @ @ 1

Danger! - Rapidly rotating cutting discs/blade drums.

Effect: Danger to life or serious injuries.

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• The cutting discs/blade drums continue to run!

• Do not leave the driver’s cab until the cutting discs/blade drums have come to a complete stop.

Pos: 118.50.3 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Beschreibung Schersicherung Bild BM 400 @ 349\mod_1436275248740_78.docx @ 2624690 @ @ 1

BiG M CV b

4

3

2

1 a

BiG M CRI

4

3

2

1 b a

BM 400 0141_1

Fig. 358

Pos: 118.50.4 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Beschreibung Schersicherung Text BM 400/420/500 @ 349\mod_1436275334775_78.docx @ 2624721 @ @ 1

To protect the mowers against overload, the rotary hubs (1) are secured by means of nuts (2) and shear pins (3).

If the machine strikes obstacles (for example stones), the both shear pins in the rotary hub shear off. The rotary hub and nut turn upward on the pinion shaft.

• Cutting discs or mower drums which transport the crop in the direction of travel to the left

(LE) have left-handed thread.

• Cutting discs or mower drums which transport the crop in direction of travel to the right (RE) have right-handed thread.

To distinguish between right-hand rotation (RE) and left-hand rotation (LE), the nuts (2) and pinion shafts (4) of left-hand rotation (LE) have a distinctive groove (a, b).

• Nuts (2) with left-handed thread (LE) have distinctive grooves (a) on the bevel.

• The pinion shafts (4) with left-handed thread (LE) have a distinctive groove (b) on the face.

Pos: 118.50.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

398

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.50.6 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Hinweis Fortsetzen der Arbeit nach Ansprechen der Schersicherung BiG M 400 @ 349\mod_1436276956773_78.docx @ 2624842 @ @ 1

To be able to work again as quickly as possible after a shear lock engages, you should have in stock two left and two right bearing units.

Pos: 118.50.7 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Nach dem Abscheren @ 4\mod_1211951454110_78.docx @ 84095 @ 3 @ 1

For order numbers of bearing units, refer to KRONE spare parts list.

16.22.1 After Shearing Off

Caution! - Correct installation position of the bearing housing not observed.

Effect: Damage to the machine

• Right-hand (RH) cutting discs and drums always have right-handed pinion shafts and nuts

(no groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).

• Left-hand (LH) cutting discs and drums always have left-handed pinion shafts and nuts (with groove mark on the pinion shaft and nut).

Pos: 118.50.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Remove the cutting disc or drum.

• Completely remove the sheared off bearing housing.

• Install the replacement bearing housing after the cutter disc (BM 400 0141) is set up

• Install the cutting disc or mower drum.

399

Maintenance – Mowing Units

Pos: 118.50.9 /BA/Wartung/Mähwerke/Schersicherung/Reparatur der abgescherten Lagereinheit @ 349\mod_1436271080417_78.docx @ 2624499 @ 3 @ 1

16.22.2 Repairing the Sheared off Bearing Unit a

7

8

9

3

2

3

3

1

10 d b

4 c

BM 400 0170_1

Fig. 359

• Remove retaining ring (7).

• Unscrew hexagon head screw (8).

• Use special key (10) included with delivery to dismount the nut (2).

• Dismount hub (1).

• Remove the damaged shear pins (3).

• Check nut and hub for damage.

• Fill the space above the taper roller bearing with grease (c).

• Place hub on the pinion shaft.

• Drive the new shear pins (3) through hub (1) and shaft (4).

Note - Observe position of shear pins!

• Drive the shear pins (3) from outside into the hole until the end of the pin reaches the surface of the hub (d).

• The slots of the shear pins (3) must be mounted facing each other horizontally (see detail

(I)).

• Install the nut (2) using the special key (10) included with delivery (tighten to a tightening torque of 300 Nm).

• Mount and tighten hexagon head screws (8) with detent edged washers.

• Mount retaining ring (7).

Pos: 118.50.10 /BA/Wartung/Werkzeugkasten/Hinweis - Das Spezialwerkzeug befindet sich im Werkzeugkasten der Maschine. @ 186\mod_1380003705205_78.docx @ 1606083 @ @ 1

Note

The special tool is located in the left tool box of the machine.

Pos: 119 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

400

Pos: 120.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Grundmaschine @ 0\mod_1197277779213_78.docx @ 16847 @ 1 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

17 Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Mähwerke/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_2 @ 0\mod_1197278033978_78.docx @ 16866 @ @ 1

Pos: 120.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBremsen @ 0\mod_1197278385463_78.docx @ 16886 @ 2 @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

• Maintenance and repair work on safety-related components such as steering or brakes must only be performed by authorised workshops.

17.1 Brakes

Pos: 120.4 /BA/Sicherheit/Bremsen/Gefahr - Bremsen nicht in Ordnung @ 0\mod_1197279276510_78.docx @ 17044 @ @ 1

Danger! - Problem with brakes

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• The brake function must be checked before the start of every trip.

• The footbrake must take effect beginning with the first third of pedal travel.

• Check the brake linings regularly.

Pos: 120.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Adjustment and repair work on the brake system must only be performed by professional workshops or recognised brake services!

401

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/HHydraulikanlage @ 0\mod_1197278455041_78.docx @ 16905 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 120.7 /BA/Sicherheit/2. Vorangestellte WarnhinweiseWarnung - Flüssigkeiten unter Druck / Umgang mit Leckagen @ 452\mod_1463484012965_78.docx @ 3073681 @ @ 1

WARNING!

Risk of injury from incorrect handling of liquids under high pressure. Escaping highpressure liquids may penetrate the skin and cause serious injury.

• Repair work on the hydraulic system may only be performed by authorised KRONE professional workshops.

• Depressurise the system before disconnecting lines.

• When working on the hydraulic system, wear personal protective equipment (protective goggles and protective gloves).

• High-pressure liquid that is escaping from a small opening is virtually invisible. Therefore use a piece of cardboard or something similar when searching for leaks.

• If liquid penetrates the skin, consult a doctor immediately. The liquid must be removed from the body as quickly as possible. Danger of infection! Physicians who are not familiar with this area must consult appropriate information from a competent medical source.

• Check the hydraulic hoses at regular intervals and replace them if damaged or worn! Only original KRONE spare parts are permitted to be used as replacement lines as they correspond to the technical requirements of the manufacturer.

• Before the pressure in the system builds up again, ensure that all line connections are tight.

Pos: 120.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

402

Pos: 120.9 /BA/Wartung/Motor /Wartungstabellen/Wartungstabelle - Grundmaschine BM 420 MAN und Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359647075822_78.docx @ 1301267 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Maintenance Interval

Hydraulic system

Hydraulic oil level check

Change the hydraulic oil

Replace the hydraulic oil filter

High pressure filter steering hydraulics

High pressure filter work hydraulics

Checking pressure filter (every 1500 h)

Pressure filter, leakage oil pipe for wheel motors

Supply pump pressure filter

Transfer gearbox

Oil level check

Cabin

Replace fresh air filter

Clean fresh air filter

Replace circulation filter

Clean circulation filter

Windshield wiper system

Pilot lamp test

Light function test

Check the foot brake setting.

Readjust parking brake Bowden cable if necessary.

Air conditioning system / heating

Collector / dryer

Refrigerant condition and filling quantity

Checking capacitor

17.2.

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

403

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Maintenance Interval

Belt drives

Fan wheel drive

Drive for outrigger arms

Drive for lateral mowing units

Cross conveyor drive

Tyres

Check tyres visually for cuts and breaks

Inspect tyre air pressure visually

Measure tyre air pressure with instrument: weekly

Tighten wheel nuts front wheel/rear wheel with 630

Nm

(466 lb-ft).

Tightening screws

Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder anchors on the rear axle.

Tighten the fastening screws of the guide cylinder anchors on the wheel hubs.

Tighten the fastening screws on the track rod

Tighten fastening screws of the outriggers on the frame.

Battery

Check the acid density of the battery; charge the battery, if and when necessary, and top up with distilled water.

Pos: 120.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X X

X X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

404

Pos: 120.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Systemaufbau Arbeits- und Bremshydraulik Big M 420 @ 52\mod_1289463554046_78.docx @ 504352 @ 23 @ 1

17.3

17.3.1

Maintenance - hydraulic system

System Description Operating and Brake Hydraulics

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Hydraulics – open circuits

Steering hydraulics pump

16 cm 3 /rev

Brake Hydraulics Priority

Parking Brake Operating Brake

Work hydraulics pump

27 cm 3 /rev

Lifting mechanism

Belt tension

Implements

Suspension

Pos: 120.12 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Pumpen (Lenkydraulik / Arbeitshydraulik) BM 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359647465495_78.docx @ 1301296 @ 3 @ 1

17.3.2 Pumps

1 2

Pos: 120.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 360

The pumps for the steering hydraulics as well as for the brake hydraulics / work hydraulics are located on the right machine side on the engine

1. Brake and work hydraulics

2. Steering pump

405

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.14 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Hauptblock @ 0\mod_1197292256400_78.docx @ 17161 @ 3 @ 1

17.3.3 Main block

3

Y26

Y19 Y27

1

2

Y25 Y16

Y23 Y21

Y9

Y10

Y8

Y7

Fig. 361

NO. Designation

Pos: 120.15 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

2

3

Drive pressure control

Master control valve pressure control

Y6 Switching to front axle

Y7 Switching to rear axle

Y8 Front drive

Y9 Right drive

Y10 Left drive

Y11 Parking Brake

Y15 Lift suspension

Y16 Lower suspension

Y19 Main valve

Y20 Lift front

Y21 Lower front

Y22 Lift right

Y23 Lower right

Y24 Lift left

Y25 Lower left

Y26 Push off left

Y27 Push off right

406

Y6

BM 400 0221

Pos: 120.16 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Überdruckventile an Ventilblöcken @ 126\mod_1345640123475_78.docx @ 1140855 @ 3 @ 1

17.3.4 Over-Pressure Valves

Maintenance – Basic Machine

NOTE

Over-pressure valves set in the factory.

Work on the over-pressure valve must be carried out only by the customer service department.

The valve blocks have been equipped with over-pressure valves. These valves were set at the

Pos: 120.17 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/E/Einstellbare Drosseln @ 0\mod_1197295918463_78.docx @ 17218 @ 3 @ 1 factory and must not be changed.

Pos: 120.18 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frontmähwerk Zuschaltgeschwindigkeit @ 13\mod_1225784997962_78.docx @ 163013 @ @ 1

Speed of moving the front mowing unit into operating position

1

BMII-364_1

Pos: 120.19 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 362

The adjustable throttle (1) to set the speed to move the front mowing unit is located next to the hydraulic tank, on the left-hand side in direction of travel.

407

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.20 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/HHydrauliköl @ 0\mod_1197296812478_78.docx @ 17265 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 120.21 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Hydraulikanlage: nur freigegebene Öle einsetzen @ 126\mod_1345640514595_78.docx @ 1140944 @ @ 1

CAUTION

Damage to the hydraulic system if a not approved oil or oil mixture has been used!

The hydraulic system may get damaged when using not approved hydraulic oils or a mixture of different oils which is not approved.

• NEVER use engine oil for the hydraulic system.

• NEVER mix different types of oil.

• Before changing types of oil please consult the customer service.

Pos: 120.22 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Aufstellung von Mineralölen für die Hydraulikanlage @ 257\mod_1398240822712_78.docx @ 1970671 @ @ 1

List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly HEPG pressure fluids that decompose quickly.

Pos: 120.23 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/GrundmaschineTechnische Daten Betriebsstoffe Aufstellungs_Tabelle von Mineralölen @ 324\mod_1425453178898_78.docx @ 2491935 @ @ 1

ISO viscosity class HEPG VG 46 HLP VG 46

Manufacturer

ADDINOL

AGIP

ARAL

ASEOL

AVIA

BECHEM

BP

CASTROL

COFRAN

BAF 46Vitam

Aqua VG 46

Avia Hydrosynth 46

Hydrostar UWF 46

Biohyd PEG 46

Hydraulic oil HLP 46

Aral Vitam GF 46

AVILUB RSL 46

Avia Fluid ZAD 46

Energol HLP 46

HYSPIN AWS 46

Cofraline extra 46 S

DEA Econa PG 46 Astron HLP 46

ELF ELFOLNA

ENGEN

ESSO

FINA

FUCHS

Hydraulic oil PGK 46

Hydraulic oil D3031.46

ELFOLNA DS 46

Engen TQH 20/46

NUTO H 46

HYDRAN 46

FRAGOL Hydraulic

Renolin PGE 46 RENOLIN

MR 15, VG 46, B15 VG 46

KLÜBER

KUWAIT

LIQUI MOLY

Mobil

SHELL Fluid BD 46

SRS

Stuart

Theunissen

Hydrocor E46

ISOCOR E46

TOTAL

TRIBOL

Pos: 120.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

VALVOLINE

VERKOL

Ultrasyn PG 46

Hydraulics S46

HLP 46 ISO

Mobil DTE 25

Mobil Hydraulic Oil Medium

Shell Tellus oil 46

Shell Hydrol DO 46

WIOLAN HS 46

WIOLAN HX 4

Cofraline extra 46 S

Azolla ZS 46

Tribol ET 1140-46

Tribol 943 AW 46

Vesta HLP 46

408

Pos: 120.25 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/HHydraulikölstand @ 0\mod_1197297631728_78.docx @ 17342 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

17.5 Hydraulic oil level

Pos: 120.26 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_2 @ 0\mod_1197297750885_78.docx @ 17361 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• When working on the hydraulic system, always switch off the engine.

• Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)

Pos: 120.27 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Hydrauliköltank Kontrolle_Wechsel BM 400 @ 13\mod_1225787591212_78.docx @ 163063 @ @ 1

2

1

3

BM 400 0165_1

Fig. 363

Before checking oil level:

• Park the machine horizontally

• Lower all mowing units and switch off the engine.

Oil level check:

• Time interval: Daily

• The oil must be visible in the inspection window (1).

• Refill oil if necessary (2)

Oil change:

• Time intervals: every 500 hours or when the filter warning indicator lights, but at least once a year

• Drain oil with suitable hose via plug-in connection (3)

• Collect the used oil in a suitable collection vessel.

• Top up the oil (2)

• Oil level (oil must be visible in inspection window (1)).

Capacity: approx. 80 l (approx. 21 U.S. gal)

Pos: 120.28 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Hinweis - Altöl ordnungsgemäß entsorgen @ 0\mod_1197008117002_78.docx @ 15550 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 120.29 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The used oil must be disposed of correctly

409

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Hydraulikölfilter ersetzen BM 400 @ 13\mod_1225788077446_78.docx @ 163114 @ 2 @ 1

17.6 Replacing the hydraulic oil filter

2

1

3

BM 400 0218_1

Pos: 120.31 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 364

Note

Ensure total cleanliness when changing the filter

Properly dispose of filter cartridge that was removed

• Replace the filter element (3) the first time after 50 operating hours, then every 500 operating hours or after each mowing season (at the same time as changing the hydraulic oil).

• Release the filter (2) and unscrew it from its holding.

• Replace the filter with a new filter.

Screw on new filter as follows:

• Moisten the sealing surface of the filter with oil.

• Once the filter seal touches the sealing surface of the filter housing, tighten the filter manually making a 3/4 to 1-1/4 turn. Do not over tighten.

• Check the filter for leaks while the engine is running and tighten if necessary.

410

Pos: 120.32.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/HHochdruckfilter @ 26\mod_1245836423991_78.docx @ 264126 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.32.2 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Mitteldruckfilter mit elektr. Verschmutzungsanzeige @ 91\mod_1326192916928_78.docx @ 777827 @ @ 1

The filter takes up depositions of solid particles of the hydraulic system. The filtering of the hydraulic circuit serves as a prevention of damages on components of the circuit. The filter is equipped with an electrical contamination indicator. If the degree of contamination is too high, an appropriate error message appears in the display.

Pos: 120.32.3 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Hinweis Fehlermeldung „1501 Druckfilter Lenkhydraulik 1502 Druckfilter Arbeitshydraulik @ 145\mod_1359645603295_78.docx @ 1301176 @ @ 1

Note

If the error message “1501 pressure filter steering hydraulics” appears in the display, the filter element on the high pressure filter steering hydraulics must be replaced.

If the error message “1502 pressure filter work hydraulics” appears in the display, the filter element on the high pressure filter work hydraulics must be replaced.

Pos: 120.32.4 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Hochdruckfilter bei Komfort_Hydraulik Bild_BM 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359643655665_78.docx @ 1300754 @ @ 1

2

5

1

3

4

Fig. 365

Pos: 120.32.5 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/6) Hochdruckfilter Lenkhydraulik / 7) Hochdruckfilter Arbeitshydraulik @ 145\mod_1359645719424_78.docx @ 1301239 @ @ 1

6) High pressure filter steering hydraulics 7) High pressure filter work hydraulics

Pos: 120.32.6 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Filterelement wechseln @ 26\mod_1245841608710_78.docx @ 264205 @ @ 1

Replacing the Filter Element

Pos: 120.32.7 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Ort Hochdruckfilter Arbeitshydraulik BM 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359644287555_78.docx @ 1300813 @ @ 1

The filter (6,7) of the hydraulic circuit is located on the left machine side on the engine.

Pos: 120.32.8 /BA/Wartung/Umwelt/Hinweis Entsorgen / Lagern von Öle und Ölfilter Umwelt @ 32\mod_1253101375171_78.docx @ 311770 @ @ 1

ENVIRONMENT! - Disposal and storage of used lubricants and oil filters

Effect: Environmental damage

Store or dispose used oil and oil filters according to statutory provisions.

Pos: 120.32.9 /BA/Wartung/Hochdruckfilter/Mitteldruckfilterelement wechseln(mit Verschmutzungsanzeige) Text @ 175\mod_1372656347161_78.docx @ 1501445 @ @ 1

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Relieve all pressure from the hydraulic system.

• Unscrew the bottom part of the filter (4) from the top part of the filter (1), clean it and make certain that it is not damaged.•

• Remove the filter element (3) and replace it by a new one with identical properties.

• Push a new filter element (3) onto the valve sleeve (5).

• Check the O-ring seal (2) and, if necessary, replace it by a new one with identical properties.

Pos: 120.33 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Screw the bottom part of the filter (4) onto the top part of the filter until the stop is reached and turn it back one quarter of a revolution.

• Charge the hydraulic system with pressure and check it for leaks.

411

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.34.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/VVerteilergetriebe @ 2\mod_1202991526780_78.docx @ 64104 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 120.34.2 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Selbstfahrer/Verteilergetriebe Bild BM 420 Caterpuillar/MAN @ 181\mod_1376999399451_78.docx @ 1553125 @ @ 1

1

3

BMII-203

Fig. 366

1) Filler plug / filling hole 2) Inspection screw / control hole

Pos: 120.34.3 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölsorte PAO SHC Mobil 630 verwenden @ 142\mod_1357727534047_78.docx @ 1262085 @ @ 1

Note

Only use gearbox oil (PAO Mobil SHC 630).

Pos: 120.34.4 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölqualität /Ölmenge: siehe Kapitel Technische Daten (2015-09-11 09:58:47) @ 134\mod_1350483480921_78.docx @ 1188085 @ @ 1

Oil Quality / Amount of Oil: Refer to Chapter Technical Data “Lubricants”

Pos: 120.34.5 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_Wechsel/Ölkontrolle / Ölwechsel Intervall: siehe Kapitel Wartung „Wartungstabelle“ @ 134\mod_1350483605921_78.docx @ 1188115 @ @ 1

Interval for oil level check and oil change: refer to chapter Maintenance “Maintenance Table”

Pos: 120.34.6 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_WechselÖlstandskontrolle NEU über Kontrollschraube @ 464\mod_1466681322572_78.docx @ 3127741 @ @ 1

Oil level check:

• Unscrew the inspection screw.

• The oil level must reach up to the inspection hole.

If the oil reaches the inspection hole:

• Mount the inspection screw with the specified tightening torque, refer to chapter

Maintenance “Tightening Torques for Locking Screws and Bleed Valves on the Gearboxes”.

If the oil does not reach the inspection hole:

• Unscrew the filler plug.

• Top up oil via the filling hole up to the inspection hole.

Pos: 120.34.7 /BA/Wartung/Ölkontrolle_WechselÖlwechsel NEU @ 140\mod_1355142057277_78.docx @ 1244610 @ @ 1

• Mount the inspection screw and the filler plug with the specified tightening torque, refer to chapter Maintenance “Tightening Torques for Locking Screws and Bleed Valves on the

Gearboxes”.

Pos: 120.35 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Oil change:

Collect escaping oil in a suitable container.

• Screw out oil drain plug and drain the oil.

• Screw out inspection screw and filler plug.

• Screw in oil drain plug and tighten it securely.

• Top up new oil via oil filling hole until the control hole is reached.

• Screw in the inspection screw and the filler plug and tighten them securely.

412

Pos: 120.36 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Luftansaugung und -Verteilung @ 0\mod_1197299076041_78.docx @ 17457 @ 2 @ 1

17.9 Air intake and distribution

Maintenance – Basic Machine

BMII-217

Fig. 367

Pos: 120.37 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 368

413

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.38 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/F-J/FFrischluftfilter @ 52\mod_1289402342234_78.docx @ 504132 @ 3 @ 1

17.9.1 Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter

Pos: 120.39 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Frischluftfilter defekt oder falsch eingebaut WARNUNG @ 52\mod_1289402772703_78.docx @ 504186 @ @ 1

WARNING! – Fresh air filter faulty or incorrectly installed

Dust gets into the cab, is inhaled, and causes health damage.

• Make certain the filter is seated to form a seal.

• Replace faulty fresh air filters immediately.

Pos: 120.40 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frischluftfilter Bild BM420/500/BigX @ 134\mod_1351070195091_78.docx @ 1194065 @ @ 1

2 1

4

3

4

BM 420 0023_1

Pos: 120.41 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Frischluftfilter text @ 134\mod_1351070370414_78.docx @ 1194152 @ @ 1

Fig. 369

A fresh air filter (3) in the form of a wedge filter cell is located in the upper cab area behind the gill screen (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. The fresh air filter protects the driver in the cab against airborne contamination outside the cab. Check the fresh air filter for soiling prior to any operation.

Note

If filters are not properly maintained they may become very soiled, no longer ensuring that sufficient fresh air is passed into the cab.

• Open the closing devices (1) by turning 90° clockwise.

• Reverse the locking lever (4) to the left in order to unlock the filter.

• Pull out the fresh air filter (3), check it for soiling and clean it, if necessary.

Pos: 120.42 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Clean the fresh air filter (3) by knocking it, never clean with compressed air. In case of severe soiling, the fresh air filter (3) must be replaced.

414

Pos: 120.43 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Umluftsieb @ 0\mod_1197299889400_78.docx @ 17546 @ 3 @ 1

17.9.2 Circulation filter

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.44 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BX200550

Fig. 370

Note

If the circulating air filter (1) is very dirty, the output of the air conditioning system may be reduced and it may heat up.

• Clean the circulating air filter (1) regularly.

415

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.45 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SScheibenwaschanlage @ 0\mod_1197300179760_78.docx @ 17565 @ 2 @ 1

17.10 Windscreen washer system

Pos: 120.46 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Scheibenwaschanlage Bild Big M 420 @ 181\mod_1377170490274_78.docx @ 1557794 @ @ 1

2

1

3

BM 420 0029_2

Fig. 371

1) Reservoir for windscreen washer system

2) Flap

3) Cover

Pos: 120.47 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Scheibenwaschanlage auffüllen @ 126\mod_1345727954351_78.docx @ 1144110 @ @ 1

The reservoir for the windscreen washer system is located front right behind the flap over the front wheel. It is filled from above via the opening in the right platform.

Note

• To obtain a better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add some screen cleaner/anti-freeze for the windscreen washer system to the water.

• In winter empty the washer system or fill with special anti-freeze agent.

Pos: 120.48 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Check the level of the windscreen washer system every day.

• Open the flap.

The liquid level is OK if the windscreen liquid in the reservoir can be seen.

• Close the flap.

The windscreen liquid must be refilled if there is no windscreen liquid in the reservoir.

• Close the flap.

• Put a ladder on the platform.

• To free the opening in the platform, push the protection cover to the side.

• Remove the cover of the reservoir.

• Make sure that the windscreen liquid does not escape from the reservoir when refilling it.

• Attach the cover to the reservoir to close the reservoir.

• Close the opening in the platform with the protection cover.

• Put away the ladder.

416

Pos: 120.49 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Reinigen des Vorabscheiders_Caterpillar @ 149\mod_1361528968979_78.docx @ 1334298 @ 2 @ 1

17.11

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Cleaning the adjustment plate on the pre-separator

Access to the pre-separator

Warning! – Steep ladder!

Danger of falling

• Always be directed towards the machine when climbing or descending

• Use the handle

• Do not step onto the engine cover of the machine

The pre-separator (1) for the intake air of the engine is maintenance-free. Under specific operating conditions, dirt accumulations on the adjustment plate (2) may arise. These have to be removed if necessary.

3 1

2

BM 420 0156

Fig. 372

The pre-separator (1) can be accessed via the auxiliary ladder (3) (left machine side).

CAUTION!

Pos: 120.50 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Only effect the cleaning of the area around the pre-separator and the cleaning of the adjustment plate (2) of the pre-separator from the auxiliary ladder. Stepping on the machine

(engine cover) is not permitted.

417

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.51.1 /Layout Module /Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.docx @ 54443 @ @ 1

This page has been left blank deliberately.

Pos: 120.51.2 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

418

Pos: 120.51.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/LLage der Sensoren (linke Maschinenseite) @ 114\mod_1338796047381_78.docx @ 1004692 @ 2 @ 1

17.12 Position of the Sensors (Left Machine Side)

Pos: 120.51.4 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/SensorenLage der Sensoren LH BM 420 @ 349\mod_1436348300871_78.docx @ 2625460 @ @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

16 20 17

6

1 2

9a 9b

10

Fig. 373

1

14

21

2

16

22

6

14 21

9a

22

9b 10

17

20

419

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.51.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

2

6

7

8

Pos.

1

Sensors

Air filter contamination

Moisture / temperature

Side mounted mower locking

Spring relief

Flush valve temperature

Sensor type

Negative pressure switch

Namur sensor

Optional Tightening torque

Pressure sensor

Temperature switch

X

17 Nm

70 Nm (a= 3mm)

9a Auger speed

9b Speed of lateral mowing unit drive

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

14 Position of outrigger arm

16 Brake tank pressure

17

20

21

Excess pressure/negative pressure air conditioning

Hydraulic oil tank level

Pressure sensor driving hydraulics

Namur sensor

Pressure switch

Pressure switch

Filling level sensor

Pressure sensor

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

420

Pos: 120.51.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/LLage der Sensoren (rechte Maschinenseite) @ 114\mod_1338795965308_78.docx @ 1004663 @ 2 @ 1

17.13 Position of the Sensors (Right Machine Side)

Pos: 120.51.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Sensoren/Lage der Sensoren RH BM 420_Caterpillar @ 190\mod_1381233302861_78.docx @ 1623124 @ @ 1

18 7

4

Maintenance – Basic Machine

6

9a 9b

Fig. 374

10

4

7 8

8

14

3

5

11 12

15 13

5

9a

6

9b 10

BM 420 0169

421

Maintenance – Basic Machine

12 13

11

14 15

18

Pos. Sensor designation Sensor type

Pos: 120.51.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

3 Filling level, fuel

4 Suction return air filter

5 Service brake

6 Lateral mowing unit locking

7 Spring compensation

8 Temperature flush valve

9a Auger speed

9b Speed of lateral mowing unit drive

10 Cutting height lateral mowing units

11 Front mowing unit speed

12 Axle suspension position

13 Cutting height front mowing unit

14 Position of the outrigger arm

15 Service brake switch

18 Feedback - drive pumps

Dipstick sensor

Manometric switch

Pressure sensor

Namur sensor

Pressure sensor

Temperature switch

Namur sensor

Rotation angle potentiometer

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Path measurement

Namur sensor

Namur sensor

Captive washer potentiometer

X)

(optional) Tightening torque

60 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

X

X

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a= 3mm)

10 Nm (a=2mm)

422

Pos: 120.51.9 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/E/Einstellung der Sensoren @ 0\mod_1199962173428_78.docx @ 37635 @ 3 @ 1

17.13.1

Pos: 120.51.10 /BA/Wartung/Sensoren/Namursensor d = 12 mm BM 400 @ 35\mod_1258362555125_78.docx @ 335159 @ 4 @ 1

Adjusting the Sensors

17.13.1.1 Namur sensor d = 12 mm

Maintenance – Basic Machine

3

1 a

2

BP-VFS-088-1

Fig. 375

The dimension “a” between the encoder (2) and the sensor (1) must be set differently according to function (see table “Position of the sensors”)

Setting

• Loosen the nuts on either side of the sensor

• Turn the nuts until dimension "a" (see table “Position of the sensors”) is reached

Pos: 120.51.11 /BA/Wartung/Sensoren/Namursensor d = 30 mm BM 420 @ 188\mod_1380180316348_78.docx @ 1611365 @ 4 @ 1

• Tighten the nuts again

17.13.1.2 Namur Sensor d = 30 mm

3

1

2 a

BPXC0172

Pos: 120.52 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 376

The dimension “a” between transmitter (2) and sensor (1) must be set differently according to function (refer to table “Position of the Sensors”).

Setting

• Loosen the nuts on either side of the sensor.

• Turn the nuts until the dimension "a" (refer to the table “Position of the sensors”) is reached.

• Tighten nuts again.

423

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.53.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/WWartung Klimaanlage und Heizung @ 0\mod_1197301016697_78.docx @ 17643 @ 2 @ 1

17.14

Pos: 120.53.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSpezielle Sicherheitshinweise @ 0\mod_1196660495760_78.docx @ 9134 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating

17.15 Special Safety Instructions

Pos: 120.53.3 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/WARNUNG! – Verletzungsgefahr durch Berührung von Kältemittel! @ 0\mod_1197301139072_78.docx @ 17682 @ @ 1

Warning! - Contact with refrigerant

Effect: Injuries

• In case of repair, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, refrigerant emissions may occur; these emissions may be liquid or gaseous and are a hazard for man and the environment. Take suitable protective measures (wear protective goggles and protective gloves).

• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.

• Secure the machine against the possibility of rolling back.

• Repair, upkeep, maintenance and cleaning work must be carried out only by authorised specialists.

• In the case of refrigerant burns, always seek medical attention. Bring the datasheet to present to a physician (see Chapter "Refrigerant Data Sheet R 134a (excerpt)).

• Ensure sufficient ventilation when working on the refrigerating system.

• During refill and repair do not allow refrigerants to escape; dispose of them into a recycling container.

• Spare parts that are used must correspond to the technical requirements of the machine manufacturer. For this reason, use KRONE original spare parts only.

• Extreme caution is advised when welding close to the air conditioning system

Pos: 120.53.4 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Komponenten der Klimaanlage @ 0\mod_1197301531697_78.docx @ 17701 @ 3 @ 1

17.15.1 Air conditioning components

A Compressor on engine at the left-hand side of the vehicle, driven via V-belt

B Capacitor behind the radiator unit, accessible from the left and right

C Dryer/collector behind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicle

D Evaporator

Pos: 120.53.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1 in the cab roof

E Manometric switch on drier, behind the radiator unit at the left-hand side of the vehicle

F Expansion valve at the evaporator inlet

G Air conditioning system/heating rotary switch in cab, roof panel

424

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.53.6 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Kältemittel BM 400 @ 126\mod_1345723465211_78.docx @ 1143781 @ 3 @ 1

17.15.2 Refrigerant

CAUTION

Environmental damage due to chemicals!

The air conditioning system is operated with refrigerant R134a (tetrafluorethane). This substance contains no chlorine atoms, and thus is not harmful to the ozone in the atmosphere of the world. However, the refrigerant shall not simply be discharged as the environment will be damaged if refrigerant gets into it.

• Collect the refrigerant with a recycling plant.

• Thus do NOT separate the connecting pipes beforehand.

• Have all maintenance and repair work on the air conditioning system carried out only by your Krone dealer with a suitable disposal and recycling equipment.

Pos: 120.53.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Druckschalter @ 130\mod_1347276640139_78.docx @ 1161115 @ 3 @ 1

Fig. 377

NOTE

When the fan speed is at the highest still pleasant performance, set the cooling performance of the air conditioning system to an average value. Let the air conditioning system not operate at the lowest fan speed and highest cooling performance.

The air conditioning system has been fitted with a manometric switch (1) which shuts down the system in case of excess pressure or negative pressure (on the dryer behind the combined radiator on the left hand side in direction of travel).

Pos: 120.53.8 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

425

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.53.9 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Sammler / Trockner (2012-09-10 13:37:24) @ 0\mod_1197352605245_78.docx @ 17844 @ 3 @ 1

17.15.4 Collector/drier

BMII-134

Fig. 378:

Since the refrigerant collector is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised container regulations during production and testing.

According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test group II in accordance with the permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the pressure product p x l.

According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containers must be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case the recurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of the tank in use. In combination with the inspection the refrigerant collector must be subjected to a visual inspection twice a year.

Special attention shall be given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in a correct state, for safety reasons it must be replaced to ensure sufficient protection to the user and third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating pressurised containers.

Note

Pos: 120.53.10 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally +1°

Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.

426

Pos: 120.53.11 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kältemittelzustand und die Füllmenge prüfen @ 131\mod_1347277627360_78.docx @ 1161370 @ 3 @ 1

17.15.5 Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling Quantity

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Fig. 379

Checking the filling quantity

The refrigerant quantity is checked on the viewing glass (2) via the white float ball (5).

Interval for refrigerant level check : refer to chapter Maintenance - Basic Machine

“Maintenance Table”.

Start the engine.

Switch on the air conditioning system and set it to the highest action.

If the white float ball (5) is at the top, the refrigerant level is OK.

If the white float ball (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be filled by a specialist workshop.

Checking the refrigerant condition

The refrigerant condition (moisture saturation) is checked on the viewing glass (2) by the orange indicator pearl (3)

Check the interval for refrigerant condition: refer to chapter Maintenance-Basic Machine

“Maintenance Table”.

If the indicator perl (3) is orange, the refrigerant condition is OK.

If the indicator perl (3) has turned colourless, the dryer-receiver-unit must be changed by a specialist workshop.

Note

Pos: 120.53.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Observe the label (4) on the dryer (1).

427

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.53.13 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/KKühler und Kühlerraum reinigen @ 182\mod_1377244557397_78.docx @ 1561485 @ 2 @ 1

17.16 Cleaning the Radiator and the Radiator Compartment

Pos: 120.53.14 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kondensator prüfen Bild BM 420 @ 182\mod_1377495042110_78.docx @ 1562254 @ @ 1

2

5

1 6

7

BM 420 0030_2

Fig. 380

Pos: 120.53.15 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Klimaanlage/Kondensator prüfen BM 420 @ 182\mod_1377246091200_78.docx @ 1561573 @ @ 1

Always keep the radiator, the radiator compartment, the condensator block, the sieve drum and the area in front of the sieve drum clean. The named components must be cleaned depending on the degree of soiling, however, at least once a day.

Cleaning the sieve drum

• Switch off the machine and secure it.

• Fold down the ladder (1).

• Open the tailgate (2).

• Clean the sieve drum (3) and the area in front of the sieve drum.

Cleaning the radiator and the radiator compartment

• Open the radiator guards (4), right and left machine side.

• Release the lockings (5) on the radiator frame and swing up the sieve drum.

• Release the locking on the condenser block (6) and swing the condenser block to the side.

• Clean the radiator (7) and the radiator compartment.

• Blow through the condenser block with compressed air from the inside to the outside, making sure that the fins are not damaged.

• Swing back the condenser block and secure it.

• Swivel the sieve drum down and close the locking on the radiator frame.

• Close the radiator guards.

• Close the tailgate.

• Swing up the ladder.

Pos: 120.54 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

428

Pos: 120.55.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/RRiementriebe @ 0\mod_1197276279135_78.docx @ 16733 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – Basic Machine

17.17 Belt drives

Pos: 120.55.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Gefahr - Unvorhergesehene Aktionen an der Maschine_3 @ 0\mod_1197353885870_78.docx @ 17920 @ @ 1

Danger! - Unexpected actions on the machine

Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.

• Always make certain that the drive and the engine are switched off before doing any repairs, maintenance or cleaning. Remove the ignition key!

Pos: 120.55.3 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Durchrutschende Riementriebe @ 0\mod_1197354754964_78.docx @ 17940 @ @ 1

Pos: 120.55.4 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Riemen allgemein @ 13\mod_1226488106287_78.docx @ 165850 @ @ 1

Caution! - Slipping belt drives

Effect: Danger of fire

• The build-up of dust, oil and grass inside the engine compartment is combustible and presents an increased fire hazard .

• Keep the engine and the engine compartment clean at all times.

• Retighten or replace slipping belt drives immediately.

Note

• Keep all belts at good tension constantly.

• Clean dirty belts with caustic cleaning fluid. Do not use petrol or similar products for cleaning.

• Check the tension of new belts after the first 10 operating hours and retension if necessary.

Pos: 120.55.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

429

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.55.6 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Hinweis Prüfen nach den ersten 10,50 danach 250 Stunden @ 131\mod_1348120214097_78.docx @ 1164543 @ @ 1

Note

Check the V-belt tension and condition of all belt drives after the first 10, 50 hours of operation and thereafter every 250 operating hours.

• Replace damaged or worn V-belts.

Pos: 120.55.7 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Voraussetzung schaffen Riementriebe prüfen @ 131\mod_1348118753307_78.docx @ 1164485 @ @ 1

Prerequisite:

• Lower the mowing unit into working position

• Switching off the engine

• Remove the ignition key

• Secure the machine against rolling (parking brake, wheel chocks)

Pos: 120.55.8 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Antrieb Lüfterrad BM 420_Caterpillar @ 147\mod_1360856270080_78.docx @ 1316773 @ 3 @ 1

1

2 3 a

BM

Fig. 381

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 132 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a = approx. 132 mm is set.

To replace belt (1):

• Relieve the spring (2) in the tension roller (3).

• Remove belt (1).

• The belt pulley (4) must be exactly aligned.

• If necessary, adjust the belt pulleys (4) with the screws (5).

• Set a new belt in place and tension the spring in the tension roller a = 132 mm

Note

Pos: 120.55.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Make sure the fan blade is in a central position in the radiator cover.

430

Pos: 120.55.10 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Auslegerarme @ 12\mod_1225198179100_78.docx @ 154214 @ 3 @ 1

17.17.2 Outrigger arms

Maintenance – Basic Machine a a

SFM1-450

SFM1-460

Abb. 382

Outrigger right / left

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 87 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a= about 87 mm is set.

Note

Pos: 120.55.11 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Auslegerarme säubern @ 149\mod_1361538040106_78.docx @ 1334635 @ @ 1

Tighten the left and right tensioning system only until the distance tube makes contact in the spring. (Do not overstretch!)

Cleaning the Outrigger Arms

3

2

1

BM 420 0157

Fig. 383

If the crop is dry and the accumulation of dirt is heavy, the accumulations of dirt in the outrigger arms must be cleaned every day.

To do this:

• Move the lateral mowing units to transport position.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Unscrew the cover (1) underneath on the outrigger arm (right and left sides of the machine).

Pos: 120.55.12 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Lower the lateral mowing units to working position.

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and secure the machine from rolling away.

• Unscrew the cover (2) on the belt cover (3) (right and left sides of the machine).

• Blow away the contamination downwards to the outrigger arm with compressed air.

• Screw on the covers (1,2) (right and left sides of the machine).

431

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.55.13 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Riemen der Auslegerarme ersetzen BM 420 @ 149\mod_1361776454327_78.docx @ 1334736 @ @ 1

Replace the belt on the outrigger.

3

4

2

1

Fig. 384

• Remove the belt covers.

• Relieve the springs (1) in the tension rollers.

Note

Remove the cover plate (3) on the right side.

• Loosen the lubrication lines (2).

Pos: 120.55.14 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Replace the belt (4) and check to make certain it is correctly seated.

• Tighten the springs (1) to a length of 87 mm.

• Install the cover plate (3) on the right side.

• Install the belt covers.

BM 400 0167

432

Pos: 120.55.15 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Antriebsriemen Mähwerk @ 0\mod_1197357675011_78.docx @ 18056 @ 3 @ 1

17.17.3 Drive of mowing unit

Maintenance – Basic Machine

BMII-218

Fig. 385

• The belt tension is produced using the hydraulic cylinder (pressure 50 bar). Reset the single-acting cylinder using the springs.

Replace the lateral mowing unit V-belt

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

BM202340

Fig. 386

• Remove the attachment bolts (1) of the belt covers (2) on both sides.

• Remove the belt covers (2).

• Replace the belt and check to make certain it is correctly seated.

• Install the belt covers (2) again.

Pos: 120.55.16 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Antrrieb Querförderer 80mm BM 400/420 @ 13\mod_1226401985570_78.docx @ 165677 @ 3 @ 1

433

Maintenance – Basic Machine

17.17.4 Cross Conveyor Drive

8

1

2

6 7 3 5 4 6

BM 400 0230

Fig. 387

Check belt tension

Length of spring under tension a = approx. 80 mm

Correcting the belt tension:

• Remove the guard (1)

• Increase or reduce the spring tension of the tension spring (2) until distance a = approx. 80 mm is set.

• Install the guard (1)

To replace belt (3):

• Remove the guard (1)

• Remove the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).

• Use the mounting lever (4) to raise the idler pulley (5).

Pos: 120.55.17 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Remove the old belt (3).

• Place the new belt (3) onto the pulleys (6).

• Lower the idler pulley (5) slowly and withdraw the mounting lever (4).

With the V-belt under tension, dimension a must be equal to approx. 80 mm. Correct the belt tension as necessary

• Install the protective strut (7) and sensor holder (8).

• Install the guard (1)

434

Pos: 120.55.18 /BA/Wartung/Riementriebe/Selbstfahrer/Riemen am Zetterantrieb prüfen/ spannen/ ersetzen BM 420 CAT @ 505\mod_1499415884859_78.docx @ 3477479 @ 3 @ 1

17.17.5

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Checking/ tensioning/ replacing belt on the conditioner drive shaft

3 2 7

8

6

5

1 a= 240

4

4

Fig. 388

1) Guard

3) Belt/kraftband

6 ) Belt pulley

8) Screws

Prerequisite:

– The machine is parked and secured from rolling away.

– The ignition key has been removed and taken with the driver.

– The cross conveyor has been removed.

Checking the belt tension

2

BM 420 0196

• Check dimension a.

– If dimension a is 240 mm, the belt tension is adequate.

– If dimension a is not 240 mm, the belt tension must be corrected.

Correcting the belt tension:

• Increase or reduce dimension a until distance a = approx. 240 mm is set.

• Attach the guard.

Replacing the belt

Pos: 120.56 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Remove the ring screw.

• Remove the housing cover.

• Loosen the eight connecting screws on the belt pulleys.

• Loosen the hexagon socket-head screw and remove the first belt pulley from the shaft.

• Remove the old belt.

• Place the new belt over the V-belt pulleys.

• Push the belt pulley onto the shaft and secure with the eight connecting screws.

• Fit the hexagon socket-head screw and the washer.

• Tighten the ring screw until dimension a is 240 mm.

• Attach the guard and the housing cover.

435

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.57.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/RReifen @ 0\mod_1197357995667_78.docx @ 18075 @ 2 @ 1

17.18 Tyres

Pos: 120.57.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Warnung - Falsche Reifenmontage @ 0\mod_1197358162433_78.docx @ 18132 @ @ 1

Warning! - Tyre fitting incorrect

Effect: Injuries or damage to the machine

• Fitting tyres requires sufficient knowledge and the availability of proper tools!

• If tyres are not correctly fitted, it could explode when pumped up. This can cause serious injury. If you do not have sufficient experience of fitting tyres, have tyres fitted by the

KRONE dealer or a qualified tyre specialist.

• When fitting tyres on the wheel rims, the maximum pressure given by the tyre manufacturer must not be exceeded. The tyre or even the wheel rim could explode and/or burst.

• If the tyre heels do not fit properly when the maximum permitted pressure is reached, let out the air, align tyres, lubricate the tyre heels and pump up the tyre again.

• Detailed information about how to fit tyres onto agricultural machinery can be obtained from the tyre manufacturers.

Pos: 120.57.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/RReifengröße wechseln @ 182\mod_1377182698177_78.docx @ 1559803 @ 2 @ 1

17.19

Pos: 120.57.4 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Reifengröße wechseln @ 182\mod_1377181411119_78.docx @ 1559775 @ @ 1

Changing the Tyre Size

CAUTION!

If it is intended to change the tyre size, please ask KRONE customer service as the software parameter must be adapted by the traction drive, if necessary.

Pos: 120.57.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

436

Pos: 120.57.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/P-T/RReifen prüfen und pflegen @ 0\mod_1197358037214_78.docx @ 18094 @ 3 @ 1

17.19.1

Pos: 120.57.7 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Reifen prüfen Bild Big M 420 @ 87\mod_1320329410237_78.docx @ 745224 @ @ 1

Checking and maintaining tyres

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Fig. 389

Pos: 120.57.8 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Reifen prüfen Big M 400 Text (2012-08-27 16:36:49) @ 0\mod_1197358379792_78.docx @ 18172 @ @ 1

Check the tyres for damage and air pressure every day as the service life of tyres depends on the air pressure.

• Repair any cuts or tears in the tyres as soon as possible or change the tyres.

• Do not expose tyres to oil, grease, fuel, or chemicals; nor should you let them stand in the sunlight for long periods.

• Drive carefully; avoid driving over sharp stones or edges.

• Use a precisely working tyre gauge to check the tyre pressure at least once a week (see chapter entitled "Technical Data").

Note

Pos: 120.57.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Never operate the machine at the tyre pressure usual for transport of the tyres. Keep the valve caps fitted on the valves to keep dirt out. Check the tyre pressure frequently!

437

Maintenance – Basic Machine

Pos: 120.57.10 /BA/Wartung/Reifen/Radbefestigung 630 Nm @ 0\mod_1197359014933_78.docx @ 18210 @ 3 @ 1

17.19.2 Wheel mounting

630 Nm

BM 400 0256

Fig. 390:

Tighten the wheel nuts after the first and then every 20 to 25 operating hours to a torque of 630

Nm.

Pos: 120.58 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Grundmaschine/Befestigungsschrauben am Ausleger nachziehen BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197386860573_78.docx @ 20209 @ 3 @ 1

17.19.3 Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the Outrigger

1

BMII-365

Pos: 121 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 391:

• Retighten (annually) the four fastening bolts (1) on the frame arms to a tightening torque of

640 Nm.

438

Pos: 122.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Schmierplan @ 0\mod_1197359304198_78.docx @ 18232 @ 1 @ 1

18

Pos: 122.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/AGelenkwelle abschmieren @ 388\mod_1445351149785_78.docx @ 2778829 @ 2 @ 1

Maintenance – lubrication chart

18.1 Lubricating the cardan shaft

Pos: 122.3 /BA/Wartung/Gelenkwelle schmieren/Abschmieren Gelenkwelle BM 400 @ 0\mod_1197359557776_78.docx @ 18392 @ @ 1

Maintenance – lubrication chart

50h

50h 50h

50h

20h

BM 400 0211

Fig. 392

All other grease nipples on the PTO shafts must be lubricated as shown in the illustration.

Pos: 122.4 /BA/Wartung/Gelenkwelle schmieren/Abschmieren Doppelgelenke am Hauptgetriebe @ 0\mod_1197360015073_78.docx @ 18473 @ 2 @ 1

18.2 Lubricating the double joints on the main gearbox

2x

30h

BMII-328

Pos: 122.5 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 393:

All other grease nipples on the double joints must be lubricated as shown in the illustration to the side.

Note

The lateral mowing units must be moved into the transport position first when using hydraulic auger hoods.

439

Maintenance – lubrication chart

Pos: 122.6 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/P-T/SSchmierplan @ 0\mod_1197361829026_78.docx @ 18495 @ 2 @ 1

18.3 Lubrication Chart

Pos: 122.7 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Schmierplan/Big M 400/420/500/Schmierplan BM 420 Bild @ 184\mod_1379057385217_78.docx @ 1588096 @ @ 1

2

1 16 3

1

12

8

9

6 5x

8

1

12

1

3 16

1

10

5

5

13

11

4 2x

4 2x

14 7

15

15

Fig. 394

Pos: 122.8 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Schmierplan/Big M 400/420/500/Schmierplan BM 420 CV Tabelle @ 184\mod_1379057410830_78.docx @ 1588125 @ @ 1

Position Number Operating hours Note

1

3

4

5

5

2

4

4

10 25 50 100 250

X

X

X

X

2 1

Crank for conditioner plate (CV)

Double joint (universal joint bracket)

Double joint (main gearbox) (CV)

Hydraulic cutting height adjustment

7 1

X unit)

X Full floating axle

Pos: 123 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

X levelling system cylinder

9 2 Universal shaft (transfer gearbox / front mowing unit)

10

11

12

13

4

2

2

4

X

X

X

X

Cylinder spring compensation

Belt tensioner auger

Storage tensioning arm V-belt

Lifting cylinder lateral mowing unit

14

15

1

2

16 4

Total =41

X

X

X

Sieve drum bearing

Bearing tension roller support

Ball joint eye top link

11

440

Pos: 124.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Elektrik @ 0\mod_1197362427261_78.docx @ 18572 @ 1 @ 1

Maintenance – electrical system

19 Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 124.2 /BA/Sicherheit/7. Gefahrenhinweise alt/Warnung - Wartung - Elektrik @ 143\mod_1358922291365_78.docx @ 1279905 @ @ 1

WARNING! –

Unauthorized manipulation of the electronics may cause injuries; in some cases even death.

Always make certain before doing any repairs, maintenance and cleaning:

• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and apply the parking brake.

• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling.

When making repairs (welding work):

Pos: 124.3 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batteriehauptschalter @ 45\mod_1276841104984_78.docx @ 409039 @ 3 @ 1

• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

• Remove the cable plug from the engine control (ECM) on the engine.

19.1.1 Main battery switch

Pos: 124.4 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete WarnhinweiseAchtung – Motorschaden: Den Batterie-Hauptschalter nicht bei laufendem Motor betätigen @ 349\mod_1436272532454_78.docx @ 2624529 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

Engine damage!

• Do not switch off the main battery switch while the engine is running, the ignition key must be in the “STOP” position.

• In case of an emergency, the main battery switch can also be actuated when the ignition key is not in the “STOP” position.

Pos: 124.5 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 420_Caterpillar Bild mit Legende @ 143\mod_1358843186580_78.docx @ 1278708 @ @ 1

Fig. 395

1) Main battery switch 0)

I)

Electrical power circuit interrupted

Electrical power circuit turned on

Pos: 124.6 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie-Hauptschalter BM 420_Caterpillar Text @ 143\mod_1358843532553_78.docx @ 1278737 @ @ 1

The main battery switch is located front on the right machine side above the front wheel behind the lateral flap.

The main battery switch is used to turn on or interrupt the machine’s power supply.

Interrupt the electrical power circuit after using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs.

• Turn the main battery switch to “0” position to interrupt the electrical power circuit.

Pos: 124.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

441

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 124.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/BBatterie @ 0\mod_1197366520558_78.docx @ 18648 @ 2 @ 1

19.2 Battery

Pos: 124.9 /BA/Sicherheit/Batterie/Warnung -Batterie prüfen und laden @ 143\mod_1358923461369_78.docx @ 1279964 @ @ 1

WARNING!

An improper use with the battery, for example an accidental connection of the battery pole with a metal object may cause the battery to explode. This can cause serious injuries and burns.

An oxyhydrogen gas is produced in the battery, for example by charging the battery a long time. A spark may ignite the oxyhydrogen gas. The explosion may cause injuries. Splashing battery acid may furthermore lead to burns.

• Use a suitable voltage measuring device for checking the state of the battery.

• Follow the instructions for charging the battery within the machine (see chapter

Maintenance - Electrical System “Removing and Installing Battery”).

• Keep fire, sparks and naked light clear of the battery.

• Do only transport the battery upright to ensure that no acid escapes.

Pos: 124.10 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie warten @ 260\mod_1399275188571_78.docx @ 1987792 @ 3 @ 1

19.2.1 Servicing the battery

Pos: 124.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

• Keep the battery surface clean and dry, clean with a damp or anti-static cloth only.

• Protect the battery terminals and connecting terminals from corrosion by applying terminal grease to the battery terminals and connecting terminals.

• Use a brush to remove any oxidation from the terminal posts.

• When batteries are removed and placed in storage, regularly check the charge state or use a charge maintenance device. If the open-circuit voltage is below 12.3 V, recharge the battery.

• Keep removed batteries cool, dry and charged.

442

Pos: 124.12 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batterie aufladen @ 0\mod_1197368701995_78.docx @ 18795 @ 3 @ 1

19.2.2 Charging Batteries

Pos: 124.13 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie aufladen: Bild mit Legende_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358951137958_78.docx @ 1282154 @ @ 1

Maintenance – electrical system

1

G1 G2

2

G3

Fig. 396

1) Batteries for engine electronics (24 V) 2) Battery on-board electrical system (12

V)

Pos: 124.14 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie aufladen: Ladestromgeräte Batterie ist vollständig geladen @ 143\mod_1358931504982_78.docx @ 1280575 @ @ 1

In case of a voltage-controlled battery charger, the battery is completely charged if current and voltage remain constant.

In case of a current-controlled battery charger, the battery is completely loaded if the charging voltage does not increase within 2 seconds, the automatic battery charger shuts down or the charge conservation switches.

Pos: 124.15 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie aufladen: Batterie (G1 und G2) der Motor-Elektronik aufladen @ 143\mod_1358950949350_78.docx @ 1282095 @ @ 1

Charging the batteries of the engine electronics

2

1

G1

12V

G2

12V

24 V

Fig. 397

1) Engine electronics (24 V) 2) Direct current battery charger

Pos: 124.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

The batteries (G1 and G2) must always be charged jointly.

Charging voltage: 28.8V if there are two 12 V batteries connected in series.

• Switch off the battery charger.

• Turn main battery switch to “0” position.

• Connect the negative cable of the battery charger with the negative pole (-) of battery (G2).

• Connect the positive cable of the battery charger with the positive pole (+) of the battery

(G1).

• Switch on the battery charger.

After charging

• Switch off the battery charger.

• Disconnect the positive cable of the battery charger from the positive pole (+) of battery

(G1).

• Disconnect the negative cable of the battery charger from the negative pole (-) of battery

(G2).

443

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 124.17 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie aufladen: Batterie (G3) der Bordnetz-Elektronik aufladen @ 143\mod_1358950788291_78.docx @ 1282036 @ @ 1

Charging the battery of the on-board electrical system

2

1

G3

12V

Fig. 398

1) On-board electrical system (12 V) 2) Direct current battery charger

Pos: 124.18 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Charging voltage: 14.4V if there is one 12 V battery

• Switch off the battery charger.

• Turn main battery switch to “0” position.

• Connect the negative cable of the battery charger with the negative pole (-) of the battery

(G3).

• Connect the positive cable of the battery charger with the positive pole (+) of the battery

(G3).

• Switch on the battery charger.

After charging

• Switch off the battery charger.

• Disconnect the positive cable of the battery charger from the positive pole (+) of the battery

(G3).

• Disconnect the negative cable of the battery charger from the negative pole (-) of the battery

(G3).

444

Pos: 124.19 /Überschriften/Überschriften 3/A-E/B/Batterie aus- und einbauen @ 143\mod_1358949974500_78.docx @ 1281889 @ 3 @ 1

19.2.3 Removing and Installing Battery

Pos: 124.20 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie aus- und einbauen_Bild mit Legende_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358949879679_78.docx @ 1281860 @ @ 1

12V 24V

XG1/1

XG1/2

1

G1 G2

G3 2

Maintenance – electrical system

XG1/3 XG2/1

G1

12V

24 V

XG3/1

XG3/2

G3

12V

XG3/3

XG3/4

G2

12V

XG2/2

XG2/3

XG2/4

Fig. 399

The connection cables for the batteries are marked to simplify installation and removal.

Pos: 124.21 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)Batterie-Haupschalter in Stellung "0" schalten @ 435\mod_1456396482149_78.docx @ 2991348 @ @ 1

Prerequisite:

– The main battery switch is in the "0" position, .

Pos: 124.22 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie G1 und G2 ausbauen @ 143\mod_1358949718651_78.docx @ 1281802 @ @ 1

Removing battery G1 and G2

• Disconnect the negative cables (XG2/2, XG2/3 and XG2/4) from the negative pole (-) of the battery (G2).

• Disconnect the positive cables (XG1/1 and XG1/2) from the positive pole (+) of the battery

(G1).

• Disconnect the positive cable (XG2/1) from the positive pole (+) of the battery (G2).

• Disconnect the negative cable (XG1/3) from the negative pole (-) of the battery (G1).

• Remove the support (G1/G2) and put it aside.

• Remove the battery (G1 and G2) from the battery compartment.

• Install the support.

Pos: 124.23 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie G3 ausbauen @ 143\mod_1358949663346_78.docx @ 1281773 @ @ 1

Pos: 124.24 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Removing battery G3

• Disconnect the negative cables (XG3/3 and XG3/4) from the negative pole (-) of the battery

(G3).

• Disconnect the positive cables (XG3/1 and XG3/2) from the positive pole (+) of the battery

(G3).

• Remove the support (G3) and put it aside.

• Remove the battery from the battery compartment.

• Install the support.

445

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 124.25 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie einbauen: den Batterie-Haupschalter in Stellung "0" schalten @ 143\mod_1358949530588_78.docx @ 1281714 @ @ 1

Installing

• Turn the main battery switch to “0” position.

Pos: 124.26 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie G1 und G2 einbauen @ 143\mod_1358949444982_78.docx @ 1281685 @ @ 1

Installing battery G1 and G2

• Remove the support (G1/G2) and put it aside.

• Insert batteries (G1 and (G2) into the upper battery compartment.

• Install the support.

• Connect the negative cable (XG1/3) to the negative pole (-) of battery (G1).

• Connect the positive cable (XG2/1) to the positive pole (+) of battery (G2).

• Connect the positive cables (XG1/1 and XG1/2) to the positive pole (+) of battery (G1).

• Connect the negative cables (XG2/2, XG2/3 and XG2/4) to the negative pole (-) of battery

(G2).

Pos: 124.27 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Batterie(n)/Batterie G3 einbauen_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358949391473_78.docx @ 1281626 @ @ 1

Pos: 124.28 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Installing battery G3

• Remove support (G3) and put it aside.

• Insert battery (G3) into the lower battery compartment.

• Install the support.

• Connect the positive cables (XG3/1 and XG3/2) to the positive pole (+) of the battery (G3).

• Connect the negative cables (XG3/3 and XG3/4) to the negative pole (-) of battery (G3).

446

Pos: 124.29 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/DDrehstromgenerator @ 0\mod_1197370865698_78.docx @ 19073 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 124.30 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Drehstromgenerator Big M 420_Bild mit Legende_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358953558832_78.docx @ 1282243 @ @ 1

1

Maintenance – electrical system

2

BM 420 0127

Fig. 400

1) Three-phase generator (24V) for engine electronics.

2) Three-phase generator (12V) for onboard electrical system.

Pos: 124.31 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Drehstromgenerator: Keilriemen kontrollieren/spannen/ersetzen_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358954406172_78.docx @ 1282332 @ @ 1

Have the three-phase generators checked once a year at a specialist workshop.

Checking/tightening/replacing the V-belts of the three-phase generators

Pos: 124.32 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

If you need any information about the procedure, please refer to the enclosed Caterpillar operation and maintenance manual chapter Maintenance „Checking/Tightening/Replacing Vbelt“.

447

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 124.33 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/AAnlasser @ 143\mod_1359015440912_78.docx @ 1282764 @ 2 @ 1

19.4 Starter

Pos: 124.34 /BA/Sicherheit/6. Überarbeitete Warnhinweise/Achtung - Falscher Umgang mit dem Anlasser @ 143\mod_1358955356407_78.docx @ 1282419 @ @ 1

Caution!

An improper use with the starter may cause a short circuit. Due to this electronic components may be damaged.

• Interrupt the electrical power circuit with the main battery switch.

• Disconnect the positive lines on the batteries (G1 and G3) when working on the starter.

• Protect the cable contacts of the positive lines against inadvertent contact with the battery contacts or components of the machine.

Pos: 124.35 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Anlasser: Bild Big M 420_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1358955194068_78.docx @ 1282361 @ @ 1

1

BM 420 0128

Fig. 401

Pos: 124.36 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Anlasser: Hinweis es liegen weiterhin 24 Volt am Anlasser an @ 143\mod_1359015608818_78.docx @ 1282792 @ @ 1

Note

If the electrical power circuit is interrupted by the main battery switch, 24 V is still present on the starter.

Pos: 124.37 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Anlasser: Einführtext_Caterpillar @ 259\mod_1398834417824_78.docx @ 1984415 @ @ 1

If the starter fails or does not work properly, determine the cause of the damage. If the suggestions below do not repair the damage, ask your KRONE dealer.

Pos: 124.38 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Anlasser: Störung Ursache, Behebung_Caterpillar @ 143\mod_1359009365455_78.docx @ 1282515 @ @ 1

Malfunction Cause, remedy

The starter fails or does not work properly

The batteries (G1 and G2) are charged insufficiently.

• Charge the batteries.

The connection cable to the starter is loose.

• Firmly tighten the cable connections

The cable connections are corroded.

• Clean the cable connections on the starter as well as on the engine.

The solenoid switch of the starter or the starter is defective.

• Have the starter checked by a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter relay is defective.

• Replace the starter relay.

Pos: 124.39 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

448

Pos: 124.40 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Steuereinheiten und Sicherungen Big M 420_Caterpillar @ 148\mod_1361340946048_78.docx @ 1323715 @ 2 @ 1

19.5 Control Units and Fuses

2

Maintenance – electrical system

1

A

BM 420 0147

Pos: 124.41 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 402

Note

Have work on the electronic system carried out by KRONE after-sales service or KRONE dealer only!

Overview of control units:

The control units listed below are located behind the cover (1) of the operating console.

CUC control unit console

SmartDrive (traction drive)

DIOM output module

Video box (optional)

Distributor (relay box 24V)

KMC1 Krone machine controller

Potential distributor circuit board

ISOBUS / ECU (Electronic Control Unit)

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the control units listed above are located on the console circuit board. The console circuit board (2) is located behind the cover (A) of the operating console. The operating console is located in the driver's cab. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled "Console Circuit Board"

449

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 124.42 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/ECM- Electronic-Control-Module BM 420_Caterpillar @ 145\mod_1359548182851_78.docx @ 1296835 @ 3 @ 1

1

BM 420 0129

Fig. 403

The electronic control unit (ECM, Electronic-Control-Module (1)) is located in direction of travel right on the engine. For more information, please refer to the operating instructions of the engine manufacturer. Designations of fuses, relays as well as LEDs for the electronic control unit (ECM) are located on the console circuit board.

The console circuit board is located in the driver's cab behind the cover of the operating console. For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled "Console Circuit

Board".

Pos: 124.43 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Kabinen-Relaisplatine BM 500 @ 41\mod_1272009693283_78.docx @ 374776 @ 3 @ 1

19.5.2 Cabin relay circuit board

1

Pos: 124.44 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

BM 500 0160

Fig. 404

Designations of fuses, relays and LEDs for the cab are located on the cab relay circuit board.

The cabin relay circuit board is located in the cabin behind the cover (1) on the cabin ceiling.

For an overview of the console circuit board, see the chapter entitled "Cab Circuit Board"

450

Pos: 124.45 /Layout Module /Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.docx @ 54443 @ @ 1

This page has been left blank deliberately.

Pos: 124.46 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Maintenance – electrical system

451

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 124.47 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/20 083 652 0 Platine Konsole Sicherungen BM 420 CAT @ 190\mod_1381303579852_78.docx @ 1624153 @ 3 @ 1

19.5.3 Circuit Board Console

GAL

452

Fig. 405

Fuse Value Designation

22F39

22F40

22F41

20A ISOBUS release electronics

10A Supply 12V relay distributor

15A Axle suspension valve

Maintenance – electrical system

22F45

22F46

22F46.1

22F47

7.5A

5A

5A

7.5A

Ignition stage 1 teleservice

Ignition stage 1 terminal

Continuous voltage terminal

Ignition stage 1 CUC

22F47.1 7.5A Continuous voltage teleservice

22F48.1 7.5A Ignition stage 2 reserve

22F53 10A Ignition stage 1 CAN diagnostics socket

22F57 5A Joystick ignition stage 1

22F60

22F61

22F62

22F63

22F64

22F65

22F66

20A Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)

5A KMC 1 electronics

20A Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)

20A Ignition stage 1 electronics

20A Ignition stage 2 electronics

5A Continuous voltage joystick

10A Voltage FmX display

453

Maintenance – electrical system

GAL

454

Fig. 406

Maintenance – electrical system

Fuse

22F71

22F72

22F72.1

22F74

Value Designation

20A Ignition stage 1 output

20A ½ absorption volume valve, axle separation

5A Parking brake valve

15A Voltage ISOBUS socket

22F82

22F83

22F84

22F85

22F86

22F87

10A Cigarette lighter 2

10A Cigarette lighter 1

15A Voltage V4 KMC 1

15A Voltage V3 KMC 1

15A Voltage V2 KMC 1

15A Voltage V1 KMC 1

22F92

22F93

Pos: 124.48 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/20 083 652 0 Platine Konsole LED BM 420 CAT @ 190\mod_1381303577764_78.docx @ 1624124 @ @ 1

7.5A Continuous voltage ignition lock

20A Control signal starting engine

455

Maintenance – electrical system

GAL

456

Fig. 407

Maintenance – electrical system

LED Designation

LD0 Continuous voltage terminal

LD1 DIN socket

LD44

LD45

Reserve

Ignition stage 1 teleservice

LD3 Ignition stage 1

LD4

LD5

Ignition stage 1

Ignition stage 2

LD52 Reserve

LD59 DIOM electronics

LD60 Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)

LD61 KMC 1 electronics LD5.1 Ignition stage 2

LD6 ISOBUS release electronics LD62 Ignition stage 1 electronics (slow release)

LD7 Lowering axle suspension valve LD63 Ignition stage 1 electronics

LD8

LD9

LD10

LD11

LD15

Reserve

Reserve

Reserve

Ignition stage 1 (slow release)

Air conditioning compressor signal

LD16 Reserve

LD17 Ignition stage 2

LD17.1 Reserve

LD18 Reserve

LD64 Ignition stage 2 electronics

LD71 Ignition stage 1 output

LD93 Control signal starting engine

LD101 Automatic steering release

LD102 Safety outputs KMC 1

LD105 Door switch

LD106 Reserve

LD20 Parking brake release LD108 Reserve

LD21 Ignition stage 1: Cigarette lighter LD109 Swath hood release right

LD22 Reserve

LD23 Axle separation valve LD111 Traction drive release

LD24 Reserve

LD25 1/2 absorption volume valve front axle

LD26 1/2 absorption volume valve rear axle

LD112 Swath hood release left

LD113 Road/field mode release

LD116 Safety input (toogle)

LD28 Reserve

LD29 Reserve

LD32 Reserve

LD33 Reserve

LD34 Reserve

LD35 Reserve

LD36 Voltage V4 KMC 1

LD37 Voltage V3 KMC 1

LD38 Voltage V2 KMC 1

LD39 Reserve

LD40 Voltage V1 KMC 1

LD43 Traction drive release

457

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 124.50 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/20 082 195 0 Platine Kabine Sicherung BM 420 @ 116\mod_1340278497897_78.docx @ 1015863 @ 3 @ 1

19.5.4 Cab Circuit Board

F1 20A

F2

10A

F3 15A

F4 15A

F5 15A

F6 10A

F7

F8

5A

5A

F17 15A

F20 10A

F21 10A

F22 10A

F23 10A

LD20

LD38

F10 15A

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

5A

5A

5A

15A

7,5A

F16 15A

F9 30A

LD39

LD40

LD24A

LD34

F24 30A

LD24B

LD35

LD36

F25 30A

LD25A

LD25B

LD37

S1

S2

1

1

ON

ON

S3

S4

1

1

ON

ON

S5

S6

1

1

ON

ON

F26 30A

F27 30A

SICHERUNG

TEST

LD18

F19 5A

LD28

F28 15A

LD29

F29 10A

LD30

F30 10A

LD31

F31 10A

LD32

F32 10A

LD33

F33 10A

F34 7,5A

F35

LD41

LD42

LD26A

LD26B

LD27A

LD27B

LD43

S7

S8

1

1

ON

ON

Fig. 408

458

Fuse Valu e

Designation

Maintenance – electrical system

F31

F32

Pos: 124.51 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/20 082 195 0 Platine Kabine LED BM 420 @ 116\mod_1340280038126_78.docx @ 1015923 @ @ 1

F34

F18

F19

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F25

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F26

F27

F28

F29

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F9

15A Seat compressor

15A Side windscreen washers

15A Front windscreen washers, water pump

15A Travel direction indicator

5A Horn, headlamp flasher

30A PWM module fan

5A Control unit for climate control

5A GPS antenna, reserve

5A Air conditioning compressor

15A Radio/CB ignition stage 1

7.5A Radio/CB continuous voltage

15A Hazard warning lights

15A Comfort seat, climate control

Fuse test for all connector locks used on the circuit board

5A Interior lighting, spotlight

10A Dipped beam right

10A Dipped beam left

10A Full beam left

10A Full beam right

30A Working floodlight cabin roof inside

30A Working floodlight cabin roof centre outside

30A Rear working floodlight

30A Working floodlight platform side

15A Working floodlight platform front

10A Reversing horn, reversing lights

10A Rear light, licence plate lamp left

10A Rear light, licence plate lamp right

7.5A Control voltage, full beam

459

Maintenance – electrical system

F1 20A

F2 10A

F3 15A

F4 15A

F5 15A

F6 10A

F7

F8

5A

5A

F17 15A

F20 10A

F21 10A

F22 10A

F23 10A

LD20

LD38

F10 15A

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

5A

5A

5A

15A

7,5A

F16 15A

F9 30A

LD39

LD40

LD24A

LD34

F24 30A

LD24B

LD35

LD36

F25 30A

LD25A

LD25B

LD37

LD26A

S1

S2

1

1

ON

ON

S3

S4

1

1

ON

ON

S5

S6

1

1

ON

ON

F26 30A

F27 30A

LD28

F28 15A

LD29

F29 10A

LD30

F30 10A

SICHERUNG

TEST

LD18

LD31

F31 10A

LD32

F19 5A

F32 10A

F33 10A

F34 7,5A

LD33

F35

LD41

LD42

LD26B

LD27A

LD27B

LD43

S7

S8

1

1

ON

ON

Fig. 409

460

Maintenance – electrical system

LED

LD18

LD20

Designation

Fuse test for all connector locks used on the circuit board

Dipped beam/full beam switching top/bottom

LD24A Working floodlight cabin roof left inside

LD24B Working floodlight cabin roof right inside

LD25A Working floodlight cabin roof left centre/outside

LD25B Working floodlight cab roof right centre/outside

LD26B Rear working floodlight

LD27B Working floodlight platform side

LD28

LD29

Working floodlight platform front

Reversing horn, reversing lights

LD31

LD32

Rear light, licence plate lamp left

Rear light, licence plate lamp right

LD34

LD35

LD36

Ignition stage 2

Radio, CB, GPS

Windscreen wiper, horn, cooler

Pos: 124.52 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

LD41 Reserve

LD43 Delay lights control signal

461

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 124.53 /BA/Wartung/Selbstfahrer/Wartung - Elektrik/Sicherungen/20 081 313 0 Platine KRONE-Maschinen-Controller KMC1 Sicherungen und LED´s BM 420 @ 145\mod_1359543633636_78.docx @ 1296486 @ 3 @ 1

19.5.5 Circuit Board KRONE Machine Controller (KMC1)

462

Fig. 410

Fuse

F2

F6

F12

F13

LED

LD1

Value

10A

25A

10A

25A

Designation

UV4 power supply +12V

UV2 power supply +12V

UV3 power supply +12V

UV1 power supply +12V

Designation

Lifting front mower arm (Y20)

Pos: 125 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

LD3

LD4

LD5

LD6

Main valve (Y19)

Lifting right mower arm (Y22)

Lowering right mower arm (Y23)

Unlocking right mower arm (Y27)

LD7

LD8

Sideshift right (Y29)

Sideshift left (Y28)

LD9 Lowering front mower arm (21)

LD10 Reserve

LD11

LD12

Lowering left mower arm (Y25)

Lifting left mower arm (Y24)

LD13 Speed right drive (B12)

LD14 Reserve

LD15 Reserve

LD16 Speed left drive (B13)

LD17 Reserve

LD18 Speed front drive (B11)

LD19

LD20

LD21

LD22

Locking left mower (B49)

Locking right mower (B48)

Position mower right (B14)

Position mower left (B15)

LD23 Reserve

LD24 Axle suspension position (B20)

LD25

LD26

Speed auger right (B28)

Speed of left auger (B29)

LD30 Left drive (Y10)

LD31 Reserve

LD32

LD33

Lifting axle suspension (Y15)

Unlocking left mower arm (Y26)

Maintenance – electrical system

463

Maintenance – electrical system

Pos: 126 /Layout Module /Diese Seite ist bewusst freigelassen worden. @ 1\mod_1201783680373_78.docx @ 54443 @ @ 1

This page has been left blank deliberately.

Pos: 127 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

464

Pos: 128.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/U-Z/Wartung - Zentralschmierung @ 0\mod_1197378235308_78.docx @ 19471 @ 1 @ 1

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

20 Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 128.2 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/BEKA MAX @ 51\mod_1288863746156_78.docx @ 497745 @ @ 1

BEKA MAX

Pos: 128.3 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Betrieb der Maschine mit nicht zulässigen oder verunreinigten Schmierstoffen @ 51\mod_1288876736250_78.docx @ 497991 @ @ 1

Pos: 128.4 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

CAUTION!

The machine must not be operated with non-permitted or uncleaned lubricants.

Machine damage.

Check the surrounding area to ensure it is clean.

• Use suitable and clean tools.

• Use permitted lubricants.

• Lubricants must be free of impurities.

465

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 128.5 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/UÜbersicht @ 53\mod_1289900374656_78.docx @ 506510 @ 2 @ 1

20.1 Overview

Pos: 128.6 /Abkürzungen /CV-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530180147_78.docx @ 799128 @ @ 1

CV-Design

Pos: 128.7 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Verteilerblöcke Hauptverteiler und Antriebe Übersichts BIG M 420 CV Bild @ 292\mod_1411102988151_78.docx @ 2303455 @ @ 1

1

Fig. 411

Pos: 128.8 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Verteilerblöcke Hauptverteiler und Antriebe Schmierplan BIG M 420 CV Text @ 349\mod_1436267038151_78.docx @ 2624285 @ @ 1

466

6

7

5 3 4

2

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 128.9 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 412

BM 420 0173_1

467

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 128.10 /Abkürzungen /CRi-Ausführung @ 95\mod_1328530542819_78.docx @ 799156 @ @ 1

CRI Design

Pos: 128.11 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Verteilerblöcke Hauptverteiler und Antriebe Übersicht BIG M 420 CRI Bild @ 292\mod_1411103029896_78.docx @ 2303486 @ @ 1

1

2

6

7

5 3 4

8

Fig. 413

Pos: 128.12 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Verteilerblöcke Hauptverteiler und Antriebe Schmierplan BIG M 420 CRI Text @ 349\mod_1436267301060_78.docx @ 2624317 @ @ 1

468

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 128.13 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig. 414

BM 420 0172_1

469

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 128.14 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Schmierstoffbefüllung @ 51\mod_1288863995000_78.docx @ 497771 @ 2 @ 1

20.2 Lubricant filling

USA

1

2

ZTS 000 0001

Fig.415

Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple

The lubricant is filled through the hydraulic-type lubricating nipple (1) by means of a commercially available grease gun.

Pos: 128.15 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Abfüllkupplung @ 51\mod_1288867617671_78.docx @ 497827 @ 2 @ 1

2. Additional mounting connection

3

4

1

2

BX110008

Pos: 128.16 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.416

• Remove the lubrication nipple (3) and replace by filler neck 995-000-705 (4)

• The coupling box 995-001-500 (2) must be fitted to the filling pump (1).

470

Pos: 128.17 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Befüllzylinder @ 51\mod_1288868166031_78.docx @ 497854 @ @ 1

Filling cylinder

M20x 1,5

3

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

2

1

BX110009

Fig. 417

• Remove the M20x1.5 closure screw (3) and replace by filler socket 940 392 0 (2)

Pos: 128.18 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Schmierstoff @ 186\mod_1380004894079_78.docx @ 1606288 @ 2 @ 1

• For filling remove the protective cap on the socket (2) and the filling cylinder 940 393 0 (1)

20.4 Lubricant

To ensure continuous problem-free operation of the central lubrication system, we recommend using the adjacent greases that we have tested (greases with sodium soap must not be used in either the on-road or off-road area because they are soluble in water.)

Note

To ensure the system works properly, be careful no impurities enter the system when refilling lubricant. Dirt will cause malfunctions in the central lubrication system and will damage or destroy parts at friction points.

Grease can be changed from conventional grease to bio-degradable greases (and vice-versa) for the products listed here without resulting disadvantage.

Standard commercial greases or greases recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or grease should be used as lubricants . Greases should still exhibit adequate suction and flowing behaviour at –25 °C (max. flow pressure 700 mb).

They must not have a tendency to bleed out, since this can result in blockages during extended operation.

MoS2 greases (up to 5 % molybdenum disulphide) can be distributed and pumped with progressive pumps.

Pos: 128.19 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/Vogel/Verwenden von falschen Schmierstoffen @ 11\mod_1222685784023_78.docx @ 142396 @ @ 1

Warning - Use of incorrect lubricants

Pos: 128.20 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Effect: Bearing damage to the machine

Use only the lubricants listed here. The central lubrication must never under any circumstances be filled with fluid grease.

471

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 128.21 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Füllstandskontrolle @ 86\mod_1320160327245_78.docx @ 742075 @ 2 @ 1

20.5 Checking the fill level

USA

1 min

Pos: 128.22 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Fig.418

Visual

The transparent lubricant tank (1) permits a visual inspection of the fill.

2

ZTS 000 0002

472

Pos: 128.23 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Zeiten des Schmierintervalls ändern @ 86\mod_1320160656490_78.docx @ 742103 @ 2 @ 1

20.6

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Change the Times of the Lubrication Interval

The lubrication intervals of the system have been pre-adjusted ex works.

Default setting upon delivery:

Cycle time: 1h

Lubrication period: 8 min

Change setting:

9

7

8

ZTS 000 0003

Fig. 419

• Use a flat screw driver to remove the red frame (7) on the protective motor housing of the pump

• Unscrew the four cross-head screws and lift off the transparent protective cover

• Use a flat screwdriver to set the cycle time (8) / lubrication duration (9)

• Reposition the transparent protective cover and secure it with the four cross-head screws

• Securely attach the red frame (7) again

CAUTION!

If the cover is not properly closed, water can penetrate the system, which then may be destroyed. In this case, the warranty will be void.

Pos: 128.24 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Fehlersuche und Beseitigung @ 51\mod_1288879023093_78.docx @ 498017 @ 2 @ 1

20.7 Troubleshooting

Pos: 128.25 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

Jam in the system or at a connected lubrication point.

• Unscrew the outlet screw connections from the main distributor to the subdistributor one after the other. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when one of the outlet screw connections is loosened, the connected subdistributor is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the main distributor is blocked. Clean the main distributor or replace it.

• Reinstall the outlet screw connections.

• Loosen the outlet screw connections on the blocked subdistributor. If lubricant suddenly exits under pressure when unscrewing one of the outlet screw connections, the connected lubrication point is blocked. If lubricant does not exit from any of the outlet screw connections, the subdistributor is blocked. Clean the blocked subdistributor and replace it if required.

• Remove the blockage at the lubrication point.

473

Maintenance – Central Lubrication

Pos: 128.26 /BA/Wartung/Zentralschmieranlage/BEKA-MAX/Wartung - Zentralschmierung/Beschreibung der Signalanzeigen @ 408\mod_1450089978523_78.docx @ 2886824 @ 3 @ 1

Fig. 420

The functions of the pump are indicated by two control LEDs, red (1) / green (2) in the viewing window (3) for the motor half shell of the pump.

Explanation of the display

LED Explanation

LED continuously lit

LED flashes every 1 s

LED is lit for 1.5 s

LED is not lit

Description of the signal displays

LED red LED green

Explanation

Display of functional readiness

The LEDs are lit simultaneously.

1.5 s 1.5 s

Program run of a lubrication process

The green LED is lit throughout the lubrication process.

Cycle error on the progressive distributor

The LEDs flash in identical cycles.

1 s

1 s

Error grease level; grease level too low

The LED is lit until the lubricant tank is topped up.

Error pump motor speed

1 s

Error CPU/memory

Pos: 129 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

0.5 s

474

Pos: 130.1 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Einlagerung @ 0\mod_1197385459120_78.docx @ 19966 @ 1 @ 1

21

Pos: 130.2 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/A-E/AAm Ende der Erntesaison @ 0\mod_1197385501276_78.docx @ 19985 @ 2 @ 1

Placing in Storage

Placing in Storage

21.1

Pos: 130.3 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Einlagerung Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197385531370_78.docx @ 20004 @ @ 1

At the End of the Harvest Season

Placing the machine in storage at the end of the harvest season is the best possible way to preserve the machine.

• Park the machine in a dry place protected from the elements where no commercial fertilisers are stored.

• Support the machine on blocks so that the entire weight is not resting on the wheels.

• Clean the machine thoroughly through the maintenance openings inside and out. Chaff and dirt attract moisture, which causes steel parts to begin rusting.

Note

If a high pressure washing device is used for cleaning, do not point the water jet at the bearing or electrical system/electronic components.

• Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart. Grease the threadings of setting screws and similar items; relieve springs.

• Transport interlock ratchet mechanism for side mowers: grease the bolt.

• Lubricate the plunger rods of all hydraulic cylinders liberally and insert as far as possible.

• Moisten with oil all lever joints, cutter bars, and bearing points that cannot be lubricated.

Write down all repair jobs that must be performed by the next harvest and arrange for them to be done with sufficient lead time. Your KRONE dealer is better able to perform maintenance service and any required repairs outside of harvest season.

Pos: 130.4 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/K-O/MMotorbereich @ 0\mod_1197385875776_78.docx @ 20043 @ 2 @ 1

Pos: 130.5 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Hinweis auf Motorhersteller @ 0\mod_1197385918276_78.docx @ 20062 @ @ 1

Note

Pos: 130.6 /BA/Einlagerung/Reibkupplung/Reibkupplung BYPY stilllegen @ 452\mod_1463492991743_78.docx @ 3074512 @ 2 @ 1

For further information, please refer to the engine manufacturer’s operating instructions included with delivery (chapter on cleaning and preservation)

21.3 Decommissioning Friction Clutch (ByPy) on Universal Shaft

2

Pos: 130.7 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

KR305460

KR305470

Fig. 421

At the beginning of the time of decommissioning, fully screw in the hexagon socket-head screws

(2) on the friction clutch. This will relieve the disc springs' pressure on the friction lining and prevent the tendency to adhere. The flange coupling is vented.

475

Placing in Storage

Pos: 130.8 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/U-Z/VVor Beginn der neuen Saison @ 0\mod_1197386024448_78.docx @ 20081 @ 2 @ 1

21.4 Before the Start of the New Season

Pos: 130.9 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Text vor Beginn der Saison Big M 400 @ 0\mod_1197386062214_78.docx @ 20100 @ @ 1

Before the start of the new harvest season, conduct a thorough inspection of the machine.

Keeping the machine in flawless condition will rule out the possibility of costly malfunctions during harvest time.

If this was not already done after the last harvest, the machine must be thoroughly cleaned inside and out.

• Refit any belts and V-belts that were removed and check belt tensions.

• Remove the covers from the engine openings.

• Lubricate the machine completely according to the lubrication chart.

• Check to make certain all bolts are tightened and all cotter pins are in place.

• Check all seals and the filling quantity of the cooling system. Antifreeze and anticorrosion agent must remain in the cooling system even during summer months, since they protect the system against corrosion.

• Check the batteries. Check the charge state and height of the battery acid. If necessary, charge the batteries.

• Check the tyre pressures.

• Retighten the four attachment bolts on the frame arms to a tightening torque of 640 Nm

(annually).

Pos: 130.10 /BA/Einlagerung/Selbstfahrer/Reibkupplung mit Druck belegen @ 452\mod_1463492544253_78.docx @ 3074441 @ @ 1

• After these tasks are complete, let the machine run about one hour at half speed. Then check all bearings for overheating.

• Recreate the pressure on the friction discs of the friction clutch, refer to chapter “Restarting the Friction Clutch - ByPy”, next page.

Pos: 130.11 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

476

Pos: 130.12 /BA/Einlagerung/Reibkupplung/Reibkupplung BYPY entlüften @ 452\mod_1463493197737_78.docx @ 3074543 @ 2 @ 1

21.5 Restarting Friction Clutch (ByPy) on Universal Shaft

2

Placing in Storage

1

Pos: 131 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

KR305450

KR305460

Fig. 422

Unscrew the 4 hexagon socket-head screws (2) as far as they will go by using an allen key (1).

The hexagon socket-head screws are not entirely threaded. Therefore they cannot be screwed out of the coupling.

The coupling is now ready to use.

477

Disposal of the machine

Pos: 132 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Entsorgung der Maschine @ 274\mod_1404207309028_78.docx @ 2060455 @ 1 @ 1

22

Pos: 133 /BA/Entsorgung der Maschine/Die Maschine entsorgen @ 274\mod_1404207434449_78.docx @ 2060544 @ 2 @ 1

Disposal of the machine

22.1 Disposal of the machine

Pos: 134 /Layout Module /---------------Seitenumbruch---------------- @ 0\mod_1196175311226_0.docx @ 4165 @ @ 1

After the service life of the machine has expired, the individual components of the machine must be disposed of properly. The applicable country-specific, current waste disposal guidelines and the legal laws must be observed.

Metal parts

All metal parts must be brought to a metal recycling centre.

The components must be freed from operating fluids and lubricants (gear oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) before being scrapped.

The operating fluids and lubricants must be brought separately to an environmentally friendly disposal point or recycling centre.

Operating fluids and lubricants

Operating fluids and lubricants (diesel fuel, coolant, gear oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) must be brought to a disposal point for waste oil.

Synthetic materials

All synthetic materials must be brought to a recycling centre for synthetic materials.

Rubber

Rubber parts (hoses, tyres, …) must be brought to a rubber recycling centre.

Electronic scrap

Electronic parts must be brought to a disposal point for electronic scrap.

478

Pos: 135 /Überschriften/Überschriften 1/A-E/Anhang @ 1\mod_1202278612285_78.docx @ 58360 @ 1 @ 1

23 Appendix

Pos: 136 /Überschriften/Überschriften 2/F-J/FFehlermeldungen @ 13\mod_1226558727524_78.docx @ 166264 @ 2 @ 1

=== Ende der Liste für Textmarke Inhalt ===

Appendix

479

A  

Abrasion Limit ................................................... 393

Activating fast reversing.................................... 303

Actuating release switches ................................. 88

Adjust all mowing units to 0°. ............................ 159

Adjustable Fan Nozzles .................................... 111

Adjusting Skids ................................................. 310

Adjusting the conditioner plate ......................... 315

Adjusting the cutting height ...................... 306, 308

Adjusting the Lifting Height ............................... 307

Adjusting the mowing units ............................... 305

Adjusting the roller conditioner (optional extra) 316

Adjusting the Sensors ....................................... 423

Adjusting the swath width ................................. 319

Adjusting the Tedder Speed ............................. 313

After Shearing Off ............................................. 399

Air comfort seat ................................................... 60

Air Conditioning System ..................................... 54

Air filter .............................................................. 360

Air intake and distribution ................................. 413

Aligning the Cutter Bar ...................................... 381

Allround lights (optional) ..................................... 80

Angular gearbox ....................................... 376, 379

Appendix ........................................................... 479

At the End of the Harvest Season .................... 475

Attaching the Front Mowing Unit ...................... 340

Attaching the Lateral Mowing Unit .................... 346

Autopilot .............................................................. 27

Autopilot release switch / - optional .................... 90

Axle separation key ............................................ 93

B  

Basic screen field mode.................................... 114

Basic screen road travel ................................... 114

Battery ........................................................ 30, 442

Before the Start of the New Season ................. 476

BEKA - MAX central lubrication ........................ 465

Beka Max .......................................................... 465

Belt drives ......................................................... 429

Blade Changing on Cutting Discs ..................... 394

Blade Quick-Fit Device ............................. 388, 396

Blade screw connection .................................... 387

Blade Screw Connection .................................. 395

Brake light ........................................................... 75

Brakes ............................................................... 401

Bringing up a Menu Level ................................. 137

C  

Cab Circuit Board ............................................. 458

Cabin .................................................................. 57

Cabin relay circuit board .................................. 450

Calibrating ISOBUS Steering System .............. 161

Calibrating Steering Angle Sensor ................... 162

Calibrating Steering Automatically ................... 163

Calibrating Steering Manually .......................... 167

Central Lubrication System, NLGI Class 2 ........ 56

Change the Times of the Lubrication Interval .. 473

Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter ............. 414

Changing a customer record (1) or creating a new one ............................................................... 126

Changing the Tyre Size ................................... 436

Charge Indicator Lamp ...................................... 94

Charging Batteries ........................................... 443

Check before Start-up ...................................... 261

Checking and maintaining tyres ....................... 437

Checking Engine Oil Level ............................... 353

Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling

Quantity ........................................................ 427

Checking the Cutter Blades and Blade Holder 386

Checking the material thickness of the leaf springs

..................................................................... 391

Checking the Material Thickness of the Leaf

Springs ......................................................... 390

Checking the material thickness of the retaining bolts.............................................................. 389

Checking the Material Thickness of the Retaining

Bolts ............................................................. 388

Checking/ tensioning/ replacing belt on the conditioner drive shaft .................................. 435

Circuit Board Console ...................................... 452

Circuit Board KRONE Machine Controller ....... 462

Circulation filter ................................................ 415

Cleaning the adjustment plate on the preseparator ...................................................... 417

Cleaning the Engine Compartment with

Compressed Air ........................................... 352

Cleaning the Outrigger Arms ........................... 431

Cleaning the Radiator ...................................... 428

Cleaning the Radiator Compartment ............... 428

Cleaning the Sieve Drum ................................. 428

Cleaning the Tedder Housing .......................... 370

Collector/drier ................................................... 426

Commissioning ................................................ 253

Consumables ..................................................... 55

Contact ............................................................... 51

480

Contamination in the engine compartment ....... 352

Control Units and Fuses ................................... 449

Converting the Tedder Deflector Plate to an

Auger-Type Cross Conveyor ........................ 326

Cooler ................................................................. 65

Cooling system ................................................... 30

Cross Conveyor Drive ....................................... 434

Cruise Control ................................................... 277

Cutter Blades .................................................... 386

D  

Daily checks ...................................................... 261

Danger zones ..................................................... 23

Dangers in Case of Non-compliance with the

Safety Instructions .......................................... 21

Decommissioning the Friction Clutch on the

Universal Shaft ............................................. 475

Deflector Plates ................................................ 325

Deleting Area .................................................... 128

Description of Installation ................................. 255

Deviating Tightening Torques ........................... 368

Diagnostics ....................................................... 176

Diagnostics ISOBUS Steering System ............. 207

Diagnostics Socket (ISO-Bus) ............................ 97

Diagnostics Socket / USB Connection ............... 98

Diesel engine error storage .............................. 241

Direction indicator, hazard lights and brake light 75

Direction Information ........................................... 15

Directories and References ................................ 15

Disable the shut-off valve on the front outrigger

...................................................................... 267

Display of Possible Faults for the Diagnostics . 179

Disposal of the machine ................................... 478

Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions ...... 64

Drive of mowing unit ......................................... 433

Driving and Transport ....................................... 263

Driving Forwards ............................................... 275

E  

Electronic-Control-Module (ECM) ..................... 450

Eliminating Blockages on the Cross Conveyor 371

Emergency exit ................................................... 30

Emergency Exit ................................................... 66

Emergency steering forces ............................... 273

Emptying the Water Separator ......................... 354

Engine area ...................................................... 475

Engine coolant .................................................. 359

Engine Coolant ................................................. 358

Engine diagnostics plug ...................................... 67

Engine oil and filter replacement ...................... 354

Engine oil level .................................................. 353

Engine Overview .............................................. 348

Entering parameters ........................................ 140

Error Message 1414 ........................................ 266

Error Message 1415 ........................................ 266

Error Messages ........................................ 251, 479

F  

Fan wheel drive ................................................ 430

Fast Direction Change (Fast Reversing) ......... 303

Filling Quantities and Lubrication Designations for

Gearboxes ................................................... 373

Fire preventions ................................................. 31

Fitting the guard cloths .................................... 253

Flashing Light Switch ......................................... 70

Folding down Each Lateral Mowing Unit to

Headland Position ........................................ 287

Folding down Lateral Mowing Units

Simultaneously ............................................. 287

Folding Down the Mowing Units ...................... 286

Folding up Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually to Transport Position .................................... 299

Folding Up the Guards ..................................... 264

Folding up the Lateral Mowing Units

Simultaneously to Transport Position .......... 299

Folding up the Mowing Units ........................... 298

Front mowing unit ..... 44, 306, 311, 319, 325, 336,

369, 381

Fuel .................................................................. 356

Fuel filter/water separator ................................ 354

Full Beam ........................................................... 71

G  

Game animal protection ................................... 301

Gearbox for Top Roller Drive ........................... 380

Guide's seat ....................................................... 65

H  

Headlamp Flasher .............................................. 71

High-pressure filter ........................................... 411

Horn ................................................................... 70

How to use this document ................................. 15

Hydraulic system .............................................. 402

I  

Identification Plate .............................................. 50

Ignition lock ........................................................ 96

Implements ........................................................ 29

Indicator Lamps ................................................. 94

Info centre EasyTouch ..................................... 112

Information message ....................................... 252

Information Required for Questions and Orders 50

Information Section .......................................... 114

Information Section Drive Information (VI) ...... 119

481

Information section of settings (IV and V) ......... 119

Information section of the travelling gear data (III)

...................................................................... 117

Input gearbox .................................................... 377

Inside mirror ........................................................ 85

Installation of Cutter Blades .............................. 259

Installing Battery ............................................... 445

Installing Rear Reflectors ................................. 257

Intended use ............................................... 19, 284

Interior lighting/reading lamp .............................. 81

Interior Room Lighting ........................................ 82

ISOBUS Steering System Diagnostics ............. 207

K  

Killing the Engine .............................................. 271

-Klimatronik / heating ........................................ 103

KMC1 ................................................................ 462

L  

Lateral Mowing Unit ......... 312, 313, 320, 374, 384

Left Outside Mirror .............................................. 83

Lifting All Mowing Units to Headland Position .. 297

Lifting Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually to

Headland Position ......................................... 296

Lifting Front Mowing Unit into Headland Position

...................................................................... 295

Lifting the Mowing Units ................................... 295

Lighting ............................................................... 74

Lowering all Mowing Units to Working Position 289

Lowering Each Lateral Mowing Unit Individually to

Working Position ........................................... 288

Lowering Front Mowing Unit to Working Position

...................................................................... 288

Lowering Mowing Units..................................... 288

Lubricant ........................................................... 471

Lubricant filling .................................................. 470

Lubricants ........................................................... 55

Lubricating the cardan shaft ............................. 439

Lubrication Chart .............................................. 440

M  

Machine Data Counter ...................................... 156

Machine overview ............................................... 49

Main battery switch ..................................... 33, 441

Main block ......................................................... 406

Main gearbox .................................................... 374

Main menu 1 Settings ....................................... 138

Main Menu 2 Counters ..................................... 156

Main Menu 3 Maintenance ............................... 158

Main menu 4 ..................................................... 175

Maintenance ....................................................... 32

Maintenance – Basic Machine .......................... 401

482

Maintenance – Central Lubrication .................. 465

Maintenance – electrical system ...................... 441

Maintenance - Engine ...................................... 348

Maintenance – lubrication chart ....................... 439

Maintenance – Mowing Units ........................... 362

Maintenance Table - Engine ............................ 350

Maintenance Table – Mowing Units ................. 364

Manometric Switch ........................................... 425

Manual Mode ................................................... 169

Means of representation .................................... 16

Notes with information and recommendations 18

Warning signs ................................................. 18

Means of Representation

Figures ........................................................... 15

Menu 1-1 Parameters ...................................... 139

Menu 1-2 Machine Setting ............................... 141

Menu 1-3 Units ................................................. 146

Menu 1-4 Language ......................................... 147

Menu 1-5 Display ............................................. 148

Menu 1-5-1 Contrast ........................................ 149

Menu 1-5-2 Beeper .......................................... 150

Menu 1-5-4 Direction of Rotation ..................... 152

Menu 1-5-5 Configure status line ..................... 153

Menu 1-6 Date/time ......................................... 154

Menu 1-9 Owner's address .............................. 155

Menu 3-5 Manual Mode ................................... 169

Menu 3-6 Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter

..................................................................... 173

Menu 4-1 Diagnostics ...................................... 176

Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics of axle suspension .... 180

Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics Work ....................... 210

Menu 4-1-11 CAN-Bus .................................... 218

Menu 4-1-12 Travelling gear ............................ 219

Menu 4-1-13 Electronics .................................. 228

Menu 4-1-14 Diesel Engine ............................. 229

Menu 4-1-15 Joystick ....................................... 232

Menu 4-1-16 Control Unit Console .................. 234

Menu 4-1-17 Display ........................................ 237

Menu 4-1-3 Diagnostics of spring compensation

..................................................................... 183

Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics of cutting height ........ 188

Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics of hydraulic auger hood

..................................................................... 194

Menu 4-1-6 Sideshift diagnostics ..................... 199

Menu 4-1-7 Diagnostics front guard flaps ........ 203

Menu 4-2 Error list ........................................... 238

Menu 4-3 Service level .................................... 243

Menu 4-4 Information ....................................... 244

Menu 4-4-1 Joystick ......................................... 245

Menu 4-4-2 Software ....................................... 246

Menu 4-4-3 Machine ......................................... 248

Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages .......... 249

Menu 5 Basic Screen ........................................ 250

Menu Level ....................................................... 133

Menu Level Short Overview ............................. 133

Metric Thread Screws with Control Thread ...... 365

Metric Thread Screws with Countersunk Head and Hexagonal Socket .................................. 366

Metric Thread Screws with Fine Thread ........... 366

Motor Data (II) Information Section .................. 116

Mounting Auger-type Cross Conveyor ............. 330

Mounting/Dismounting BSS Swath Width for BiG

M CV ............................................................. 321

Moving the Front Mowing Unit to Central Position.

...................................................................... 265

Moving the guards into the working position .... 302

Mowing ............................................................. 300

Mowing Unit Drive ............................................. 290

Mowing with Individual Mowing Units ............... 302

Multi-Function Lever ......................................... 100

Multi-Function Lever Driving ............................. 102

N  

Namur sensor ................................................... 423

O  

Oil Level Check and Oil Change Intervals

(Gearboxes) .................................................. 373

Oil level check and oil change on the cutter bar

.............................................................. 381, 384

Opening the cabin door ...................................... 58

Opening the Front Guard .................................. 368

Operation – Mowing Units ................................ 284

Operation of Mowing Units ............................... 285

Operators controls .............................................. 59

Outrigger arms .................................................. 431

Outside mirrors ................................................... 83

Over-Pressure Valves ....................................... 407

P  

Panel Switch ....................................................... 87

Parking Brake ................................................... 281

Periodical Inspection of the Cutting Discs / Blade

Drums ........................................................... 392

Periodical Inspection of the Leaf Springs ......... 390

Personnel Qualification and Training .................. 21

Placing in Storage ............................................. 475

Position of the Adhesive Safety Stickers on the

Machine .......................................................... 36

Position of the Sensors ............................. 419, 421

Precondition for mowing ................................... 301

Pumps ............................................................... 405

Q  

Quick Access Customer Data Counter ............ 125

Quick access Hydraulic axle suspension......... 130

Quick Access Hydraulically Adjustable Cutting

Height (optional) ........................................... 120

Quick access Hydraulically adjustable lateral spring compensation (ground pressure)

(optional) ...................................................... 122

Quick Access Keys in the Basic Screen .......... 120

Quick access Machine settings ....................... 132

Quick Stop ....................................................... 303

R  

Radio ................................................................ 111

Reasonably foreseeable misuse ................ 19, 284

Refrigerant ....................................................... 425

Refrigerant data sheet R 134a (excerpt) ........... 54

Regenerating Diesel Particulate Filter ............. 124

Reheat Mode ................................................... 107

Release switch - holding brake .......................... 91

Release switch – road/field ........................ 89, 267

Release switch travelling gear ................... 92, 268

Releasing the holding brake manually ............. 283

Remove the Weiste Triangle ........................... 339

Removing Battery ............................................ 445

Removing Mowing Units .................................. 336

Removing of the compensation springs........... 337

Removing the Side Mowing Unit ...................... 341

Re-Ordering this Document ............................... 14

Repairing the sheared off bearing unit ............. 400

Replacing the fuel filter insert .......................... 355

Replacing the Fuel Pre-Filter ........................... 354

Replacing the hydraulic oil filter ....................... 410

Replacing the linings ........................................ 397

Restarting Friction Clutch on Universal Shaft .. 477

Retightening the Attachment Bolts on the

Outrigger ...................................................... 438

Reversing ......................................................... 276

Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ..... 84

S  

Safety ................................................................. 19

Safety cartridge ................................................ 361

Safety Equipment ............................................... 33

Safety routines ................................................... 35

Safety-conscious work practices ....................... 21

Scope of Document ........................................... 16

SectionControl ................................................... 28

Selecting Area .................................................. 128

Self-propelled working machine ......................... 26

Service life of the machine ................................. 20

483

Service Tool Connector ...................................... 67

Servicing the battery ......................................... 442

Setting of the Scraper on the Cross Conveyor

(Optional) ...................................................... 318

Setting the Acceleration Behaviour .................. 273

Setting the anti-collision mirror ........................... 84

Setting the Relief Springs ................................. 310

Setting the right outside mirror ........................... 84

Setting the Steering Radius .............................. 168

Setting the Transverse Links on the Side Mounted

Mowers ......................................................... 325

Shear pins ......................................................... 372

Short Overview Menu Level ............................. 133

Side light/dipped beam ....................................... 76

SMV Emblem ...................................................... 34

Spare Parts ....................................................... 363

Special Equipment – Mowing Units .................. 326

Speed gearbox ................................................. 378

Spotlight .............................................................. 82

Starter ............................................................... 448

Starting the engine ............................................ 269

Starting to Drive ................................................ 272

Starting with an Auxiliary Battery ...................... 271

Start-up ............................................................. 261

Steering Column Adjustment .............................. 69

Steering Column and Foot Pedals ...................... 68

Stopping ............................................................ 279

Stopping and securing the machine ................... 35

Stopping with Foot Brakes ................................ 280

Sun blind ............................................................. 85

Supporting lifted machine and machine parts securely .......................................................... 35

Switch Group Roof Panel ................................... 73

Switch off the machine ...................................... 282

Switch Panel ....................................................... 87

Switching Off Mowing Unit Drives .................... 291

Switching Off the Engine .................................. 282

Switching On / Switching Off All Mowing Unit

Drives ............................................................ 294

Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

.............................................................. 291, 292

Switching On / Switching Off Mowing Unit Drive

Front .............................................................. 293

Switching On Mowing Unit Drives .................... 291

Switching on the dipped beam ........................... 76

Switching on the hazard warning flasher ............ 75

Switching on the indicator ................................... 75

484

Switching on the parking light ............................ 76

Switching On/Off Axle Separation ................... 304

Switching the counter on or off ........................ 127

System Description Operating and Brake

Hydraulics .................................................... 405

T  

Tanks ............................................................... 357

Target group of this document ........................... 14

Technical data .................................................... 52

Technical Data Air Conditioning System ........... 54

Technical Data of the Machine .......................... 52

Telephone and radio sets .................................. 32

Tensioning the V-belt ....................................... 331

Term ................................................................... 15

Test run ............................................................ 363

Three-phase generator .................................... 447

Tightening torques ........................................... 365

Tightening Torques for Locking Screws and Bleed

Valves on the Gearboxes ............................ 367

Tool box ........................................................... 363

Topping up Engine Oil ..................................... 353

Towing ............................................................. 283

Transfer gearbox .............................................. 412

Transport / Road Travel ................................... 263

Troubleshooting ............................................... 473

Tyre pressure ................................................... 260

Tyres .......................................................... 30, 436

U  

Using the operating brake .................................. 72

V  

Variants for Machine Equipment ........................ 49

Venting the fuel system ................................... 358

W  

Washer system .................................................. 86

Wheel chocks ..................................................... 34

Wheel mounting ............................................... 438

Windscreen washer system ............................. 416

Windshield wipers .............................................. 86

Working floodlight Bottom front .......................... 78

Working floodlight rear ....................................... 79

Working floodlights ............................................. 77

Working floodlights ............................................. 79

Working floodlights Cab ..................................... 78

Working in the vicinity of power transmission lines

....................................................................... 31

485

Maschinenfabrik

Bernard Krone GmbH & Co. KG

Heinrich-Krone-Straße 10, D-48480 Spelle

Postfach 11 63, D-48478 Spelle

Phone +49 (0) 59 77/935-0

Fax +49 (0) 59 77/935-339

Internet: http://www.krone.de

eMail: [email protected]

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents